Buffalo Wild Wings

P R O J E C T M A N U A L 

FOR 

Buffalo Wild Wings 

at 

Metrocenter 

10402 North Black Canyon Highway 

Phoenix, Arizona 85051-1506 

Prototype V3.11.1 

Issue Date: June 24, 2011 

Project No.: 110100.001

Buffalo Wild Wings – Metrocenter – Phoenix, AZ 

SECTION 00001 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE 

PROJECT TITLE: 

OWNER: 

LANDLORD / DEVELOPER: 

ARCHITECT: 

CIVIL & LANDSCAPE: 

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: 

M.E.P. ENGINEER: 

BUFFALO WILD WING GRILL & BAR 

10402 North Black Canyon Highway 

Phoenix, Arizona 85051-1506 

BUFFALO WILD WINGS GRILL & BAR 

5500 Wayzata Blvd., Suite 1600 

Minneapolis, MN 55416 

Leslie Ohara 

(817) 937-5860 

Embree Asset Group, Inc. 

10777 Spur Point Ct. 

San Diego, CA 92130 

(858) 481-4838 office 

(858) 481-4056 fax 

David Church 

(858) 354-0007 cell 

dchurch@embreegroup.com 

GHA Architecture / Development 

14110 Dallas Parkway; Suite 300 

Dallas, Texas 75254 

(972) 239-8884 office 

Alan Timmons 

atimmons@gha-architects.com 

GREENBERGFARROW 

1600 North 80 th Street; Suite A 

Scottsdale, AZ 85260 

(602) 633-5290 office 

Kevin Parker 

kparker@greenbergfarrow.com 

Ronald A. Roberts Associates, Inc. 

2948 N. Stemmons Freeway 

Dallas, Texas 75247-6103 

(214) 637-6299 office 

Matthew Betsill 

mbetsill@rara.net 

Michael Bryan Chadwick 

11938 Nichole Lane 

Forney, Texas 75126-7027 

(972) 850-3228 office * (972-850-3229 fax 

Bryan Chadwick 

bchadwick@bcjengineers.com 

ISSUE DATE: June 24th 2011 

END OF PROJECT TITLE PAGE 

04-27-11 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 

00001 -1


SECTION 00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS 

DOCUMENTS 0 -- INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION, BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, AND 

CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 

00001 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE 

00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS 

00011 - MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION LIST 

00100 - BID SOLICITATION 

00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

00220 - SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION 

00221 - SITE SPECIFIC SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT 

00400 - BID FORM 

00500 - AGREEMENT 

DIVISION 1 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

01100 - SUMMARY OF WORK 

01200 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 

01300 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 

01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 

01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 

01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 

01620 - REFERENCES 

01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 

DIVISION 2 -- SITE CONSTRUCTION 

02360 - SOIL TREATMENT 

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 

03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 

03351 - CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER 

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 

04065 - MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 

04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 

04-27-11 TABLE OF CONTENTS 

00010 -1


DIVISION 5 – METALS 

05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 

05210 - STEEL JOISTS 

05310 - STEEL DECK 

05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 

05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS 

DIVISION 6 -- WOOD AND PLASTICS 

06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 

06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY 

06410 - CUSTOM CABINETS 

06415 - COUNTERTOPS 

06605 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 

DIVISION 7 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

07100 - SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 

07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 

07212 - BOARD AND BATT INSULATION 

07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM 

07260 - AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS 

07411 - PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS 

07424 - ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM 

07535 - MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING 

07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 

07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES 

07900 - JOINT SEALERS 

DIVISION 8 -- DOORS AND WINDOWS 

08110 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 

08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 

08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 

08380 - TRAFFIC DOORS 

08410 - METAL FRAMED STOREFRONTS 

08710 - DOOR HARDWARE 

08800 - GLAZING 


00010 -2


DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 

09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER, STUCCO 

09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 

09300 - TILE 

09511 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 

09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING 

09666 - SPECIALTY FLOORING 

09680 - CARPET 

09720 - WALL COVERING 

09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS 

DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES 

10010 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 

10210 - WALL LOUVERS 

10263 - CORNER GUARDS 

10445 - DOOR AND ROOM SIGNS 

10500 - LOCKERS 

10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 

10536 - AWNINGS 

10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES 

DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT - Not used, Refer to Drawings 

DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS 

12493 - WINDOW SHADES 

DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - Not used 

DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING SYSTEMS - Not used 


00010 -3


DIVISION 15 -- MECHANICAL 

15010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 

15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 

15150 - PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 

15200 - INSULATION 

15300 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (PERFORMANCE BASED) 

15400 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 

15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 

15700 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 

15800 - DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND METHODS 

15976 - AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCE 

15990 - TESTING AND BALANCING 

DIVISION 16 -- ELECTRICAL 

16010 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 

16030 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 

16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 

16111 - CONDUITS AND FITTINGS 

16112 - OUTLET BOXES 

16113 - PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 

16117 - SAFETY SWITCHES 

16118 - FUSES 

16120 - WIRE AND CABLE 

16140 - WIRING DEVICES 

16150 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 

16450 - GROUNDING SYSTEM 

16470 - PANELBOARDS 

16500 - LIGHTING 

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 


00010 -4

Material Identification Codes 

for use on Drawings and within Specifications 

Overview 

The Material Identification Codes List is intended to be a tool to improve the coordination and 

naming conventions between Drawings and Specifications. The Material Identification Codes 

List is organized by CSI MasterFormat Specification Section numbers. 

These Material Identification Codes are indicated with the material and product choices 

currently available in the Buffalo Wild Wings Master Specification. 

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11 

00011-1

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 

Indicated on Drawings as: 

(CONC1): Unexposed Form Finish, (Rough "as cast"), typical unless otherwise 

indicated. 

(CONC2): Interior Concrete Slabs, Steel trowel (smooth). 

(CONC3): Exterior Horizontal Concrete Surfaces, Float finish, Heavy broom. 

(Vapor Retarder): Underslab, 10mil thick multi-layer plastic sheet. 

SECTION 03351 - CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER 

Indicated on Drawings as: (SC) Sealed Concrete 

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 

(SC): Water based, concrete hardener / sealer. Exterior horizontal concrete surfaces. 

SECTION 04065 – MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 


(Mortar): Portland cement lime mortar, masonry cement not allowed. 

Mortar Colors: 

1. LaFarge North America; “Santan”; color to match (FBR1) Face Brick. Refer to 

Section 04810. 

2. Spec Mix; Color No. LM-9327-50 #930; color to match (CMU2) Rock Face 

Block. Refer to Section 04810. 

Mortar Locations: 

1. Locations of colored mortar: Used to match Face Brick and Rock Faced Block 

Units. 

2. Natural colored mortar for all other locations. 

(Grout): 3000psi grout. 

SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 


Concrete Masonry Units 

Face Brick Units 

(CMU1): Normal weight hollow concrete masonry units. 

(CMU2): Normal weight, Integral colored, Rock Face concrete masonry units. 

1. Manufacturers: Amcon Block and Precast, Inc., St. Cloud, MN 56304. 

Tel: 888-251-6030. www.amconblock.com 

2. Color: Custom BWW Blend # RF-526. 

(FBR): Type FBS, Grade SW brick units. 

1. Size: 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. 

2. Manufacturers: Sioux City Brick and Tile Company, Sioux City, Iowa 51102. 

Tel: 712-258-7571. www.siouxcitybrick.com 

3. Color: Toasted Fine Art Velour. 

Block and Brick Coursing: Running Bond, 3/8” concave joints. 


00011-2

Accessories for Section 04810 

DIVISION 5 - METALS 

(Joint Reinforcement): Single Wythe, truss type, hot dip galvanized. 

(Wall Ties): Corrugated formed sheet metal, 7/8 inch wide, hot dip galvanized. 

(Masonry Veneer Anchors): 2-piece, triangular shape, hot dip galvanized. 

(Thru-Wall Flashing): Laminated asphalt impregnated cloth over 3 ounce copper core. 

(Building Paper): No. 15 asphalt felt. 

(Weeps): Cotton Rope. 

(Cavity Mortar Diverter): Semi rigid polyethylene mesh. 

SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 

Indicated on Drawings as: Indicate stud and joist sizes and maximum spacing on Drawings. 

(Stl Studs): Structural Steel Studs. 

(Stl Joists): Structural Steel Joists. 

(Sill Sealer): 1/4” thick, close cell polyethylene. 

Exterior Wall Sheathing: Refer to Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry for wall sheathing. 

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS 

Miscellaneous steel shapes, plates and other metal fabrications: 

(Stl Angles) 

(Stl Channels) 

(Loose Lintel) 

(Stl Plate) 

(Stl Tube) 

(Stl Ladder): Steel ladders for roof access. 

(Stl Bollards): Exterior bollards. 

(SSTL): Stainless Steel Components 

DIVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTICS 

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 


Dimensional Framing Lumber and Wood Blocking 

(WD FRAMING): Wood framing lumber. 

(WD BLKG): Exposed or concealed wood blocking. 

Construction Plywood and Sheathing 

(SHTG-1): Wall Sheathing: 

1. Plywood Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 1, C-D, exposure 1, structural 1. 1/2" 

nominal thickness. - Or - 

2. Oriented Strand Board Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 2, exposure 1, structural 1. 

1/2" nominal thickness. 

(SHTG-2): Plywood Roof Sheathing: DOC PS 1, C-D, exterior, structural 1; 3/4" nominal 

thickness. Tongue and Groove. 

(SHTG-3): Concealed Plywood: DOC PS 1, C-C Plugged, exposure 1. Thickness as 

indicated on drawings. 

(SHTG-4): Exposed Plywood: DOC PS 1, A-D, interior grade. Thickness as 


(SHTG-5): Electrical Panel Boards: APA rated sheathing, fire retardant treated. 3/4” 

nominal thickness. 


00011-3

Treated Wood Material 

(PT): Preservative treated wood materials. 

(FT): Fire retardant treated wood materials. 

Fiber Cement Siding and Trim 

(Fiber Cement Siding): 5/16” thick, vertical siding panels, smooth texture. 

(Fiber Cement Soffit): 1/4" thick, soffit panel, smooth texture. 

(Fiber Cement Trim): 1” thick, trim boards, width as indicated, smooth texture. 

Membrane Underlayment: 40 mil. thick, self-adhering sheet underlayment at Entry Canopy. 

SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY 


Items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor: 

(WD1): White Maple, transparent finish. 

(WD2): Southern Pine. 

Factory Finished Millwork: WIC Manual of Millwork, Section 5, System #5 - Catalyzed 

Polyurethane, Clear. 


(Adjustable Shelf Brackets): Brackets and standards, white finish. 

SECTION 06410 – CUSTOM CABINETS 

Items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor: 

(WD1): White Maple, transparent finish. 

Plastic Laminate 

(PLAM1): Wilsonart # 1573-60, Frosty White, Matte. 

(PLAM3): Wilsonart # 1595-60, Black, Matte 


(Grommet): Power cord grommet, 3” diameter. 

SECTION 06415 - COUNTERTOPS 


Plastic Laminate 

Solid Surface 

(PLAM2): Wilsonart # 4884-38, Flame Soapstone, Standard finish. 

(SS1): Corian, Custom BWW color, #PDR AMG24-06-D. 


00011-4

SECTION 06605 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 


FRP Adhesive 

Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels (FRP): 0.090 inch thick, USDA approved, textured 

surface wall panels with Class III/Class C fire rating. 

(FRP1): White. 

(FRP2): Black. 

Franklin International; Titebond Solvent-Based FRP Adhesive. 

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

SECTION 07100 - SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING (Optional) 


(Waterproofing): 60 mil. Thick, Self-Adhering, Sheet Membrane Waterproofing. 

(i.e. Bituthene 3000) 

(Protection Board): 1/4 thick, fan folded extruded-polystyrene board. 

SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 


(Dampproofing): Emulsified Bituminous Dampproofing, Non-fibered, water-based, 

non-sag asphaltic coating designed for spray application. 

(Protection Board): 1/4 thick, fan folded extruded-polystyrene board. 

SECTION 07212 – BOARD AND BATT INSULATION 

Indicated on Drawings as: (INSUL#) 

(INSUL1): Unfaced fiberglass batt insulation. 

(INSUL2): Under Slab and Foundation Insulation, Extruded Polystyrene Board 

(INSUL3): Roof Insulation, Polyisocyanurate board with organic/inorganic facers. 

SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM 

Indicated on Drawings as: (EIFS#) 

(EIFS1) Key Note 18: Color: # 401, “Pretzel”. 

(EIFS2) Key Note 19: Color: Color to Match Sherwin Williams Color # SW6898, 

“Social Butterfly”, (C13). 

(EIFS3) Key Note 20: Color: # 714, “Licorice”. 

(EIFS4) Key Note 21: Color: # 310, “China White”. 

Finish: “Sandpebble” finish on all colors. 

SECTION 07260 – AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS 


(Air Barrier): DuPont Tyvek. 


00011-5

SECTION 07411 – PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS 


(Standing Seam Metal Roof): 24 gauge, galvanized steel panels, 12 inch wide. Kynar 

finish, Color: Matte Black. 

SECTION 07424 - ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM 


(Aluminum Composite Panels): 4mm composite panel with 3-coat, Kynar finish. 

Color: Una-Clad “Silver Metallic”. Rout and Return wet 

joint system. 

SECTION 07535 – MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING 

Indicated on Drawings as 

(Membrane Roofing System): Mechanically attached thermoplastic sheet, .040 inch 

thick. FM Class A and I-60 wind resistance. 

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 

Indicated on Drawings as: (SHT MET#) 

(SHT MET1): Prefinished galvanized steel, kynar coated. Color: Una-Clad “Silver Metallic”. 

(SHT MET2): Standard galvanized flashing. 

(Reglets): Manufactured reglets, surface mounted and recessed. 

SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES 


(Roof Hatch): Roof hatch for vertical ladder locations (2'-6" by 3'-0"), Bilco Type S 

Roof Hatch. 

SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS 

Indicated on Drawings as: (SLNT) 

(SLNT1): General Purpose Exterior Sealant, 1 part, polyurethane. 

(SLNT2): General Purpose Interior Sealant, acrylic. 

(SLNT3): Sanitary/Tile Sealant, 1 part , mildew resistant silicone. 

(SLNT4): Concrete Paving Joint Sealant, 2 part, self-leveling polyurethane for traffic. 

(SLNT5): Butyl Sealant. 

(SLNT6): Low modulus Silicone Sealant, 1 part, general purpose silicone. 

(SLNT7): Ultra-Low Modulus Silicone Sealant, 1 part, silicone. 

Sealant Schedule - Sealant types will be scheduled within the project manual as follows: 

(SLNT1): General Purpose Exterior Sealant, use for: 

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. 

b. Joints between concrete and other materials. 

c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. 

d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. 

(SLNT2): General Purpose Interior Sealant, use for: 

a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. 

b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. 

c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. 


00011-6

(SLNT3): Sanitary/Tile Sealant, use for: 

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. 

b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. 

c. Control joints in tile installations in toilet rooms and kitchen. 

(SLNT4): Concrete Paving Joint Sealant use for: 

a. Joints in concrete sidewalks and vehicular paving. 

(SLNT5): Butyl Sealant, use for: 

a. Seam sealant for masonry flashing. 

b. Bedding sealant for thresholds and sills. 

(SLNT6): Low modulus Silicone Sealant, use for: 

a. Air barrier perimeter. 

b. Exterior sheet metal joints. 

(SLNT7): Ultra-Low Modulus Silicone Sealant, use for: 

a. Perimeter and internal joints in EIFS System. 

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 

SECTION 08110 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 


(HM Frames): 14 gauge galvanized for Exterior Frames. 14 gauge for Traffic Door 

Frames. 16 gauge for Interior Frames. 

(HM Doors): 16 gauge galvanized with polystyrene core for Exterior Doors. 16 gauge 

with honeycomb core for Interior Doors. 

SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 


(Wood Doors): Interior 1-3/4” Solid-Core Doors with Plain Sliced, Select White Maple 

veneers. 

Finish (PS19): Transparent finished doors field finished under Section 09900 - Paints 

and Coatings. 

SECTION 08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 


(AP) Access Panel: Access panels for drywall, EIFS and composite panel soffit locations. 

SECTION 08380 - TRAFFIC DOORS 


(TD): Chase Model # SC-3018, Plastic laminate both sides, 18” s.s. impact plate 

and 9” x 14” acrylic vision panel. 

Plastic Laminate Colors: 

Black: Formica Black 909-58, Dining/Public side of door. 

White: Formica White 949-58, Kitchen side of door. 


00011-7

SECTION 08410 – METAL FRAMED STOREFRONTS 


(Aluminum Storefront & Window Framing): 2” x 4-1/2”, thermally broken, center glazed 

to accept 1/4" and 1” insulated glass. Clear Anodized Finish. 

(Aluminum Doors): 1-3/4 thick, medium stile aluminum doors. 

Aluminum Door Hardware: All Hardware specified except Cylinders and Door Stops. 

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE 

Indicated within the Hardware Groups and on the Door Schedule 

Manufacturers 

Hardware Supplier 

Hinges: PBB. 

Lock and Latch Sets; Schlage; ND Series. Cylinders: Schlage. 

Exit Alarm Locks: Von Duprin; Guard – X. 

Panic Exit Devices: Detex; Value Series. 

Push/Pull Sets; Kick Plates/Armor Plates: Hiawatha. 

Closers: LCN. 

Flush Bolts; Coat Hooks; Hinge Pin Stops; Door Viewers: Ives. 

Wall Stops: Don-Jo Manufacturing. 

Weatherstripping; Sill Sweep; Thresholds; Rain Drips: Reese. 

Twin City Hardware: Brent Chuhel; 651-731-7126; bchuhel@tchco.com 

HARDWARE GROUPS 

Hardware Furnished by Section 08410 – Metal Framed Storefronts 

GROUP 1: Interior Entry Vestibule Doors – Door No. 02 

GROUP 2: Exterior Entry and Dining “B” (Patio) Doors – Door Nos. 01 and 15 

GROUP 14: Single Aluminum Bar (Patio) Door – Door No. 19 

Note: TCH to provide Door Stops for Group 1 & Cylinders and Door Stops for Group 2 & 14 

Hardware Furnished by TCH 

GROUP 3: Restroom Doors – Door Nos. 03 and 07 

GROUP 4: Office – Door No. 10 

GROUP 5: Not Used / Storage Closet 

GROUP 6: Exterior Service Doors - Door Nos. 11 and 14 

GROUP 7: Restroom Stall Doors – Door Nos. 4, 5, 6, and 8 

GROUP 8: Rear Vestibule (Interior) - Door No. 13 

GROUP 9: Mechanical Room – Door No. 18 

GROUP 10: Patio Gates – Door Nos. 16 and 17 

GROUP 11: Traffic Doors – Door Nos. 9 and 12 

GROUP 12: Coat Hooks – Bar Stool Area 

Hardware Furnished by Owner 

GROUP 13: Padlocks – Keg Storage, Trash & Chemical Enclosure & Roof Hatch 


00011-8

SECTION 08800 - GLAZING 


Monolithic Glass 

Insulated Glass 

(GL1): Clear tempered glass, 1/4". 

(GL2): Clear insulated unit, heat strengthened/tempered, 1/4"/1/2"/1/4". Low E coating 

on No. 2 surface. 

Insulated Spandrel Units 

Unframed Mirrors 

Tinted Window Film 

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 

(GL3): Clear insulated unit, heat strengthened, 1/4" (clear/frit)/1/2"/1/4" (clear). 

Ceramic frit on No. 2 surface. Frit color: Black. 

(GL4): Standard tempered glass mirror, 1/4”. 

(GL5): One-way mirror glass, 1/4”. Provided by Section 08110. 

(TF1): 3M Sun Control Window Film, Prestige Series, PR 70. 

SECTION 09220 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 

Indicated on Drawings as: (PLS-##) 

(Stucco): Exterior portland cement plaster on metal lath. 

SECTION 09260 – GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 

Indicated on Drawings as: (GYB-#) 

(GYB1): Not Used. 

(GYB2): 5/8" Mold and Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board. 

Cement Backer Board 

(GYB5): 5/8" Portland Cement Panels, USG Corporation: Durock. 

Metal Framing Systems (interior non-load bearing) 

(Metal Studs): Non-Loadbearing framing. 

(Ceiling Channels): 2-1/2”, 20 gauge ceiling channels. 

(Furring Channels): 7/8” Hat-shaped furring channels. 

Gypsum Board Accessories and Trim Pieces 

(Sheet Metal Backing) 

(Corner Bead) 

(CJ): Control Joint. 

(EJ): Expansion Joint. 

Gypsum Board Finish Level Schedule 

Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view. 

Level 2: Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry. 

Level 4: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive paint finish. 


00011-9

SECTION 09300 - TILE 

Ceramic Tile 


(CT1): 12” x 12” Floor and Wall Tile, Back Bay Iron Range, 

RBC # EQCP96-1212, Sparta. 

(CT2): 6” x 12” Cove Base Tile, BWW Super Black Textured, 

RBC # BW9235-COVE12, Black. 

(CT2a): 1” x 6” Cove Base Outcorner, BWW Super Black Textured, 

RBC # BW9235-COVE12OC, Black. 

(CT3): 4” x 4” Black Accent Tile, Back Bay BWW Accent #1, RBC # BB10890-44, 

Black. 

(CT4): 4” x 4” Yellow Accent Tile, Back Bay BWW Accent #2, RBC # BB10380-44, 

Yellow. 

(T2) Trim: Schluter Systems, Reno-TK; Finish: Brushed Aluminum. Use w/ carpet and tile. 

(T3) Trim: Schluter Systems, Rondec RO 80 EB, brushed stainless. Use w/ tile in restrooms. 

(Waterproof Membrane System): Laticrete: 9235 or Hydroment Black Top 90210. 

Quarry Tile 


(QT1): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile with abrasive surface, RBC # OT10A-66, Red. 

(QT2): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Base, RBC # 10-Q3565, Red. 

(QT2a): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Right Corner, RBC # 10-QCR3565, Red. 

(QT2b): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Left Corner, RBC # 10-QCL3565, Red. 

SECTION 09511 – SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 

Indicated on Drawings as: (ACT-#) 

(ACT1): 24 x 48, Vinyl faced gypsum board, White. USG ClimaPlus Vinyl, Stipple 3270. 

(ACT2): 24 x 24, Vinyl faced gypsum board, White. USG ClimaPlus Vinyl, Stipple 3260. 

(ACT3): 24 x 24, Mineral fiber, White. USG, Radar ClimaPlus 2210. 

(ACT4): 24 x 24, Mineral fiber, Flat Black. USG, Radar ClimaPlus 2210. 

(GRID1): 15/16" Light Duty, aluminum grid system. USG; Donn AX Suspension System. 

for (ACT1) and (ACT2). 

(GRID2): 15/16" Intermediate Duty, galvanized steel grid system. USG; Donn DX/DXL 

Double Web Grid System, for (ACT3) and (ACT4). 

(Egg Crate Ceiling Panel): 1/2” x 1/2" x 3/8” thick, styrene plastic egg crate panel. 24” x 

24” panel, Color Black. 

SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING 


Resilient Base 

(RB) 6 inch base, Coved, Color Black. 

SECTION 09666 - SPECIALTY FLOORING 


(SPFL): 1/4” thick, vinyl flooring with heat welded seams and coved base, Light Gray. 

(Cove Base Cap): Aluminum “Z” cove base cap. 

SECTION 09680 - CARPET 

Indicated on Drawings as: (CPT-#) 

(CPT1): Custom Mohawk, Broadloom, BWW 50545-37907. 

(Carpet Base): Mohawk, Broadloom, Spectrum V, BC246; Color: XJ7234, Black. 

6” high. 


00011-10

SECTION 09720 - WALL COVERINGS 

Indicated on Drawings as: (WC-#) 

(WC1): Forbo Marmoleum, Linoleum Wall Covering, Pattern: Real, Color: #2939,Black. 

(T4) Trim: Corner Guard; 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x length as required, PVC corner guard. 

SECTION 09900 – PAINTS AND COATINGS 


Color Indicators 

Substrates 

(PS#) = Paint System: Prime and Topcoat on Substrate 

(C#) = Color Number: Color and Sheen 

Example: (PS1/C2) = Paint System and Color 

All products from Sherwin-Williams Co., (SW) 

(C1): Match RL Steeple Chase, Color Accents, Satin. 

(C2): SW #6328, “Fireweed”, Satin. 

(C3): SW #6683, “Bee”, Satin. 

(C4): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Flat. 

(C5): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Satin. 

(C6): SW #7006, “Extra White”, Satin. 

(C7): SW #6683, “Bee”, Gloss. 

(C8): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Semi-Gloss. 

(C9): SW #7055, “Enduring Bronze”, Color to match Face Brick (FBR), Semi-Gloss. 

Refer to Section 04810. 

(C10): SW #6117, “Smoky Topaz”, Color to match (EIFS1), Semi-Gloss. 


(C11): SW #7055, “Enduring Bronze”, Semi-Gloss Epoxy. 

(C12): SW #7006, “Extra White”, Semi-Gloss Epoxy. 

(C13): SW #6898, “Social Butterfly”, Satin, Color match for (EIFS2). 

(C14): Clear Finish, Polyurethane Satin, Wood Doors. 

Exterior 

Concrete 

Concrete block 

Steel 

Galvanized steel 

HM Doors and Frames 

Fiber Cement Siding and Trim 

Gas Piping 

Interior 

Gypsum board 

HM Doors and Frames 

Steel overhead structure 

Wood, painted 

Wood, clear finished 

SECTION 09960 – FIELD APPLIED HIGH PERFORMANCE PAINT SYSTEM 

This Optional Section is used for specific remodel projects only. 

(PS30): PPG Coraflon ADS; Field applied kynar finish for application to existing 

storefronts. 

(C20): Color: No. ADS9833030, “Anodized Aluminum”. 


00011-11

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 

SECTION 10010 – MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 


(Knox Box): Knox Company, 3200 Series, Option for Recessed or Surface Mount. Color: 

Dark Bronze. 

(Precast Concrete Splash Blocks): Install at downspout locations. 

SECTION 10210 - WALL LOUVERS 


(LVR1): Intake Louvers with insect screens. 

(LVR2): Exhaust Louvers with bird screens. 

SECTION 10263 – CORNER GUARDS 


(WCG1): 2” x 2” x 48” long, stainless steel wall corner guards. 

SECTION 10445 – DOOR AND ROOM SIGNS 


(SIGN1): 6” x 9”, Handicap Wall Sign, black sign with engraved white letters and 

symbols and Braille coding. Product # SG 2521B, Women. 

(SIGN2): 6” x 9”, Handicap Wall Sign, black sign with engraved white letters and 

symbols and Braille coding. Product # SG 2511B, Men. 

(SIGN3): 4” x 16”, Door sign, black sign with engraved white letters. 

Product # SG 2025B, Women. 

(SIGN4): 4” x 16”, Door sign, black sign with engraved white letters. 

Product # SG 2015B, Men. 

SECTION 10500 - LOCKERS 


(Lockers): 12” x 12” surface mounted lockers. Configuration: Double tier. 2 units high, 4 

units wide, 45” coat rod mounted under lockers. ASI Storage Solutions, Inc. 

SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 

Indicated on Drawings as: (FE-#) 

(FE1): Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical, bracket mounted. 

(FE2): Class K Wet Chemical, bracket mounted. 

(FE1 CAB): Cabinet Mounted Portable Fire Extinguishers: Type (FE1) extinguisher. 

SECTION 10536 - AWNINGS 


(Fabric Awnings): Fabric awning on aluminum frame, furnished as part of signage 

package. 

SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES 


The following Toilet Accessories are supplied through Twin City Hardware 


00011-12

Framed Mirrors 

(MIR1): Framed mirror, 24” x 36”. 

Unframed Mirrors Refer to codes under Section 08800 - Glazing. 

Sanitary Napkin Disposal 

(SND): Surface mounted, sanitary disposal, 1.5 gal, ASI 0473-A. 

Grab Bars (GB) 1-1/2" Grab Bar - Concealed mounting. 

(GB1) 18” long. 

(GB2) 36” long. 

(GB3) 42” long. 

Diaper Changing Station 

(DCS): Koala, Model KD-200, wall mounted, horizontal. 

The following Toilet Accessories are Owner Furnished 

Soap Dispensers 

(SDISP): Ecolab, Digitizer Handsoap Dispenser. 

Paper Towel Dispenser 

(PTD): 

Toilet Paper Dispenser 

1. Tork, Intuition Hand Towel Roll Dispenser. 

OR 

2. Tork, Elevation H1 Matic Towel Dispenser. 

(TPD): Tork, Bath Tissue Jumbo Roll Twin Dispenser. 

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 

NOT USED 

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 

SECTION 12493 – WINDOW SHADES 


(Window Shades): Owner Furnished, MechoShade 5 manual roller shades. 

1. Fabric Color: EuroTwill Shade Cloth; No. 6012, “Charcoal”. 

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 

NOT USED 

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS 

NOT USED 

-End of Materials Identification Codes List- 


00011-13


SECTION 00100 - BID SOLICITATION 

1.01 Bid Invitation and Submission for the above referenced project shall be by e-mail and 

through the Owner’s FTTP Web Site. 

1.02 Bids are to be received no later than 3:00 PM Central Standard Time on the date defined by 

the Owner. LATE BIDS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED FOR CONSIDERATION. 

1.03 Bidders agree in submitting a proposal that the bid will remain firm for a period not less than 

ninety (90) days from the bid due date stipulated above. Bids to receive consideration must 

be complete and cover the full scope of work described in the bid documents and must 

include unit pricing (see attached). Substitutions for material and equipment listed in the bid 

documents is not permitted. Clarifications and acknowledgement of Addenda shall be noted 

in the bid proposal. 

1.04 By submitting a bid each bidder represents and acknowledges the following: 

A. They have read and understand the bid documents and their bid is made in accordance 

therewith. Bid shall acknowledge and record the bid documents issuance dated and index of 

drawings; 

B. Basis of payment is a LUMP SUM; 

C. Has visited the site (General Contractor and/or Subcontractor) and has familiarized themselves 

with local conditions under which the work is to be performed. Discrepancies between existing 

conditions and bid documents shall be identified, written, and submitted to Owner for 

clarification prior to bid submission. Compensation for unidentified discrepancies shall be at the 

Owner's discretion for payment. 

D. Their bid is based upon the materials, systems and equipment described in the bid documents 

without exceptions (No substitutions will be accepted on material and equipment as listed in the 

bid documents). 

E. Their bid is based on a site specific schedule, from permit to Certificate of Occupancy, as stated 

in the Instructions to Bidders Document. No extension of the project's schedule is anticipated 

and no extension of the contract is allowed without the specific written instructions of the Owner. 

The proposed construction time is firm and critical. 

F. Within seven (7) days after award of the contract, the successful bidder will submit a 

construction schedule and subcontractor list to the Owner. Owner retains the right to reject any 

subcontractor bids as deemed necessary. 

G. Upon the start of construction, Contractor shall submit daily progress reports, and weekly 

progress photos (hard or digital photos), due on Thursday evenings. 

H. The Bid will identify the Project Manager and Superintendent for the job. 

1.05 Refer to Drawing Sheet G001 for Project Responsibility Matrix. 

1.06 All questions must be received in writing no less than seven days before bids are due. 

A. Bid proposals must be in accordance with the Owner provided Bid Template. See Budget Bid 

Template issued for site specific bids. 

END OF SECTION 

04-27-11 BID SOLICITATION 

00100 -1

SECTION 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS – 

Metrocenter / Phoenix, AZ 

PART 1 - PRE-BID REQUIREMENTS 

1.01 

INTENT 

A. The Owner/Architect has made every effort to set forth in the Bid Documents the complete 

scope of the Work. Nevertheless, minor omissions and discrepancies shall not excuse the 

Bidder from providing a price to totally complete the project in accordance with the intent of 

these documents. 

1. Bring any conflicts, omissions, or discrepancies to the attention of the Owner prior to 

submission of an executed bid form. These issues shall be communicated via fax or 

email only. No verbal direction is allowed. 

2. After execution of the Contract, no extra charges will be allowed for items of work where 

such are concluded to conform to normal construction practices and methods. 

3. The Contractor and subcontractors have read and understand the Bidding Documents and 

shall base their bids in accordance with these documents. If conflicts occur within these 

documents, and without prior clarification, the bidders shall base his bid on the most 

stringent case of each conflict. 

1.02 

CONFIRMATION 

A. Inquiries: Notify the Owner if the meaning of the documents is in doubt, or if discrepancies 

or omissions are noted. This notification shall be by written correspondence only. An 

Addendum clarifying the issue in question will be sent to all Bidders. 

B. Site Inspection: Visit the location where the Work is to be performed, become thoroughly 

familiar with all conditions affecting the work, and compare conditions with the Bid 

Documents. No consideration will be granted for any misunderstanding of existing 

conditions resulting from failure to visit the site. 

04-27-11 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

00200 -1

CONTRACT FORMS 

C. Read carefully and become familiar with the forms identified in the List of Contract Forms. 

1. Should the Owner elect to enter into an agreement to execute the Work, the listed forms 

prepared by Buffalo Wild Wings, Inc. shall be used. A copy of the Contract accompanies 

these Instructions to Bidders for review. 

1.03 

LAWS AND REGULATIONS 

A. All applicable federal, state, and local laws and ordinances, as well as the rules and 

regulations of the jurisdiction where the work is to be executed, shall apply to the Contract 

throughout. These will be deemed to be included in the Contract to the same extent as 

though herein written, including, but not limited to the following: 

1. Rules and regulations issued by the City of Phoenix, AZ. 

2. Rules and regulations issued by the State of Arizona. 

3. Rules and regulations issued by Maricopa County Environmental Health. 

4. Rules and regulations issued as part of a developer’s agreement. 

1.04 

COMPLETION TIME 

A. Evaluation of each Bid will include serious consideration of the time of completion. The 

Bidder shall be prepared to execute the Contract to accommodate the Owner's commitments 

and shall govern himself accordingly in completing the Bid Form. 

B. The Bidder is hereby advised that the Owner has made commitments to Metrocenter based 

upon the following construction schedule: 

1. Start Construction -- date T.B.D. 

2. Complete Construction -- date T.B.D. 

PART 2 - BID PROCEDURES 

2.01 

BID DOCUMENTS 

A. You may view and order bid documents by going to the Buffalo Wild Wings Online Plan 

Room at: www.DesignBidBuild.net/franz?BuffaloWildWings 

B. If it is your first time, please register and retain your login information for future access to the 

Buffalo Wild Wings Online Plan Room. 

C. After you have registered. Please use your email address and the password you created to 

log into the Plan Room. Please enter the project password (This is case 

sensitive) Once you have selected the project, review the Bid Details for information on 

ordering documents. 


00200 -2

D. To receive Bid Notices, Bid Addendums, Construction Bulletins, Shipped Order 

Confirmations, and Electronic Downloads for this project from Buffalo Wild Wings, you must 

place the following email address in your list of Outlook Contacts: notice@designbidbuild.net 

Notifications are sent from this email address and not from Buffalo Wild Wings. If you do not 

do this, your email server may block the receipt of these notifications. There is a ?Help 

button that you can select for assistance using the Online Plan Room. 

E. If you still have problems, please contact Franz Reprographics by phone @ 763-503-3401. 

F. Trusted Site Settings: www.designbidbuild.net will need to be set as a trusted site. Go to 

‘Internet Options’, under ‘Tools’ and click on the ‘Security Tab’. Then go to the ‘Trusted 

Sites’ option and click on ‘Sites’. Type: https://www.designbidbuild.net into the text field and 

click ‘Add’. The name will then drop into the menu below. Repeat this for: 

http://designbidbuild.net when entering this address, uncheck “require server 

verification(https:) for all sites in this zone. Click ‘OK’ to leave 

2.02 

PREPARATION OF BIDS 

A. The Bid shall be prepared using the Bid Form template forwarded electronically by Buffalo 

Wild Wings, Inc.; no other forms will be considered. 

1. Bids shall be submitted electronically, with hard copy to follow within 48 hrs. Email Bids to 

Carmen Conley - (bids@buffalowildwings.com) 

2. Bids shall include the Bidder's legal name, fully written. 

3. Oral, telegraphic, or other modifications will not be considered. 

4. Bids shall include a preliminary construction schedule. 

5. Bids shall include a list of qualifications and or exclusions. 

6. Bid period is approximately three (3) weeks. 

B. Bid Forms shall be sent for delivery prior to the date and time indicated in the Invitation to 

Bid Letter. 

2.03 

OWNER’S RESPONSE TO BIDS 

A. Submitted Bid Forms will be opened and read privately on the date indicated in the Invitation 

to Bid Letter. Notice of award will be made by the Owner after consideration of Bids 

received. 

B. The Owner reserves the right to respond to the Bids as follows: 

1. Reject any or all Bids without explanation. 

2. Waive technicalities. 

3. Advertise for new bids. 

4. Proceed to do the work otherwise. 

C. The following Bids may be rejected as being informal: 

1. Bids that fail to meet the requirements of these instructions. 

2. Bids that are incomplete, conditional, or obscure. 

3. Bids that contain additions not called for, erasures, alterations, or other irregularities. 

4. Bids that contain abnormally high or abnormally low prices for any class or item of work. 


00200 -3

PART 3 - CONTRACT EXECUTION 

3.01 

POST-BID SUBMITTALS 

A. After notification of selection for the award of a Contract, but prior to issuance of a 

Construction Agreement, the Bidder shall submit the following to the Owner in writing. 

1. A designation of the work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces. 

2. Names of the manufacturers, products and the suppliers of principal items or systems of 

materials and equipment proposed for the Work. 

3. Names of persons or entities proposed for the execution of principal portions of the 

Work. 

B. The Owner will notify the Bidder in writing if the Owner has reasonable objection to a 

Subcontractor proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner has reasonable objection to a proposed 

Subcontractor, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option: 

1. Withdraw the bid. 

2. Submit an acceptable substitute subcontractor with an adjustment in the Bid to cover the 

difference in cost. 

C. The Owner may accept the adjusted Bid Price or disqualify the Bidder. Persons and entities 

accepted by the Owner must be used on the work for which they were proposed and shall not 

be changed except with the written consent of the Owner. 

3.02 

INSURANCE AND BONDS 

A. Insurance: Upon receipt of a written “Notice to Proceed”, the Bidder shall furnish to the 

Owner a certificate of insurance in compliance with the requirements of the following: 

1. General Conditions of the Contract. 

2. Special Conditions of the Contract. 

B. Performance and Payment Bonds (if required by Owner): Upon receipt of a Construction 

Contract, the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner a Performance Bond and Labor & Materials 

Payment Bond, both for the full amount of the Contract. 

1. The bonds shall be provided by a properly qualified surety company. 

2. The cost of the Performance and Payment Bonds shall be indicated on the Bid Form and 

shall be included in the total proposed Contract Amount. 

3.03 

LABOR FORCE 

A. Cooperation: The Bidder is advised that the Work may be performed within a building 

currently occupied by the public. The Bidder shall assure the Owner that he will provide 

labor that can work without unduly disturbing the public and ongoing operations within the 

building. 


00200 -4

B. Non-Discrimination: The Bidder is advised that the Owner will not tolerate any 

discrimination on the basis of age, gender, race, national origin, or sexual orientation by the 

Bidder or Subcontractors. 

END OF BID INSTRUCTIONS 


00200 -5


SECTION 00220 - SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.01 GENERAL 

A. Geotechnical Investigation (Subsurface Soils Tests) for the project site has been performed and a 

report of that investigation has been completed. A copy of the investigation report is contained 

within Section 00221. 

1.02 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION 

A. Log of borings indicates materials penetrated at specific locations. Owner and/or Architect 

assume no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by Contractor related to 

information included in the Report. Should Contractor require additional information concerning 

sub-surface conditions, he may without cost to Owner, make additional investigations. Should 

additional investigations produce information different from that in Soil Report, notify Owner in 

writing. 

1.03 REQUIREMENT 

A. Contractor read and otherwise become completely familiar with contents of Soil Report, including 

but not limited to its recommendations for preparation of subsoil, bases, sub-bases and fill and 

construction of building foundations, parking and paving. Provide building foundations in 

compliance with recommendations in Report. Should discrepancy be found between the 

requirements of Soil Report and the drawings and/or specifications, notify Owner in writing prior 

to beginning Work. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

Not used 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

Not used 


04-27-11 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION 

00220 -1


SECTION 01100 – SUMMARY OF WORK 

PART 1—GENERAL 

1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK 

A. Project Identification: 

1. Project: Buffalo Wild Wings Grill & Bar at Metrocenter, 10402 N. Black Canyon Highway, 

Phoenix AZ 85051-1506. 

B. Contract Documents, prepared by the Architect, GHA Architecture / Development 

C. The Work consists of a total square footage as described in the Contract Documents. 

D. All Work shall be constructed in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations. Work 

shall be installed in accordance with generally accepted standards of construction and in strict 

accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and specifications whether specifically 

detailed in the Contract Documents or not. 

E. Contractor shall maintain Owner and Landlord required insurance and Workers’ Compensation 

at all times and furnish proof of same to Owner prior to start of construction. 

F. Work Not Included: The following will be provided by others: 

1. See the Comprehensive Equipment Schedule and Project Responsibility Matrix on 

Drawing G001, which designates responsibility for furnishing and installing the various 

items included in the Project, as well as final connections. 

1.02 WORK / SITE RESTRICTIONS 

A. Contractor shall comply with all building Owner’s standards. 

B. Contractor’s Use of Premises: During construction, Contractor shall have full use of the site. 

Contractor’s use of premises is limited only by Owner’s right to perform work or employ other 

contractors on portions of Project and as follows: 

1. On-Site No Smoking Policy: As designated below, the Contractor will be responsible to 

maintain a No Smoking Policy on site. This policy will include the Contractor’s personnel, 

subcontractors, material delivery personnel and all other field people on site. There will be 

no smoking permitted on site after the following time periods. This No Smoking Policy will 

be strictly enforced. 

a. There will be no smoking on the roof area after the roofing materials are installed. 

b. There will be no smoking inside the building area after the building has been 

enclosed. This will commence when the exterior openings have been enclosed and 

the insulation and drywall installation begins. 

PART 2—PRODUCTS 

Not used 

PART 3—EXECUTION 

Not used 


04-27-11 SUMMARY OF WORK 

01100 -1


SECTION 01200 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 


1.01 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 

A. Upon Owner’s approval of a Proposal Request Form from the Contractor, the Owner will initiate 

and issue a Change Order, for all changes to Contract Sum or Contract Time. Contractor shall 

not proceed with the additional Work without duly executed Change Order. 

1.02 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 

A. Submit a Schedule of Values with the first Application for Payment. In Schedule of Values, 

break down Contract Sum into at least one line item for each Specification Section. Correlate 

the Schedule of Values with Contractor’s Construction Schedule. 

B. Submit one (1) copy of each application for payment to Owner according to the schedule 

established in Owner/Contractor Agreement. 

1. Submit final Application for Payment after completion of Project closeout procedures with 

final release of liens and supporting documentation. Include consent of surety to final 

payment and insurance certificates. 


Not Used 


Not Used 


04-27-11 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 

01200 -1


SECTION 01300 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 


1.01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 

A. Verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to property survey and existing 

benchmarks, before laying out the Work. 

B. Coordinate construction to ensure efficient and orderly execution of each part of the Work 

C. Three (3) Meetings will be held at Project site with the Owner or Architect. The first Meeting will 

be held at commencement of Construction; the second Meeting will be roughly halfway through 

Construction; the third Meeting will be at the time of generation of the Punch List. Notify Owner 

and Architect of Meeting dates. Each subcontractor or other entity concerned with current 

progress or involved with planning or coordination of future activities, shall attend. 

1. RFI will be generated by General Contractor for issues that will need clarification. 

1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 

A. Prepare a horizontal bar-chart Construction schedule, based on a Construction schedule which 

will be provided by the Owner. Provide a separate time bar for each activity and a vertical line 

to identify the first workday of each week. Use same breakdown of Work indicated in the 

Schedule of Values. As Work progresses, mark each bar to indicate actual completion. 

1. Submit within 10 days after date established for Commencement of the Work. 

2. Coordinate each element with other activities. Show each activity in proper sequence. 

Indicate sequences necessary for completion of related Work. 

3. Indicate Substantial Completion and allow time for Owner’s procedures necessary for 

certifying Substantial Completion. 

4. Schedule Distribution: Distribute copies to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, and parties 

required to comply with dates. 

5. Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been 

made. Distribute revised copies to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, and parties required 

to comply with dates. 

1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. Coordinate submittal preparation with construction schedule, fabrication lead-times, other 

submittals, and activities that require sequential operations. 

1. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized due to failure to transmit submittals in 

time to permit processing sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the 

Work. 

2. Structural Engineer/Architect will not accept submittals from sources other than the 

Contractor. 

B. Prepare submittals by placing a permanent label on each for identification. Provide a space on 

the label or beside title block to record review and approval markings and action taken. Include 

the following information on the label: 

1. Project name. 

2. Date. 

3. Name and address of Contractor. 

4. Name and address of subcontractor or supplier. 

5. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 

6. Contractor’s certification that materials comply with specified requirements. 

C. Coordinate each submittal with other submittals and with Work that does not require submittals. 

04-27-11 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 

01300 -1


D. Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Include the following: 

1. Data indicating compliance with specified standards and requirements. 

2. Notation of coordination requirements. 

3. For equipment data, include rated capacities, dimensions, weights, required clearances, 

and furnished specialties and accessories. 

E. Shop Drawings: Submit newly prepared information drawn to scale. Do not reproduce Contract 

Documents or copy standard information. Submit four (4) blue or black line prints. Structural 

Engineer/Architect will return two (2) copies. Include the following: 

1. Dimensions, profiles, methods of attachment, coordination with adjoining work, large scale 

details, and other information, as appropriate for the Work. 

2. Identification of products and materials. 

3. Notation of coordination requirements. 

4. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 

5. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 

F. Samples: Submit Samples finished as specified and identical with the material proposed. 

Include product name or name of manufacturer. 

G. Structural Engineer/Architect will review each submittal, mark as appropriate to indicate action 

taken, and return copies less those retained. Compliance with specified requirements remains 

Contractor’s responsibility. 

1. Structural Engineer to review all structural related submittals for all projects. 

2. Architect to review substitution requests for alternate products as applicable per project. 

H. Shop Drawings, sample and/or Product Data Submittals are required for the specification 

sections identified on the schedules following this section. 


Not used 


Not used 


04-27-11 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 

01300 -2


SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 

PART 1 – GENERAL 

1.01 SECTION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Quality control services include inspections, tests, and related actions including reports. Quality 

control services are further specified in other Sections of these Specifications and shall be 

performed by independent testing agencies provided by Contractor or Owner, as specified. 

1. Unless otherwise indicated, quality-control services required by authorities having 

jurisdiction will be provided by Owner. 

B. Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections and tests. 

C. Retesting: Contractor shall pay for retesting where results of inspections and tests prove 

unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements. 

D. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests. Provide auxiliary 

services as requested. Notify agency in advance of operations requiring tests or inspections, to 

permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services include the following: 

1. Access to the Work. 

2. Incidental labor and facilities to assist inspections and tests. 

3. Adequate quantities of materials that require testing, and assisting in taking samples. 

4. Facilities for storage and curing of test samples. 

5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment. 

E. Duties of Testing Agency: Testing agency shall cooperate with Architect and Contractor in 

performing its duties. Agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and tests. 

1. Agency shall promptly notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies 

observed in the Work during performance of its services. 

2. Agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents 

or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 

3. Agency shall not perform duties of Contractor. 

F. Submittals: Testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection and test to 

the following: 

1. Owner. 

2. Architect. 

3. Contractor. 

4. Authorities having jurisdiction, when authorities so direct. 

G. Report Data: Reports of each inspection, test, or similar service shall include at least the 

following: 

1. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 

2. Project title and testing agency's project number. 

3. Designation (number) and date of report. 

4. Dates and locations where samples were taken or inspections and field tests made. 

5. Names of individuals taking the sample or making the inspection or test. 

6. Designation of the product and test method. 

7. Complete inspection or test data including an interpretation of test results. 

8. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. 

9. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with 

requirements. 

10. Recommendations on retesting or re-inspection. 

11. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 

04-27-11 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 

01400 -1


H. Testing Agency Qualifications: Engage inspection and testing agencies that are prequalified as 

complying with the American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Quality Assurance Manual" 

and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. 

1. Each testing agency shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the 

State where Project is located. 


Not used 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 

Not used 


04-27-11 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 

01400 -2




SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 

A. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241, "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and 

Demolition Operations"; ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction 

and Demolition"; and NECA Electrical Design Library's "Temporary Electrical Facilities." 

1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for 

temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 

B. At the earliest possible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary 

utility services to use of permanent utilities. 

C. Remove temporary facilities and controls before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining 

after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions 

acceptable to Owner. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 

Not used 


3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 

A. Provide temporary utility services, including electric power & lighting, water, power, fire 

protection, gas & telephone to Project site for use during construction. Arrange for and 

coordinate utility services with local utility companies. 

1. Contractor shall pay use charges for temporary utilities. 

B. Provide temporary heat for curing or drying of work, and for protection of new construction from 

adverse effects of low temperatures. Use of gasoline-burning heaters and open-flame heaters is 

not permitted. 

1. Maintain a minimum 50 degree F. temperature within the construction area until such time 

as the permanent heating plant is installed, inspected and functional. 

3.02 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 

A. Provide field offices, storage trailers, and other support facilities as necessary for efficient 

prosecution of the Work. 

1. Temporary facilities located within the construction area or within 30 feet of building lines 

shall be of noncombustible construction. 

B. Contractor shall confirm with the Owner’s representative an acceptable location outside the 

building to securely store materials and stage construction operations. Thence, the Contractor 

shall confine operations strictly within this area. Contractor shall keep storage and staging area 

clean and neat at all times and shall not allow the accumulation of debris or trash. 

C. Provide temporary sanitary facilities for all construction personnel. Comply with regulations and 

health codes for type, number, location, and maintenance of facilities. 

D. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction and workers from exposure and 

inclement weather and for containment of heat. 

E. Install project identification and other signs in locations approved by Owner to inform the public 

and persons seeking entrance to Project. 

04-27-11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 

01500 -1


F. Collect waste daily and, when containers are full, legally dispose of waste off-site. 

1. Contractor is responsible for maintaining a dumpster for waste generated by all 

subcontractors (owner’s & contractor’s) & trades until the restaurant opens for business. 

Waste removal shall be scheduled on a regular basis. 

2. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials in separate closed waste 

containers. Dispose of material according to applicable laws and regulations. 

G. Open flames are expressly prohibited without the knowledge of and prior consent of the owner’s 

representative. 

3.03 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 

A. Provide temporary fire protection per OSHA until permanent systems supply fire-protection 

needs. 

1. Provide adequate numbers and types of fire extinguishers. 

2. Store combustible materials in fire-safe containers in fire-safe locations. 

3. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 

4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar 

sources of fire ignition. 

B. Provide temporary barricades, warning signs, and lights to protect the public and construction 

personnel from construction hazards per OSHA. 

1. Enclose construction areas with fences with lockable entrance gates, to prevent 

unauthorized access per OSHA. 

C. Provide temporary environmental controls as required by authorities having jurisdiction 

including, but not limited to, dust control, noise control, and pollution control. 


04-27-11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 

01500 -2


SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 



A. Provide products of same kind from a single source. The term "product" includes the terms 

"material”, "equipment”, "system”, and similar terms. 

B. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's written instructions, using 

means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage and to prevent overcrowding Construction 

spaces. 

2. Deliver in manufacturer's original sealed packaging with labels and written instructions for 

handling, storing, protecting, and installing. 

3. Inspect products at time of delivery for compliance with the Contract Documents and to 

ensure items are undamaged and properly protected. 

4. Store heavy items in a manner that will not endanger supporting construction. 

5. Store products subject to damage on platforms or pallets, under cover in a weather tight 

enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and 

humidity within range required. 

C. Product Substitutions: Reasonable and timely requests for substitutions will be considered. 

Substitutions include products and methods of Construction differing from that required by the 

Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor after award of Contract. 

1. Submit four (4) copies of each request for product substitution. Identify product to be 

replaced and provide complete documentation showing compliance of proposed 

substitution with applicable requirements. Include a full comparison with the specified 

product, a list of changes to other Work required to accommodate the substitution, and any 

proposed changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time should the substitution be accepted. 

2. Submit requests for product substitution in time to permit processing of request for 

subsequent Submittals, if any, sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the 

Work. Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals. 

3. Architect & Owner will review the proposed substitution and notify Contractor of its 

acceptance or rejection. Acceptance of substitution does not relieve the Contractor of 

coordinating all other items. The substitution affects at no additional cost to the Owner. 


2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS 

A. Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the 

time of installation. 

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and 

components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect. 

B. Do not attach manufacturer's labels or trademarks, except for required nameplates, on surfaces 

exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. Do not remove labels from equipment 

required to have labels attached. 

C. Select products as follows: 

1. Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the item indicated. No 

substitutions will be permitted. 

2. Where two or more product or manufacturers are named, provide one of the items 

indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 

3. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or 

equal," provide the named item or comply with provisions concerning "product 

substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product or manufacturer. 

4. Where a product is described with required characteristics, with or without naming a brand 

04-27-11 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 

01600 -1


or trademark, provide a product that complies with those characteristics and other Contract 

requirements. 

5. Where compliance with performance requirements is specified, provide products that 

comply and are recommended in writing by the manufacturer for the Application. 

6. Where compliance with codes, regulations, or standards is specified, select a product that 

complies with the codes, regulations, or standards referenced. 

D. Unless otherwise indicated, architect will select color, pattern, and texture of each product from 

manufacturer's full range of standard options. 

2.02 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS 

A. The following products will be furnished by Owner and shall be installed by Contractor as part of 

the Work: 

1. See the Comprehensive Equipment Schedule and Project Responsibility Matrix on the 

Architectural Drawing G100. 

B. Contractor shall coordinate all delivery dates and installation requirements & verify quantities of 

Owner-furnished items with the Owner prior to the start of Construction. 


Not used 


04-27-11 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 

01600 -2


SECTION 01620 - REFERENCES 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Definitions of terms. 

2. Provisions of reference standards. 

1.02 DEFINITIONS 

A. By Owner: Items that will be ordered, paid for and shipped to Project by Owner. Contractor to 

receive, unload, unpack or uncrate, protect, move into place, install and connect these items as 

specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. 

B. Provide: Furnish and install, including without limitation, labor, materials, equipment, 

transportation, services, and other items required to complete referenced tasks. 

C. Furnish: Pay for, deliver (or receive), unload, inspect, and store as specified or directed while 

retaining care, custody and control until received for installation by others. 

D. Install: Receive, set or place in position, make required connections, adjust and test for 

satisfactory performance and operation. 

E. Product: Materials, systems, and equipment incorporated in or to be incorporated in the Project. 

F. Herein: As used in the Contract Documents refers to the contents of a particular Section, of the 

contents within parts of the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements. 

G. Not In Contract (N.I.C.): Products not in the Contract, but which may require provisions in the 

construction for future installation by Others. 

H. Work: Construction and services required by Contract Documents, whether completed of 

partially completed, and includes labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be 

provided by Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole 

or a part of the Project. 

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 

A. Reference Standards: For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, Federal 

Standards, or other reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except 

when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by governing regulations. 

B. Standard Dates: Where no specific date of standard is specified, use the most current issued 

standard that is in effect as of the Project Bid date. 

C. When required by individual Specification Sections or otherwise needed for proper performance 

of Work, obtain a copy of the standard. Maintain a copy of standard at Site during submittals, 

planning, and progress of the affected work, until Substantial Completion. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

Not used 

PART 3 EXECUTION 

Not Used 


04-27-11 REFERENCES 

01620 -1


SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 

PART 1 – GENERAL 

1.01 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Record Drawings: Maintain a set of Contract Drawings as Record Drawings. Mark to show 

installation that varies from the Work originally shown. 

B. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, as Record 

Specifications. Mark to show variations in Work performed in comparison with the text of the 

Specifications and modifications. 

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Organize data into three-ring binders, with pocket folders for 

folded sheet information. Mark identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the 

following: 

1. Emergency instructions. 

2. Spare parts list. 

3. Copies of warranties. 

4. Wiring diagrams. 

5. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 

Not used 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with manufacturer's written requirements 

including, but not limited to, surfaces that are sound, level, and plumb; substrates within 

installation tolerances; surfaces that are smooth, clean, and free of deleterious substances; and 

application conditions within environmental limits. Proceed with installation only after 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

B. Prepare substrates and adjoining surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions, 

including, but not limited to, filler and primer application. 

C. Where Drawings indicate dimensions of existing construction verify by field measurement. 

Where fabricated products are to be fitted to other construction verify dimensions by field 

measurement before fabricating and, when possible, allow for fitting and trimming during 

installation. 

3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Do not cut structural members without prior written approval of Architect. 

B. For patching, provide materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of 

existing materials. For exposed surfaces, provide or finish materials to visually match existing 

adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 

3.03 INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Anchor each product securely in 

place, accurately located and aligned. Clean exposed surfaces and protect from damage. If 

applicable, prepare surfaces for field finishing. 

B. Comply with NFPA 70 for installation of electrically operated equipment and electrical 

components and materials. 

04-27-11 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 

01700 -1


3.04 FINAL CLEANING 

A. Clean each surface or item as follows before requesting inspection for certification of 

Substantial Completion: 

1. Remove labels that are not permanent. 

2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors. Remove excess glazing compounds. 

Replace chipped or broken glass. 

3. Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign 

substances. Leave concrete floors broom clean. 

4. Vacuum carpeted surfaces and clean quarry tile flooring & base. 

5. Clean according to tile & grout manufacturers’ specific recommendations. 

6. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication. Clean 

plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures and lamps. Clean walk-in refrigeration units. 

7. Remove all construction debris, unused materials, etc. when project is turned over to 

Owner. Maintain the site in a clean condition during the course of construction. Sweep 

paved areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds to a smooth, eventextured 

surface. 

3.05 PUNCH LIST 

A. At time of third Meeting (refer to Specification Section 01300) A copy of the Punch List will be 

provided to the Contractor. 

3.06 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 

A. Request Substantial Completion inspection once the following are complete: 

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 

2. Submit Record Drawings and Specifications, maintenance manuals, warranties, and 

similar record information. 

3. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of operation to Owner’s personnel. 

4. Remove temporary facilities and controls. 

5. Complete final cleanup. 

6. Complete Punch List Repairs. 

7. Obtain final inspections from authorities having jurisdiction. 

8. Obtain Certificate of Occupancy. 

9. Obtain Certificate of Capacity. 

10. Submit Consent of Surety to final payment. 

B. Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires operation and maintenance to provide 

instruction to Owner's personnel. Include a detailed review of the following: 

1. Startup and shutdown. 

2. Emergency operations and safety procedures. 

3. Noise and vibration adjustments. 

4. Maintenance manuals. 

5. Spare parts, tools, and materials. 

6. Lubricants and fuels. 

7. Identification systems. 

8. Control sequences. 

9. Hazards. 

10. Warranties and bonds. 

C. Request inspection for certification of final acceptance, once the following are complete: 

1. Submit a copy of the Substantial Completion inspection list stating that each item has been 

completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 


01700 -2


D. Owner will re-inspect the Work on receipt of notice that the Work has been completed. 

1. If the Work has been satisfactorily completed, Owner will sign and date the punchlist cover 

sheet. GC will fax/email a copy of this signed and dated cover sheet to the Construction 

Manager prior to Opening. GC Superintendent is to remain at the job site through Store 

Opening to provide Supervision of all Punchlist item completions, Vendor Installation and 

all adjustments as required by Store Personnel. Contractor shall guarantee all materials 

and workmanship for one year beginning at date of Opening. 



01700 -3


PART 1 GENERAL 

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 

SECTION 02223 - MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 

A. Removal of designated construction. 

B. Disposal of materials. 

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. Section 01100 – Summary of Work: Work sequence and continued occupancy of the building. 

B. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary enclosures. 

C. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. 

1.03 REFERENCES 

A. American National Standards Institute: 

1. ANSI A10.6: “Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition”. 

B. National Fire Protection Association: 

1. NFPA 241: “Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations”. 

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical 

disconnection and re-connection. 

B. Obtain required permits from authorities. 

C. Do not close or obstruct egress from any building exit or site exit without specific approval from 

the Owner and municipal authority. 

D. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days' prior written notice to 

Owner and without specific approval from the municipal authority. 

E. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

F. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are 

discovered. 

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the 

necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods 

needed for proper performance of the work of this section. 

B. Comply with ANSI 10.6 and NFPA 241. 

1.05 SCHEDULING 

A. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 01300. 

B. Schedule work to coincide with new construction and phasing. 

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. 

1. Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum 

interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, parking lots, and other adjacent 

occupied and used facilities. 

B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect. Do not 

resume operations until directed. 

04-27-11 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 

02223 -1



Not Used 


3.01 PREPARATION 

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct 

conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of the Work. Do not proceed until 

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 

B. In company with the Owner, Architect and appropriate engineering disciplines, visit the site and 

verify the extent of selective demolition required. 

1. Carefully identify limits of selective demolition. 

2. Mark interface surfaces as required to enable workers to identify items to be removed and 

items to be left intact. 

C. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers at locations indicated and as otherwise 

determined to be necessary. 

D. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. 

E. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit 

continued building occupancy. 

F. Protect existing materials that are not to be demolished. 

G. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring. 

H. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. 

I. Mark location and termination of utilities. 

J. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress. 

3.02 DEMOLITION 

A. Disconnect, remove, and identify designated utilities within demolition areas. 

B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. 

C. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn 

or bury materials on site. 

D. Remove materials as demolition progresses. Upon completion of demolition, leave areas in 

clean condition. 

E. Remove temporary facilities. 


04-27-11 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 

02223 -2




A. Soil treatment for termite control. 

SECTION 02360 - SOIL TREATMENT 

B. Application below grade and at interior and exterior foundation perimeter. 


A. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): 

1. EPA - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act. 

1.03 SUBMITTALS 

A. Submittal Procedures 

1. Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, 

and intended application rate. 

2. Assurance/Control Submittals: 

a. Certificates: 

1) Manufacturer's certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 

2) Certification that Products comply with EPA regulations for termiticides. 

3) Certification that Products conform to requirements of local authority having 

jurisdiction. 

b. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating 

compliance with specified qualification requirements. 

B. Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals. 

1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record moisture content of soil before treatment, 

date and rate of application, areas of application, diary of meter readings and 

corresponding soil coverage. 

2. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty with forms complete. 


A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with 

minimum 5 years documented experience and licensed in accordance with regulations of 

authorities having jurisdiction for application of chemical toxicant. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for application requirements, application 

licensing, authority to use toxicant chemicals, and in accordance with EPA regulations. 

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original unopened containers with labels intact, identifying 

Product and manufacturer, application instructions, and EPA federal registration number. 

B. Do not store Products on site. Deliver Products to site at time of application. 

1.06 SITE CONDITIONS 

A. Take necessary precautions to prevent leaching, spillage, and wind drift or spray or dust of 

material. Do not drain or flush storage containers and application equipment outside treated 

area or into sewers or water courses. 

B. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply soil treatment to frozen or wet soils or during rain or 

snow. 

04-27-11 SOIL TREATMENT 

02360 -1


1.07 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: 

1. Submit written warranty signed by soil treatment applicator and Contractor certifying that 

applied chemical toxicant treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. 

a. State that application was made at concentration, rates, and methods as specified. 

b. State that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, 

Contractor will retreat soil and repair damage caused by termite infestation at no 

additional cost to the Owner. 

2. Cover against invasion or propagation of subterranean termites, damage to building or 

building contents caused by termites; repairs to building or building contents so caused. 

3. Provide for inspection of Work annually; report in writing to designated Owner’s 

representative. 

4. Warranty Period: 5 years. 


2.01 MATERIALS 

A. EPA and local authority having jurisdiction approved chemical toxicant; water based emulsion, 

uniform composition, with synthetic dye to permit visual identification of treated soil, bearing 

Federal registration number of the EPA. 

B. Do not use fuel oil as diluent. 

C. Specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. 

D. Solution containing one of the following chemical elements and concentrations: 

1. Permathrin: 0.5 percent in water emulsion. 

a. Dragnet FT, by FMC Corporation. 

b. Torpedo, by ICI Americas Corporation. 

2.02 MIX DILUTION 

A. Dilute and mix toxicant chemical to manufacturer's published instructions. 


3.01 EXAMINATION 

A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions 

are as required, and ready to receive Work. 

1. Verify the soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, ready to receive 

treatment. 

2. Verify final grading is complete. 

B. Report in writing to Owner prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution 

of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 

C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting 

unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 


A. Remove foreign matter, loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted 

areas under slabs and foundations. 

3.03 APPLICATION 

A. Apply toxicant within 12 hours before installation of vapor retardant under slab-on-grade. 


02360 -2


B. Apply toxicant to soil at the following rates, using metered applicator: 

1. Under Floor Slabs-On-Grade: 

a. Soil or Unwashed Gravel: 1 gallon per 10 square feet. 

b. Washed Gravel or Other Course Absorbent Material: 1-1/2 gallons per 10 square 

feet. 

2. Both Sides of Foundation Wall: 

a. Concrete: 4 gallons per 10 lineal feet, to depth of 12 inches. 

b. Masonry: 4 gallons per 10 lineal feet for each foot of foundation depth. 

c. Foundation Penetrations: 2 gallons per lineal foot. 

C. Exterior Foundation: 4 gallons per 10 lineal feet of trench along outside edge of building. 

1. Dig trench 6 inches to 8 inches wide along outside of foundation to minimum depth of 12 

inches and apply toxicant. 

2. Mix toxicant with soil as it is being backfilled. 

D. Apply toxicant as a coarse spray; provide uniform distribution. 

E. Reapply toxicant to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other 

construction activities occurring after initial toxicant application. 

3.04 CONSTRUCTION 

A. Interface with Other Work: 

1. Coordinate application of toxicant at foundation perimeter with finish grading and 

landscaping work; avoid disturbance of treated soil. 

B. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that toxicant has been applied to soil. 

Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction. 

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Inspect and test soil areas where toxicant was applied to determine the presence of any 

remaining termites before covering with subsequent construction. 

B. Reapply toxicant to areas where inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites. Use 

same toxicant as for original treatment. 

3.06 CLEANING 

A. Remove storage containers and application equipment from site immediately after application. 



02360 -3


SECTION 03300 - CAST- IN - PLACE CONCRETE 



A. Concrete formwork. 

B. Floors and slabs on grade. 

C. Concrete reinforcement. 

D. Joint devices associated with concrete work. 

E. Concrete curing. 


A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements. 

B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements. 

C. Section 03351 - Concrete Integral Hardener and Sealer. 

D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 


A. American Concrete Institute, (ACI): 

1. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and 

Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. 

2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute 

International. 

3. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute 


4. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American 

Concrete Institute International. 

5. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International. 

6. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International.. 

7. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. 

8. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; 

American Concrete Institute International. 

B. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 

1. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, 

for Concrete. 

2. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for 

Concrete Reinforcement. 

3. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 

4. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical 

Concrete Specimens. 

5. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 

6. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. 

7. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 

8. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 

9. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by 

the Volumetric Method. 

10. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 

11. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for 

Curing Concrete. 

12. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 

04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 

03300 -1


13. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural 

Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 

14. ASTM C 685/C 685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching 

and Continuous Mixing. 

15. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout 

(Nonshrink). 

16. ASTM D 994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete 

(Bituminous Type). 

17. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete 

Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 

18. ASTM E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact 

with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 


A. Refer to Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 

B. Mix Designs: Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to Construction Manager 

for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. 

C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and 

components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 


A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from 

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures 

through one source from a single manufacturer. 

C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. 

D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 


2.01 FORMWORK 

A. Form Materials: Provide standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic 

head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 

1. Form Coating: Release agent that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect concrete or 

interfere with application of coatings. 

2.02 REINFORCEMENT 

A. Comply with requirements as indicated on Structural Drawings. 

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. 

C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel 

wire into flat sheets. 

D. Reinforcement Accessories: 

1. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and 

fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar 

supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of 

Standard Practice". 


03300 -2


2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal and Type IA - Air-Entraining Portland type. 

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 

C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 

D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C 618, Class N. 

E. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 

2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES 

A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight 

of cement. 

B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. Provide Daravair manufactured by W. R. Grace. 

C. Chemical Admixtures: 

1. Water Reducing: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 

2. Retarding: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 

3. Accelerating: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. 

4. Water Reducing and Retarding: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 

5. Water Reducing and Accelerating: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. 

6. Water Reducing, High Range: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 

7. Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's 

recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape. 

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 

a. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block VB10. 

b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type- 65. 

c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 10 mils. 

B. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, 

cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 

1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7000 psi. 

a. Conspec: “Enduro 50 Grout”. 

b. Euclid: "Euco N-S Grout". 

c. L & M: "Duragrout". 

d. Sonneborn: "Sonogrout 10k". 

e. Five Star Products, Inc.: "Five Star Grout". 

f. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.: Certi-Vex Grout #1000. 

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; regular curing paper, white curing paper, clear 

polyethylene, white polyethylene, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. 

D. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent. 

1. Provide curing compound that is compatible with floor finish adhesives. 

2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS 

A. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM 

D 1751, thickness as indicated on drawings and full depth of slab less 1/2 inch. 

B. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07900. 


03300 -3


2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN 

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of 

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture 

designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. 

2. Take care in developing mix designs to minimize curling and effects of casting directly on 

vapor retarder. 

3. Develop concrete mix designs for slabs on grade to minimize curling and other effects 

resulting from casting directly on vapor retarder sheet. 

B. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. 

C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates 

recommended by manufacturer. 

D. Concrete Mix Properties: 

1. Structural Concrete: 

a. 28 day compressive strength: 3000 psi. 

b. Maximum aggregate size: 3/4 inch. 

c. Maximum slump: 3-5 inches. 

d. Maximum water/cement ratio: 0.5. 

2. Interior slab on grade: 





3. Exterior concrete exposed to freeze-thaw cycles: 





e. Entrained Air Content: 6±1%. 

4. Masonry Grout: 




2.08 MIXING 

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to 

ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 

B. Project Site Mixing: Measure, batch and mix in drum type batch mixer, according to ASTM C 

685. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. 



A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 


A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all 

applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. 

B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. 

C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of 

form accessories. 


03300 -4


D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by 

cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's 

instructions. 

E. Install No. 5 rebar dowels 24 inches on center where new concrete slabs abut existing concrete 

slabs. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing 

concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 

F. Install vapor retarder directly below interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and 

seal watertight by taping edges and ends and in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 

3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT 

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before 

placing concrete. 

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that 

would reduce bond to concrete. 

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and 

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover as indicated on 

structural drawings. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to 

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset 

laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with 

wire. 

3.04 PLACING CONCRETE 

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. 

B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. 

C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not 

be disturbed during concrete placement. 

D. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair 

with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. 

E. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. 

F. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to 

Section 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements. 

G. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

H. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set 

top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. 

I. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07900. 

J. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and 

test samples taken. 

K. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. 

L. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. 

M. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade. 


03300 -5


N. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 

3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING 

A. (CONC1) Unexposed Form Finish: Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately 

after removing formwork. Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in 

height. 

C. (CONC2) Interior Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 

1. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, and thin set ceramic tile. 

2. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to 

drains at 1:100 nominal. Provide an 8 inch diameter slope area around all floor drains. 

E. (CONC3) Exterior Horizontal Concrete Surfaces: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete 

sidewalks, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen surface by brooming with fiber-bristle 

broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 

2. Refer to Section 03351 for hardener / sealer applied to exterior concrete surfaces. 

F. Interior Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is 

still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, 

and terminations slightly rounded. 

G. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations 

as shown on Drawings. Steel-trowel surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, 

and terminations slightly rounded. 

1. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with 

diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 

3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION 

A. Utilize curing methods that are compatible with floor finish installation recommendations and 

that are approved by floor finish manufacturer and installer. 

B. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from 

premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. 

C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period 

necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 

1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. 

D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 

1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep 

continuously moist for not less than three days by water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, 

or saturated burlap. 

2. Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry. 

a. Moisture-retaining cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive. 

b. Curing compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate 

recommended by manufacturer. Contractor verify compatibility with specified floor 

finishes. 


A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 

01400. 

B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. 

C. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance 

with specified requirements. 


03300 -6


D. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete 

test cylinders plus one field cured cylinder. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of 

each class of concrete placed. 

E. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same 

conditions as concrete it represents. 

F. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C 

143/C 143M. 

3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE 

A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor 

within 24 hours of test. 

B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances 

or specified requirements. 

C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Owner’s Construction 

Manager. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is 

identified. 

D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction 

of Architect for each individual area. 



03300 -7




SECTION 03351 - CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER 

A. Integral hardener and sealer for exterior application as indicated on the Drawings and 

Schedules as (SC), Sealed Concrete. 

B. All components and accessories required for a complete installation. 


A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 

B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 


A. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act 

1. ADA Slip Fall Resistance Tests 

B. Federal VOC Standards for the Concrete Construction Industry. 

C. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency. 

1. Modified EPA Test Method 300. 

D. USDA - United States Department of Agriculture. 

E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 

1. AASHTO T 259 Modified - Crack Sealing Capabilities 

F. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials. 

1. ASTM C-666 (Concrete Durability Test) 

2. ASTM C-672 (Scaling Resistance) 

3. ASTM C-642 (Absorption) 

4. ASTM C-779 (Abrasion Resistance) 

5. ASTM E-274 (Skid Resistance) 

6. ASTM E-1155 (Floor Flatness) 


A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Assurance. 

B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in Work of the Section with documented experience. 

Components to be by one manufacturer. Manufacturer to provide a list of installations of similar 

scope and level of quality. 

C. Installer: Companies specializing in Work of this Section with documented experience. 

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. Review methods and 

procedures related to installation including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Inspect and discuss conditions of concrete and other preparatory work performed under 

other contracts. 

2. In addition to the Contractor and the installer, arrange for the attendance of installers 

affected by the Work, The Owner's representative, the Architect. 

E. The Contractor to verify special conditions required for the installation of the system. 

F. The Contractor to notify the Architect of any discrepancies. 

G. Materials to comply with all applicable V.O.C. standards 

H. Provide as a complete system. Refer to schedules. 

I. Discoloration and odors are unacceptable. 

04-27-11 CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER 

03351 -1



A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. 


A. Coordinate the work with concrete slab placement and curing. 

1.07 WARRANTY 

A. Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty. 

1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during the warranty period, 

or replace with new materials/components, at no expense to Owner. 

2. Length of warranty to be scheduled by the Owner from manufacturer's standard warranties. 


2.01 MANUFACTURERS 

A. (SC) Exterior Concrete Hardener / Sealer. 

1. Chemtec International; Product ChemTec One: www.concretesealer.net. 

2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 



A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct 

conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. Do not proceed until 

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 

B. Examine substrates surfaces, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 

C. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 


A. Surfaces to be treated to meet manufacturers product requirements. 

B. New Concrete: Clean surfaces to remove loose and foreign matter that could interfere with 

application or performance of products. Allow surfaces to dry completely before beginning 

application. 

1. The surfaces of the concrete to be clean and free of foreign material, such as grease and 

coatings, that would prevent the product from penetrating into the concrete. 

2. Acid washing of concrete is unacceptable. 

3. Concrete to be completely dry before start of application. 

C. Existing Concrete: 

1. Clean all surfaces so that they are water permeable. 

2. Strip off coatings, sealers, paint or other contaminant that would prevent the process from 

penetrating into the concrete. 

3. Acid washing of concrete is unacceptable. 

4. Concrete to be completely dry before start of application. 

D. Protect adjacent and underlying surfaces by masking or by other means. 

1. Protect asphaltic and mastic type surfaces from spillage and heavy overspray. 


A. Install at locations as indicated, to comply with final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions 

and recommendations for application and coverage. 


03351 -2


B. Materials to be premixed and ready to use. Mixing and agitation to be in accordance with 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Method of application to be by pouring, pumping or spraying. Equipment to be recommended by 

manufacturer. 

D. Test application: Contractor to treat an area and textures of the installation to establish physical 

and visual effects of application and absorption level to establish coverage rates. 

E. Install when concrete surface temperatures comply with manufacturer's recommended minimum 

standards. 

F. When the work cannot be completed in one application, location where application is stopped to 

be noted and clearly marked. 

G. Application on exterior concrete surfaces. 

1. Substrates to be brushed, finished, and fully cured. 

2. Apply sealer in two applications at manufacturer's recommended rate with a minimum of 4 

to 6 hours between applications. 

3. Surface to be saturated with material. 

4. Puddle areas should be pushed over to dryer areas. Areas that dry prematurely to have 

additional formula brushed around surface until absorption is complete. Re-spraying is 

acceptable. 

3.04 CURING 

A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Allow a minimum period of 12 hours where no 

water is allowed on the surface. Period of time starting after completion of last application. 

B. Flush surfaces with fresh water, approximately 24 hours after the last application has dried, to 

prevent any un-reacted material that may be on the surface from becoming slick at the first rain. 

D. Do not allow concrete to freeze for 24 hours after installation. 

E. Wait for a minimum of 48 hours prior to application of joint sealants, traffic paints, and/or asphalt 

overlays. 

3.05 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING 

A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 

B. Immediately upon completion of installation, clean surfaces. 

C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation upon completion of 

work and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. 

D. Dispose of waste properly per federal, state or local environmental regulations when required. 

3.06 PROTECTION 

A. Protect installation throughout construction process until date of final completion. 

B. Provide protection for the installation, ensuring satisfactory operating condition at completion of 

Project. 



03351 -3




A. Mortar for masonry. 

B. Grout for masonry. 


SECTION 04065 - MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 

A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Installation of mortar and grout. 


A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements For Masonry Structures; American 


B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute 


C. ASTM C 143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 

D. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 

E. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 

F. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 

G. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 

H. ASTM C 387 - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and 

Concrete 

I. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 

J. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. 

K. ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of 

Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 

L. ASTM C 1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. 


A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except 

where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 

1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site. 

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, from 

single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for 

each aggregate. 


A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign 

matter. 

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS 

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, 

and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, 


04-27-11 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 

04065 -1




A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal; standard gray color. 

B. Packaged Dry Mortar: ASTM C 387, Type as indicated on the Drawings, using gray color 

cement. 

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 

D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. 

E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404. 

F. Water: Clean and potable. 

2.02 MORTAR COLOR 

A. Colored Mortar: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use 

in mortar mixes. 

1. Colors: 

a. LaFarge North America; “Santan”; color to match (FBR1) Face Brick. Refer to Section 

04810. 

b. Spec Mix; Color No. LM-9327-50 #930; color to match (CMU2) Rock Face Block. 


2. Mortar Locations: 

a. Locations of colored mortar: Used to match Face Brick and Rock Faced Block Units. 

b. Natural colored mortar for all other locations. 

2.03 MORTAR MIXES 

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Property Specification. 

1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S. 

2. Engineered masonry: Type S. 

3. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type S. 

4. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type S. 

5. Interior, loadbearing and non-loadbearing masonry: Type S. 

2.04 MORTAR MIXING 

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C 

270 and in quantities needed for immediate use. 

B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. 

C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. 

D. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. 

E. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two-and-one-half 

hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F. 

2.04 GROUT MIXES 

A. Grout for Engineered Masonry, Bond Beams, Lintels, and Corefill: Comply with ASTM C 476. 

1. Use grout type as indicated below: 

a. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less. 

b. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. 

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476,for specified 28-day compressive 

strength, 3000 psi. 

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. 


04065 -2


2.05 GROUT MIXING 

A. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with 

ASTM C 476 for fine and coarse grout. 

B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. 

C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. 



A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. 

B. Plug clean-out holes for grouted masonry with block masonry units. Brace masonry to resist 

wet grout pressure. 


A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified. 

B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. 

C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches without consolidating grout by rodding. 

D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. 

E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces. 

3.03 GROUTING 

A. Low-Lift Grouting: 

1. Limit height of grout pours to 60 inches. 

2. Limit height of fresh masonry to 60 inches above each grout pour. 

3. Pour grout only after vertical and horizontal reinforcing is secured in place using 

reinforcement positioners. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured. 

4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours 

for more than 1-1/2 hours. 

5. Stop grout pour 1 ½” below the top of masonry unit to form a key with the next pour, except 

at tops of walls. 


A. An independent testing agency will perform field tests, in accordance with provisions of Section 

01400. 

B. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C 780 procedures. 

1. Test frequency: Two tests for first 10,000 units laid. If acceptable, continue testing at two 

tests for every 50,000 units laid. 

C. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C 1019 procedures. 

1. Test frequency: Three samples for every 50 cubic yards or once per week. 



04065 -3




A. Concrete Block. 

B. Clay Facing Brick. 

C. Reinforcement and Anchorage. 

D. Flashings. 

E. Accessories. 


SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 

A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry. 

B. Section 04065 - Mortar and Masonry Grout. 


A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American 


B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete 

Institute International. 

C. ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 

D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel 

Hardware. 

E. ASTM C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. 

F. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or 

Shale). 

G. ASTM C 954 - Specification for Steel Drill Screws. 

H. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and 

Waterproofing. 

I. ASTM E 119 - Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 


A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except 

where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an 

enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If 

units become wet, do not install until they are dry. 

B. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt 

and oil. 

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, 


04-27-11 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 

04810 -1


B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, 



A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with 

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when 

construction is not in progress. 

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 

three days after building masonry walls or columns. 

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left 

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such 

masonry. 


2.01 MASONRY UNITS - GENERAL 

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to 

contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units 

where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fireresistance 

ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent 

masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 

A. (CMU1) Standard Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 

1. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight. 

a. Hollow block, as indicated. 

b. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, movement joints, headers, bonding, 

and other special conditions as indicated or required. 

B. (CMU2): Integral Colored Rock Faced Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and 

as follows: 

1. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight. 

a. Hollow block, as indicated. 

b. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, movement joints, headers, bonding, 

and other special conditions as indicated or required. 

2. Manufacturer: Amcon Block and Precast, Inc., St. Cloud, MN 56304. Tel: 888-251-6030. 

www.amconblock.com 

3. Color: Custom BWW Blend # RF-526. 

4. Colored Mortar: Refer to Section 04065 – Mortar and Masonry Grout. 

2.02 BRICK UNITS 

A. (FBR1) Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 

1. Size: Actual; 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. 

2. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units 

can be sawn to produce equivalent effect. 

3. Manufacturer: Sioux City Brick and Tile Company, Sioux City, Iowa 51102. 

Tel: 712-258-7571. www.siouxcitybrick.com 

4. Color and Texture: Toasted Fine Art Velour. 

5. Colored Mortar: Refer to Section 04065 – Mortar and Masonry Grout. 

2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Mortar and grout: As specified in Section 04065. 


04810 -2


2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE 

A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 

1. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com 

2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc: www.heckmannbuildingprods.com 

3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com 

4. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com 

5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 

B. Reinforcing Steel: As indicated on the Drawings. 

C. Wire Positioners: Provide 9 gage wire unless noted otherwise. 

1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 

a. Dur-O-Wal: D/A 811 and D/A 816. 

b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: RB and RB-Twin. 

c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: No. 3401 and No. 3402. 

D. Joint Reinforcement: Single wythe, truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip 

galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 

inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of 

mortar coverage on each exposure. 

E. Wall Ties: Corrugated formed sheet metal, 7/8 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, hot dip galvanized 

to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 

inch of mortar coverage from masonry face. 

F. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between 

masonry veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 

1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup 

through sheathing by two fasteners. 

2. Wire ties: triangular shape, 0.1875 inch thick. 

3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 2 inches. 

G. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel 

drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except 

manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 diameter by length 

required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads. 


a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Stainless Steel SX Fastener. 

b. ITW Buildex; Scots long life Teks. 

2.05 THRU-WALL FLASHING 

A. Thru-Wall Flashing: Copper-Laminated Flashing, 3-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet bonded between 2 

layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. 


a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. www.abpnow.com 

b. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric Thru-Wall Flashing. 

www.dur-o-wal.com 

c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. www.h-b.com 

2.06 ACCESSORIES 

A. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; 4 

inch wide by maximum lengths available. 

B. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I ("No.15") asphalt felt. 

C. Weeps: Cotton rope. 


04810 -3


D. Cavity Mortar Diverter: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh blocks, sized to fill bottom of 

wall cavity and suspend mortar droppings above weep/cavity vents to allow cavity drainage. 

1. Provide system manufactured by Mortar Net or CavClear. 

E. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 



A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. 

B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. 

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 


A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. 

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building 

structure provides permanent bracing. 

3.03 COURSING 

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. 

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform 

thickness. 

C. Concrete Masonry Units: 

1. Bond: Running. 

2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 

3. Mortar Joints: 3/8”, Concave. 

D. Brick Units: 

1. Bond: Running. 

2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches. 

3. Mortar Joints: 3/8”, Concave. 

3.04 PLACING AND BONDING 

A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other 

work. 

B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 

C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. 

D. Interlock intersections and external corners. 

E. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped 

edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 

3.05 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS 

A. Install weeps in veneer walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above thru-wall flashing. 

B. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended 

by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents. 


04810 -4


3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL 

A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal 

joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. 

B. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 

3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY 

A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. 

3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER 

A. Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer 

at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 24 inches on center horizontally. Place 

additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of 

anchors is 8 inches on center. 

3.09 MASONRY FLASHINGS 

A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all 

locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 

1. Extend flashing full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry 

or turn up at least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction. 

2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashing. 

B. Extend flashing to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry. 

3.10 LINTELS 

A. Install loose steel lintels over openings. 

3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. 

3.12 BUILT-IN WORK 

A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work 

and furnished under other sections. 

B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. 

C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid 

with grout. 

1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. 

3.13 CLEANING 

A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. 

B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. 

C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. 


A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that 

are subject to damage by construction activities. 



04810 -5




A. Structural steel framing members. 

B. Base plates. 

C. Grouting under base plates. 


A. Section 05210 - Steel Joists. 

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 

B. Section 05310 - Steel Deck: Support framing for small openings in deck. 

C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. 


A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 

B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of 

Steel Construction, Inc. 

C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. 

D. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 

E. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, 

Welded and Seamless. 

F. ASTM A 108: Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon, Cold-Finished. 

G. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile 

Strength. 

H. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi 

Minimum Tensile Strength. 

I. ASTM A 500: Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural 

Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 

J. ASTM A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 

K. ASTM A 992/A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 

L. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout 

(Nonshrink). 

M. ASTM E 164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments. 

N. ASTM F 436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 

O. ASTM F 959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators 

for Use with Structural Fasteners. 

P. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 

American Welding Society. 

Q. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society. 

R. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings. 

S. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 

04-27-11 STRUCTURAL STEEL 

05120 -1



A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 

B. Shop Drawings: 

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, cuts, openings, 

attachments, and fasteners. 

2. Indicate connections including connections not specifically detailed. 

3. Indicate cambers and loads. 

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. 

Identify pre-tensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 

5. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.4 symbols, distinguishing between shop and field 

welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 

C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within 

the previous 12 months. 


A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual." 

B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for 

architecturally exposed structural steel. 

C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 

D. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a record of 

successful in-service performance. 

E. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a record of successful 

in-service performance. 


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off 

ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel 

members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or 

overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or 

structures as directed. 

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers. 

1.07 COORDINATION 

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint 

and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are 

compatible with one another. 

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction 

without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and 

directions for installation. 



A. Steel Angles, Plates, Channels, S Shapes, M Shapes, and HP Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

B. Steel W Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. 

C. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. (Fy = 46 ksi) 

D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Finish black and galvanized, as indicated. (Fy = 35 ksi) 


05120 -2


E. Shear Stud Connectors: Fabricate from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars. 

F. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade A. 

G. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, 

medium carbon, plain. 

H. Anchor Rods: ASTM A 36. 

I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 

J. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, 

cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 

1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7000 psi. 

a. Conspec: “Enduro 50 Grout”. 

b. Euclid: "Euco N-S Grout". 

c. L & M: "Duragrout". 

d. Sonneborn: "Sonogrout 10k". 

e. Five Star Products, Inc.: "Five Star Grout". 

f. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.: Certi-Vex Grout #1000. 

K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

L. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC 

limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

2.02 FABRICATION 

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate 

according to AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360. 

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 

2. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 

3. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming 

operations. 

4. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. 

2.03 FINISH 

A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 7 and SP2 or SP3. 

B. Immediately after surface preparation, shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime 

surfaces that will be field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted with slipcritical 

connectors. 

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of shop-bolted connections in accordance 

with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325.. 

1. Visually inspect 100 percent of connections to ensure that all plies of connected parts are 

in complete contact. 

B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop-welded connections and test 100 percent of full 

penetration welds using the following: 

1. Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E 164. 



A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may 

properly proceed. 


05120 -3



A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural 

steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in 

intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, 

connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 

3.02 ERECTION 

A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings 

and Bridges". 

B. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise 

specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AISC 

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325. 

C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect. 

D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in 

contact with concrete. 

E. Grout solidly between column base plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's 

instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 

degrees. 

3.03 TOLERANCES 

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. 

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 



01400. 

B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections as stated in 

Section 05120, Article 2.04. 

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections and test welds as stated in 

Section 05120, Article 2.04. 



05120 -4


SECTION 05210 – STEEL JOISTS 



A. Open web steel joists. 

B. Joist accessories. 


A. Section 05120 – Structural Steel. 

B. Section 05310 - Steel Deck. 


A. American Welding Society, (AWS): 

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M-02: Structural Welding Code – Steel. 

B. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 

1. ASTM A 36/A 36M: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 

2. ASTM A 307: Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. 

C. The Society for Protective Coatings, (SSPC): 

1. SSPC-Paint 15: Paint Specification No. 15: Steel Joist Shop Primer. 

2. SSPC-SP 2: Surface Preparation Specification No. 2: Hand Tool Cleaning 

D. Steel Joist Institute, (SJI): 

1. SJI "Standard Specification, Load Tables, and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist 

Girders,". 

2. SJI "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders". 



B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists. 

Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, extensions, joist accessories; splice 

and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 

1. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. 

2. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.4 symbols, distinguishing between shop and field 

welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 

C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within 


D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that joists comply with 

requirements. 

E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying 

with applicable standard specifications and load tables of SJI "Specifications." 

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for 

designing special joists to comply with performance requirements. 

B. SJI Specifications: Comply with standard specifications in SJI's "Specifications" that are 

applicable to types of joists indicated. 

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding 

Code - Steel." 

04-27-11 STEEL JOISTS 

05210 -1



A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." 

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and 

handling. 



A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members. 

B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

C. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head 

bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 

2.02 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS 

A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web 

Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI "Specifications," with steel-angle top and bottom chord members, 

underslung ends, and parallel top chord. 

1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists. 

B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, 

and methods used in correcting welding work. 

C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. 

D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI Type S top-chord extensions where 

indicated, complying with SJI "Specifications." 

E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI Type R extended ends where indicated, 

complying with SJI "Specifications." 

F. Do not camber joists. 

G. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist 

slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 

2.03 JOIST ACCESSORIES 

A. Bridging: Fabricate as indicated and according to SJI "Specifications." Furnish additional 

erection bridging if required for stability. 

B. Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses as indicated. 

Shop prime paint. 

C. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist 

manufacturer to complete joist installation. 

2.04 PRIMERS 

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance 

requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 


05210 -2


2.05 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING 

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and 

accessories. 

B. Apply 1 coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, 

dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick. 



A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for 

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting 

performance. 

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. 

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting 

construction according to SJI "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, 

and requirements in this Section. 

1. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 

2. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that 

joists are stabilized during construction. 

3. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads 

have been applied. 

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding 

sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and 

procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting 

welding work. 

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts in locations indicated. 

E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are 

applied. 

F. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 



01400. 

B. Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 

C. Bolted connections will be visually inspected. 

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in 

compliance with specified requirements. 

E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified 

requirements. 


05210 -3


3.04 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 

A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or re-prime field 

connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting 

structural steel, and accessories. 

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2. 

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. 



05210 -4




A. Roof deck. 

SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK 

B. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 10 inches. 


A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. 

B. Section 05210 - Steel Joists: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches. 


A. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, 

Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, 

Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened. 

B. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society 

C. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society. 

D. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; The Society for Protective Coatings. 

E. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 


A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement, 

pertinent details, and accessories. 

C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and 

finishes. 

D. Certificates: Certify that products furnished meet or exceed specified requirements. 

E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within 



A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional 

Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with a 

record of successful in-service performance. 


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and 

handling. 

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a 

waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 

04-27-11 STEEL DECK 

05310 -1




A. Steel Deck: 

1. United Steel Deck , Inc: www.njb-united.com. 

2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com. 

3. Wheeling Corrugating Co: www.wheelingcorrugating.com. 


2.02 STEEL DECK 

A. Roof Deck: Wide Rib (Type B) Roof deck: 

1. Non-galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Grade 3. 

2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and phosphatized 

substrate. 

3. Structural Properties: 

a. Section modulus: SDI minimum for type of deck shown on Drawings. 

b. Span Design: 3 span minimum. 

4. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: Refer to Drawings for gauge. 

5. Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch. 

6. Profile: Wide Rib, Type B. 

7. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch. 

8. Side Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. Provide #10 TEK fasteners. 

9. End Joints: Lapped, welded, 4” minimum end lap. 


A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1. 

B. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping. 

C. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

1. Primer Color: Gray. 

D. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck. 

2.04 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES 

A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips and cover plates, 22 gage thick sheet steel; 

of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck. 

B. Roof Sump Pans: 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2 inches below 

roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight. 



A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. 


A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align 

and level. 

B. On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch bearing. 

C. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports as indicated on the 

Drawings. 

D. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3. 


05310 -2


E. At deck openings from 6 inches to 10 inches in size, provide 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel angle 

reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each 

side of opening and fusion weld or mechanically attach to deck at each flute. 

F. Where deck changes direction, install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same 

thickness as deck. Fusion weld 12 inches on center maximum. 

G. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and 

angle flashings to close openings. 

H. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam 

cell closures. 

I. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck 

flute. 

J. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned 

areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer. 


A. Welded Connections: Visually inspect 100 percent of connections to ensure that all plies of 

connected parts are in complete contact. 



05310 -3




SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 

A. Formed steel stud exterior wall framing and bracing. 

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 

A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies. 

B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. 

C. Section 05310 - Steel Deck. 

D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud framing. 


A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural 

Members; American Iron and Steel Institute 

B. AISI SG-971 - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American 

Iron and Steel Institute 

C. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel 

Hardware 

D. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron 

and Steel Products. 

E. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or 

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 

F. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, 

Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and 

Metal Plaster Bases. 

G. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society. 

H. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for 

Protective Coatings. 



B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, 

product criteria, limitations. 

C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacing, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal 

framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 

Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, 

splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. 

D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within 



A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with requirements of AISI 

North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 

04-27-11 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 

05400 -1



A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during 

delivery, storage, and handling. 

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid 

condensation. 


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the drawings. 

B. Coordinate work of this section with the placement of components within the stud framing 

system. 


2.01 FRAMING SYSTEM 

A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, 

fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system. 

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS 

A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched 

web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 

1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings. 

2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M G90/Z275 coating. 

B. Joists and Purlins: Fabricated from ASTM A 653/A 653M steel sheet, with G90/Z275 hot dipped 

galvanized coating. 

1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings. 


A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions 

encountered; finish to match framing components. 

B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed Sheet Steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; 

finish to match framing components. 

C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with 

VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. Sill Sealer: Closed-cell polyethylene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's 

standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 

2.04 FASTENERS 

A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A 

153/A 153M. 

B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated and Drilled expansion bolts. 

C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1. 

2.05 SHOP FABRICATED ASSEMBLIES 

A. Shop fabricate metal framing to the greatest extent possible. 

B. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with 

connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, 

manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 

2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 


05400 -2


3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, or riveting as 

standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. 

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and 

quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw 

penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. 

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw 

fastening, according to Shop Drawings. 

C. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection 

stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. 



A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF FRAMING 

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and Drawings. 

B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with 

connections securely fastened. 

C. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of 

foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 

D. Install studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted. 

E. Install studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design requirements. 

F. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. 

Independently frame both sides of joints. 

G. Install insulation, specified in Section 07212 in built-up exterior framing members, such as 

headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion 

of framing work. 

H. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. 


A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch. 

B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/8 inch. 



05400 -3


SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS 



A. Shop fabricated miscellaneous metal items. 

B. Custom stainless steel fabrications 


A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. 

B. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish. 


A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 

B. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, 

Welded and Seamless. 

C. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron 

and Steel Products. 

D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel 

Hardware. 

E. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi 

Minimum Tensile Strength. 

G. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa 

Tensile Strength (Metric). 

H. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel 

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 

I. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or 


J. ASTM A 666-03: Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, 

Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 

K. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 

American Welding Society. 

L. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society. 

M. OSHA 29 CFR Standard 1910.27 - Fixed Ladders; Occupational Safety and Health Standards. 

N. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings. 

O. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for 

Protective Coatings. 


A. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for 

installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral 

anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in 

time for installation. 

04-27-11 METAL FABRICATIONS 

05500 -1



2.01 METALS, GENERAL 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise 

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials 

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 

2.02 MATERIALS - STEEL 

A. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. 

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight, (Schedule 40), black finish. 

E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), with G90/Z275 galvanized 

coating. 

F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 

153M where connecting galvanized components. 

G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 

H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with 

VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 


A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units 

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain 

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius 

of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on 

exposed surfaces. 

C. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. 

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or 

welds where possible. 

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude 

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, 

and similar items. 

G. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; 

consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. 

H. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related 

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted 

otherwise. 

2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS 

A. Exterior patio guardrail/fence: Galvanized steel tube and plate materials as indicated on 

Drawings. 


05500 -2


B. RTU roof reinforcement angle frames. 

C. Bent, welded steel bar brackets for toilet room lavatory countertops. 

D. Steel half-wall reinforcement posts and anchors. 

E. Steel Roof Access Ladder: Unless otherwise indicated fabricate steel ladder as follows. 

1. Stringers (Side rails): 3 inches by 3/8 inch steel bars with eased edges. 

2. Rungs: 3/4 inch diameter smooth steel rods at 12 inches on center. Fit rungs in centerline 

of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth and flush on outer rail faces. 

3. Brackets: 3 inches by 3/8 inch bent steel plate to form a “U” bracket welded to stringers. In 

locations as indicted on Drawings, but not more than 6 feet on center. Brackets to be 

bolted to wall with two bolts per bracket. Coordinate locations of blocking. 

4. Center line of rungs minimum 7 inches from wall. 

5. Width: 1’-8” inches between stringers. 

6. Finish: Factory prime painted. Field finished under Section 09900. 

7. Comply with applicable OSHA requirements for steel ladders. 

F. Keg Storage Fencing and Gates: 

1. Fence Fabric: Chain link fence fabric, 2 inch mesh, 9 gauge galvanized coated wire. 

2. Posts, Rails and Braces: Nominal 2 inch diameter galvanized steel pipe. Provide 

galvanized components for attaching fence fabric, top caps, 4” by 4” x 1/4” galvanized steel 

base plates for posts and 5/8” stainless steel anchor bolts. 

3. Gates: Fabricate single swing gates as indicated on Drawings with forked type latch for 

padlock, 3 hinges per gate and cane bolts. All components galvanized. 

4. Hardware: Padlock by Section 08710 Door Hardware. 

5. Accessories: Provide other components required for complete installation. 

G. Trash Enclosure Gates: 

1. Gate Frame: 2” x 2” x 1/8”, ASTM A500 structural steel tubing. Continuously weld tube 

connections and grind welds smooth. 

2. Corrugated Metal Panels: 18 gauge, 1-1/2” deep, galvanized steel roof deck. 

3. Steel Casters: Provide 4” diameter steel casters capable of carrying the gate load, 1 per 

gate. Casters to be welded to bottom of gates at locations indicated on Drawings. 

4. Hardware: Fabricate gate hinges in configuration as indicated on Drawings. 2 hinges per 

gate. Provide cane bolts welded to frame, 1 per gate. 

H. Steel Channel Support System: Unistrut P1001HS. As indicated on Structural Drawings for 

support of 1/2" diameter threaded rods. Refer to detail 7/S202. 

I. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and 

recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for 

each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single 

unit where indicated. 

J. Custom Stainless Steel Fabrications: Provide 18 gauge, Type 304 brushed stainless steel wall 

angles, wall channels, trim and base components as indicated on Drawings. Hem edges, round 

off corners and adhesively apply in locations as indicated. 

2.04 FINISHES - STEEL 

A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. 

B. Prime paint all steel items with one coat of fabricators standard shop primer. 

C. Galvanizing of non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M 

requirements. 


05500 -3


2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES 

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. 

B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. 

C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. 

D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. 

E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. 



A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 


A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. 


A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 

B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until 

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. 

C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. 

D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 

E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except 

surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 

F. Coordinate with other related trades and suppliers for acceptable dimensions and tolerances. 

G. Install ladders in accordance with manufacturers instructions using manufacturer supplied 

brackets and accessories. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS 

A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards. Place concrete in 

bollard and vibrate or tamp for consolidation, round off concrete at top of bollard. Support and 

brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. 



05500 -4


SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 



A. Dimensional Framing Lumber. 

B. Roof and Wall Sheathing. 

C. Wood nailers and curbs for roofing and items installed on roof. 

D. Concealed wood blocking for support of equipment, toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, 

wood trim, and shelving. 

E. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips. 

F. Preservative treatment of wood. 

G. Fire retardant treatment of wood. 

H. Fiber Cement Siding Panels, Soffit Panels and Trim. 


A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. 


A. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel 

Hardware. 

B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 

C. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure 

Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association. 

D. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber -- Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American 

Wood-Preservers' Association. 

E. AWPA C27 - Plywood -- Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood- 

Preservers' Association. 

F. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood- 

Preservers' Association. 

G. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology 

(Department of Commerce). 

H. DOC PS 2: Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels. 

I. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology 


J. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association. 


A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 

B. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSCaccredited 

testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA 

standards. 

04-27-11 ROUGH CARPENTRY 

06100 -1



A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air 

circulation around stacks and under coverings. 


2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 

2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER 

A. General: 

1. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 

2. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. 

3. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. 

B. Framing Lumber: 2” x 4” or larger; No. 2 Southern Pine, No. 2 Douglas Fir Larch or equivalent. 

C. Joists and Rafters: Select Grade, Southern Pine, Douglas Fir Larch or equivalent. 

D. Roof Edge Bevel Blocking: 

1. Provide redwood, cedar or pressure treated material. 

E. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring, and Nailers: 

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 

2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 

2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS 

A. (SHTG-1) Wall Sheathing: The contractor has the option to use one of the following wall 

sheathing panels. 

1. Plywood Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 1, C-D, exposure 1, structural 1. 

2. Oriented Strand Board Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 2, exposure 1, structural 1. 

3. Nominal Thickness: 1/2 inch. 

B. (SHTG-2) Plywood Roof Sheathing: DOC PS 1, C-D, exterior, structural 1. 


2. Edge Detail: Tongue and Groove. 

C. (SHTG-3) Concealed Plywood: DOC PS 1, C-C Plugged, exposure 1. 

1. Nominal Thickness: as indicated on drawings. 

D. (SHTG-4) Exposed Plywood: DOC PS 1, A-D, interior grade. 

1. Nominal Thickness: as indicated on drawings. 

E. (SHTG-5) Electrical Panel Boards: APA rated sheathing, fire retardant treated. 


2.04 FIBER CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM 

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 

1. James Hardie Building Products, Inc., Mission Viejo, CA; www.jameshardie.com 

2. Substitutions: Not permitted. 


06100 -2


B. Materials: 

1. (FC SIDING) Siding Panels: HardiePanel Vertical Siding. 

a. Thickness: 5/16” thick. 

b. Panel Size: Provide panel sizes to minimize joints and to provide acceptable batten 

pattern. 

c. Texture: Smooth. 

d. Finish: Primed Finish for field painting under Section 09900. 

2. (FC SOFFIT) Soffit Panels: HardieSoffit. 

a. Thickness: 1/4" thick. 

b. Texture: Smooth. 

c. Finish: Primed Finish for field painting under Section 09900. 

3. (FC TRIM) Trim Boards: HardieTrim. 

a. Thickness: 1” thick. 

b. Texture: Smooth. 

c. Finish: Primed Finish for field painting under Section 09900. 

C. Installation: Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's written installation 

instructions. 


A. Fasteners and Anchors: 

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for exterior, high 

humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 

B. Metal Framing Connectors: Manufactured by The Simpson Co. 

1. Refer to Structural Drawings for specific components. 

C. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's 

standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. 

D. Membrane Underlayment: 40 mil. thick, self-adhering sheet underlayment for high temperature 

applications. 

1. Grace Construction Products: Grace Ice and Water Shield HT. 

2. Location: Use at Entry Canopy Roof over sheathing. 

2.06 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT 

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System 

for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific 

applications. 

B. (FT) Fire Retardant Treated Lumber: 

1. Interior Type A: AWPA Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H (Treatment C20 

for lumber and C27 for plywood), low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically 

treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 

25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion 

when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. 

a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber 

and 15 percent for plywood. 

b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated . 

c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may 

become wet. 


06100 -3


C. (PT) Preservative Pressure Treated Lumber, Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B, 

Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft 

retention. 

1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 

2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 

3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. 



A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and 

fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. 

Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for 

attaching other construction. 

B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, 

specialty items, and trim. 

C. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be 

exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. 

Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

D. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating 

lapping side members. 

E. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings. 

3.02 MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION 

A. Apply 1 layer of membrane underlayment over entire canopy area that is to receive aluminum 

composite panels. Lap joints 6 inches. 

3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT 

A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, 

complying with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 



06100 -4


SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY 



A. Installation of finish millwork items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor. 

B. Adjustable Shelf Hardware. 

C. Hardware and attachment accessories. 


A. Section 06110 - Rough Carpentry. 

B. Section 06410 - Custom Cabinets. 

C. Section 06415 - Countertops. 

D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 

E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Painting and finishing of millwork items. 


A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack materials flat 

with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within 

and around stacks and under temporary coverings. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not have materials delivered or install interior finish carpentry 

materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and 

nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative 

humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 


2.01 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS 

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 

2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS 

A. (WD1) Select White Maple: maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of 

quality suitable for transparent finish. Furnished by Millwork Vendor for installation under this 

Section. 

B. (WD2) Southern Pine: No. 1, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of 

quality suitable for intended use. 

2.03 ADJUSTABLE SHELF HARDWARE 

A. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: Knape & Vogt, No. KV87-36” – White. 

B. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: Knape & Vogt, No. KV187-18” – White. 

C. Accessories: Provide bracket manufacturers standard shelf rests as applicable for installation 

indicated on drawings. Finish: White. 

D. Shelves: Furnished by Millwork Vendor. 

04-27-11 FINISH CARPENTRY 

06200 -1


2.04 SHEET MATERIALS 

A. Cork Board: 1/4 inch thick fine grained cork for adhesive application. Furnished by Millwork 

Vendor. 

2.05 ADHESIVE 

A. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI to suit application. 

2.06 FASTENERS 

A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, 

size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, 

concealed where possible. 


A. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking: Southern Pine. 

B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. 

C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. 

2.08 HARDWARE 

A. Refer to Drawings for special hardware items. 

B. Provide incidental hardware as required. 


A. To greatest degree possible, shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage 

through building openings. 

B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. 

Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 

C. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit 

corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate 

counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 

2.10 FACTORY FINISHING 

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. 

B. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding 

surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. 

C. Finish work in accordance with WIC Manual of Millwork, Section 5, System #5 - Catalyzed 


D. Seal and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Spray or brush apply. 



A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 


A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use 

concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 

B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use 

additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 


06200 -2


C. Cope all inside corners, miter all outside corners. 

D. Countersink fasteners, apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth 

and flush. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ADJUSTABLE SHELF HARDWARE 

A. Install standards for adjustable shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, 

spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. and within 6 inches of end of shelves. Fasten to framing 

members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. 

B. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and 

reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports. 

C. Fasten shelves to brackets to comply with bracket manufacturer's written instructions. 



06200 -3


SECTION 06410 - CUSTOM CABINETS 



A. Installation of custom cabinetry and millwork items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor as 

follows: 

1. Specially fabricated cabinet units. 

2. Adjustable cabinet shelving. 

3. Cabinet hardware. 

4. Factory finishing. 


A. Section 06415 - Countertops: Plastic laminate and solid surface countertops. 


A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard. 

B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard. 

C. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use. 

D. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural 

Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada. 

E. GSA CID A-A-1936 - Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene Rubber; Federal Specifications and 

Standards. 

F. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood 

Plywood & Veneer Association. 

G. NHLA G-101 - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress; National 

Hardwood Lumber Association. 

H. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology 


I. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology 


J. WI (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute. 



B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint 

details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. 

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. 

D. Millwork Vendor is contracted direct by Owner. Millwork Vendor will submit shop drawings to 

General Contractor for dimension verification. 


A. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards 

Illustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in 

this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 

04-27-11 CUSTOM CABINETS 

06410 -1


1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION 

A. Protect units from moisture damage. 


A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions 

in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. 



A. Custom cabinetry and millwork items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor. 


A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 

2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS 

A. Softwood Lumber: NIST PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural 

Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; average moisture content of 4-9 percent; species as 

follows: 

1. Exposed Surfaces: Species Pine. 

2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Species Pine. 

3. Concealed Surfaces: Species Pine. 

B. Hardwood Lumber: NHLA; Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork 

Quality Standards Illustrated, Grade III/Economy; average moisture content of 4-9 percent; 

species as follows: 

1. Exposed Surfaces: (WD1) Select White Maple. 

2. Concealed Surfaces: Poplar. 

2.04 PANEL MATERIALS 

A. Softwood Faced Plywood: 

1. Exposed Surfaces: NIST PS 1; APA A-A Grade, plain-sliced white pine face veneer, 

Interior rated adhesives, core of particleboard, medium density fiberboard, or engineered 

combination, thickness as indicated. 

2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: NIST PS 1; APA A-B Grade, rotary cut Douglas fir face veneer, 

Interior rated adhesives, core of medium density fiberboard, engineered combination, fireretardant 

treated particleboard, or veneer, thickness as indicated. 

3. Concealed Surfaces: NIST PS 1; APA B-B Grade, rotary cut Douglas fir face veneer, 

Interior rated adhesives, core of medium density fiberboard, engineered combination, fireretardant 

treated particleboard, or veneer, thickness as required. 

B. Hardwood Faced Plywood: HPVA HP-1; graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural 

Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, core of veneer; type of glue recommended for specific 

application; thickness as required; face veneer as follows: 

1. Exposed Surfaces: (WD1) Select White Maple. 

C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWI/AWMAC 

Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood chips bonded with 

moisture resistant adhesive under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as required; use 

for components indicated on drawings. 


06410 -2


D. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC 

Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure 

bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as 

required. 

E. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch 

thick, smooth one side (S1S); use for drawer bottoms, dust panels, and other components 


2.05 LAMINATE MATERIALS 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. Wilsonart International; www.wilsonart.com 

B. Plastic Laminate: In accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated, 0.039 inch Post 

Forming quality. 

1. Color, Pattern, and Surface Textures: 

a. (PLAM1): Wilsonart # 1573-60, Frosty White, Matte. 

b. (PLAM3): Wilsonart # 1595-60, Black, Matte 

C. Laminate Backing Sheet: 0.020 inch Backing Sheet grade, undecorated plastic laminate. 


A. Adhesive: GSA CID A-A-1936 contact adhesive. 

B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application and as indicated on the Drawings. 

C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 

D. Stainless steel legs: 6 inches long, NSF approved for food preparation areas. 

E. Grommets: Nominal 3 inch round, black, plastic material for cut-outs, supplied and installed by 

GC. 

2.07 HARDWARE 

A. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf 

standards and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing 

adjustments. 

1. Product: No. KV 255 and 256 manufactured by Knape & Vogt. 

B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard back-mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf 

standards and coordinated cantilevered shelf brackets, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch 

spacing adjustments. 

1. Product: No. KV 187 and 87 manufactured by Knape & Vogt. 

C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, stainless steel with satin finish, 4 inch centers. 

D. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, master keyed, steel with chrome finish. 

E. Catches: Magnetic on all cabinets. 

F. Hinges: European style concealed type, steel with polished finish. Self-closing. 

G. Cup Dispensers: Install cup dispensers furnished by Owner’s Equipment Vendor. 


A. Coordinate with Owner supplied components and equipment. 

B. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit 

passage through building openings. 


06410 -3


C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. 

D. Door Fronts: 3/4 inch thick; overlay style. 

E. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for 

cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. 

F. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with 

manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Locate 

counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 

G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. 

H. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. 

Prime paint cut edges. 

I. Provide grommets in locations as indicated on cabinet drawings. 

J. Provide white melamine surface on interior surfaces of closed cabinets, unless otherwise noted 

on the Drawings. 

K. Provide plastic laminate surfaces on exposed surface of cabinets and interiors of open shelf 

cabinets normally exposed to view. 

L. Provide stainless steel legs on laminate casework located at food preparation areas as detailed. 

2.09 FACTORY FINISHING 

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. 

B. For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth. 

C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding 

surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. 

D. Finish work in accordance with WIC Manual of Millwork, Section 5, System #5 - Catalyzed 


E. Seal and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Spray or brush apply. 



A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 

B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section. 


A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. 

B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. 

C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. 

D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not 

use additional overlay trim for this purpose. 

E. Secure cabinets to wall and floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. 

3.03 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust installed work. 

B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 


06410 -4


3.04 CLEANING 

A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. 



06410 -5


SECTION 06415 - COUNTERTOPS 



A. Installation of countertops for manufactured casework furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor. 

B. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops. 


A. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use. 

B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 

C. ISSFA-2 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface 

Fabricators Association. 

D. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates. 



B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint 

details, fastening methods, and schedule of finishes. 

C. Millwork Vendor is contracted direct by Owner. Millwork Vendor will submit shop drawings to 

General Contractor for dimension verification. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Qualified installer for solid surface materials that is trained and certified 

by manufacturer for the installation of the specified products. 


2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES 

A. Countertops furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor. 

B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate. 

1. Laminate Sheet, Unless Otherwise Indicated: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominal 

thickness. 

a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, 

maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 

b. NSF approved for food contact. 

c. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20. 

d. Surface Color and Pattern: (PLAM2) Wilsonart # 4884-38, Flame Soapstone, 

Standard finish. 

2. Laminate Backing Sheet: 0.020 inch Backing Sheet grade, undecorated plastic laminate. 

3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction. 

B. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous 

substrate. 

1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum. 

04-27-11 COUNTERTOPS 

06415 -1


2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD 

3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and 

capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface 

coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. 

a. NSF approved for food contact. 

b. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20. 

c. Color and Pattern: (SS1) Corian, Custom BWW color, #PDR AMG24-06-D. 

3. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum. 

4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; square edge. 

5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high. 

6. Skirts: As indicated on drawings. 


A. Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2. 

B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of 

materials being joined. 


A. Fabricate tops, splashes and sills in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints 

flush. 

1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 

2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against 

cabinet or wall. 

3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or 

unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. 

B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive 

sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 

D. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, and brackets required and as indicated on 

drawings. 



A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Construction Manager of 

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 

C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets 

are installed in proper locations. 


A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best 

result for the substrate under the project conditions. 


A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; 

shim where required. 


06415 -2


B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board 

of 5/8 inch. 

C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces with clear silicone sealant. 

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. 

B. Protect installed products until completion of project. 

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 



06415 -3




SECTION 06605 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 

A. Fiberglass reinforced polyester panel system for adhesive mounting. 

B. Moldings, adhesive, and joint sealants. 


A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, 

in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits 

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under 

environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Crane Composites, Inc., (Formerly Kemlite Company), Channahon, 

IL. www.cranecomposites.com 

2.02 PANEL SYSTEM 

A. Plastic Panel System: Factory finished panels, trim, sealant, and accessories. 

B. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels (FRP): 0.090 inch thick, USDA approved, textured 

surface wall panels with Class III/Class C fire rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E 

84. 

1. Product: Crane Composities, Glasbord-P, Embossed Class C Wall Panel. 

2. Flame Spread:





B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory 

preparation before proceeding. 


A. Take panels out of cartons and allow to acclimatize to room conditions for at least 48 hours prior 

to installation. 

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best 

result for the substrate under the project conditions. 

C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 

D. Protect existing surfaces from damage due to installation. 


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Use the adhesives recommended by the panel manufacturer unless prohibited by local 

regulations; obtain manufacturer's approval of alternative adhesives. 

C. Install panels continuous from floor to ceiling without horizontal joints. 

D. Install continuous bead of silicone sealant in each joint and trim groove and between trim and 

adjacent construction, maintaining 1/8 inch expansion space. 

E. Avoid contamination of panel faces with adhesives, solvents, or cleaners; clean as necessary 

and replace if not possible to repair to original condition. 

F. Protect installed products until completion of project. 

G. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products after Substantial Completion. 

H. Cove base to be installed on top of FRP with no bottom trim. Caulk top of cove to FRP with 

clear silicone. 


04-27-11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 

06605 -2




SECTION 07100 – SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 

A. Self-Adhering, Sheet Membrane Waterproofing. 


A. Section 03300 – Cast-in-place Concrete. 

B. Section 04810 – Unit Masonry Assemblies. 


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

1. ASTM C 272: Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich 

Constructions. 

2. ASTM D 1227: Specification for Emulsified Asphalt used as a Protective Coating for 

Roofing. 

3. ASTM D 1621: Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 

4. ASTM D 1668: Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and 


5. ASTM D 4258: Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. 

6. ASTM D 6135: Practice for Application of Self-Adhering Modified Bituminous 


B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): 

1. Waterproofing Manual. 



B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following: 

1. Manufacturer's written installation instructions. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary waterproofing materials and primers through one source 

from a single manufacturer. 

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer for installation of 

waterproofing required for this Project. 


A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible 

manufacturer's identification. 

B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 

1. Store in cool, dry place at temperature of not less than 40 degrees F., out of direct sunlight, 

and with adequate ventilation. 


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather 

conditions permit waterproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written 

instructions. 

B. Do not apply waterproofing to damp, frozen, dirty, or dusty surfaces unacceptable to 

waterproofing system manufacturer. 

04-27-11 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 

07100 -1




A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Waterproofing: 

1. W.R. Grace & Co.; Bituthene 3000. www.graceconstruction.com 

2. American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM 75. www.hydrotechusa.com 

3. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861. www.carlisle-cww.com 

4. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Mel-Rol. www.wrmeadows.com 

2.02 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 

A. (Waterproofing): Modified Bituminous Sheet of not less than 60-mil thick, self-adhering sheet 

consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil thick, polyethylene film with 

release liner on adhesive side and formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner. 

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended 

use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 

1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet 

waterproofing material. 

C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by 

manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. 

D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low 

viscosity. 

E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating. 

F. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet strips of same material and thickness as 

sheet waterproofing. 

G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended 

by waterproofing manufacturer. 

H. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch 

centers. 

I. Protection Board: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced one or 

both sides with plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch, with compressive strength of not less 

than 8 psi per ASTM D 1621, and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6 percent per 

ASTM C 272. 

1. Owens Corning's "Fanfold DWB. 

2. Dow Chemical Company's "Protection Board III. 

3. Comparable products from other manufacturers. 


07100 -2




A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface 

smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

1. Proceed with waterproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating 

work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by 

waterproofing manufacturer. 

3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. 

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION 

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide 

clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. 

B. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other 

contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. 

C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, 

holes, and other voids. 

D. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints 

and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 

E. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135. 

1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets of liquid 

membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows: 

a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from corner or 

install membrane strip centered over corner. 

F. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations 

through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are 

indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of waterproofing. 

B. Install sheet waterproofing according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and 

according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135. 

C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be 

covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Re-prime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 

D. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and 

maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and 

stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. 

1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install selfadhering, 

modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not 

use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F. 

E. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and 

contraction joints. 

F. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashing or ending 

in reglets with mastic. 


07100 -3


G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in sheet waterproofing not complying with requirements. 

Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches 

beyond repaired areas in all directions. 

H. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; 

repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION BOARD 

A. Install protection board with butted joints over sheet waterproofing immediately after installation. 

Comply with waterproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching 

protection board. 


A. Protect waterproofing and protection board from damage during remainder of construction 

period. 



07100 -4




SECTION 07160 – BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 

A. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing. 

B. Protection board. 


A. Section 03300 – Cast-in-place Concrete. 

B. Section 04810 – Unit Masonry Assemblies. 



1. ASTM C 272: Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural. 

2. ASTM D 1227: Specification for Emulsified Asphalt used as a Protective Coating for 

Roofing. 

3. ASTM D 1621: Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 

4. ASTM D 1668: Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and 


B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): 

1. Waterproofing Manual. 



B. Product Data: Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats, 

coverage or thickness and reinforcing. Submit manufacturer’s technical bulletins and MSDS. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source 

from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of 

primary materials. 



conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written 

instructions. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Dampproofing: 

1. BASF Building Systems. 

2. Karnak Corporation. 

3. W.R. Meadows, Inc. 

4. Tamms Industries, Inc. 

04-27-11 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 

07160 -1


2.02 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING 

A. (Dampproofing) Emulsified Bituminous Dampproofing: Non-fibered, water-based, non-sag 

asphaltic coating designed for spray application on damp substrate and conforming to ASTM D 

1227, Type III, Class 1. 

1. BASF: Hydrocide 600. 

2. W.R. Meadows: Sealmastic Emulsion Type I – Spray Grade. 

3. Karnak Corporation: 100AF Non-Fibered Emulsion Dampproofing. 

4. Tamms: Dehydratine 75. 


A. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as 

recommended by manufacturer. 

B. Fiber Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I. 

1. Karnak Corporation: No. 31 Fiberglass Membrane. 

2. Sonoshield Reinforcing Fabric by BASF Building Systems. 

3. Comparable products from other manufacturers complying with specified requirements. 

C. Patching Compound: Fibered mastic of type recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. 

D. Protection Board: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced one 

or both sides with plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch, with compressive strength of not less 

than 8 psi per ASTM D 1621, and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6 percent per 

ASTM C 272. 

1. Owens Corning's "Fanfold DWB. 

2. Dow Chemical Company's "Protection Board III. 

3. Comparable products from other manufacturers. 



A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface 

smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating 

work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being 

stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering 

and clogging weep holes and drains. 

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and 

apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer. 

C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other 

imperfections. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are 

indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing. 

1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve coverage 

indicated. 

2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats. 

3. Allow 24 hours drying time prior to backfilling or coverage by other materials. 


07160 -2


B. Locations: 

1. Foundation Walls: Apply dampproofing to foundation walls where opposite side of wall 

faces building interior and other locations indicated on drawings. 

a. Apply from finished grade line to 16 inches below building floor line. 

b. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting surfaces, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed 

to view when Project is completed. 

c. Install fiber glass fabric stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane, 

construction joints, cracks, by embedding an 8 inch wide strip of fiber glass fabric in a 

heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to 

other coats required. 

d. Coverage Rate: Apply 2 spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. for first coat 

and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat. 

2. Cavity Walls: Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior 

face of back-up surface on masonry and concrete cavity walls. 

a. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, 

and other items that penetrate applied surface. 

b. Coverage rate: Apply 1 spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION BOARD 

A. Install protection board over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing 

material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection board. 

1. Support protection board with spot application of adhesive of type recommended by 

protection board manufacturer over cured coating. 

3.05 CLEANING 

A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. 



07160 -3


SECTION 07212 - BOARD AND BATT INSULATION 



A. Batt insulation in exterior wall construction. 

B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces, crevices in exterior wall and 

roof, and roof and miscellaneous stud spaces. 

C. Batt insulation for acoustic insulation in interior partitions. 

D. Board Insulation at roof. 

E. Board Insulation for exterior foundations. 


A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Supporting construction for batt insulation. 

B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 

C. Section 07260 – Air and Vapor Barriers. 

D. Section 07535 - Mechanically Attached Membrane Roofing. 


A. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light 

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 

B. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 

750 Degrees C. 

C. ASTM C 578 – Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 

D. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal 

Insulation Board. 

E. ASTM D 1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 

F. ASTM D 1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 

G. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

B. Verify that polyisocyanurate roof insulation is acceptable with roof membrane manufacturer. 



A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, 

and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written 

instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. 

03/09/10 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION 

07212 -1



2.01 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS 

A. (INSUL1) Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed mineral fiber batt; friction fit, conforming to 

the following: 

1. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for 

facing, if any. 

2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings for wall thickness. 

3. Facing: Unfaced. 

4. Manufacturers: 

a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com 

b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com 

c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com 


2.02 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS 

A. (INSUL2): Under Slab and Foundation Insulation: Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation, 2” 

inch thick, unless noted otherwise, ASTM C 578, Type IV, 30 psi minimum compressive 

strength, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., with a flame-spread of 5 and smoke-developed indexes of 45-75: 


a. Diversifoam Products: Certifoam. 

b. Dow Chemical: Styrofoam. 

c. Owens Corning: Foamular LT30. 

B. (INSUL3): Roof Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board to ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class I, Grade 

2; rigid, closed cell type, with specially formulated organic/inorganic facers. 

1. Long Term Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518): R=6.0 per 1 inch of thickness. 

2. Board Size: 48”x48” and 48”x96”. 

3. Nominal Product Thickness: 4 inches unless noted otherwise. 

4. Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621): minimum 20 psi. 

5. Density (ASTM D1622): 2 pcf. 

6. Edges: Square. 

7. Dimensional Stability: less than 2 percent linear change. 

8. Flame Spread (ASTM E84): 25. 

9. Provide tapered insulation boards and thicknesses to create tapered areas as indicated on 

Roof Plan. 

10. Manufacturers and Products: 

a. Johns Manville: Enrgy 3 Roof Insulation Board. www.jm.com 

b. GAF Materials Corporation: EnergyGuard Roof Insulation Board. www.gaf.com 

c. Firestone Building Products: ISO 95+. www.firestonebpco.com 

d. Comparable products from other roofing insulation manufacturers that meet or exceed 

the specified requirements and are acceptable to the roof membrane manufacturer. 

C. Mechanical Fasteners: Screw type, 6 ga. diameter, self-tapping, galvanized steel, sufficient 

length to secure anchor system into place and to withstand all super-imposed loads: complete 

with 1 1/2 inch diameter 14 ga. thick galvanized steel discs. 



A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and compatible. 

B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, sound, free of honeycomb, oil, grease, fins, or other 

irregularities. 


07212 -2


3.02 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 

A. Deliver in original unopened packages and store in enclosed shelter; protect from damage and 

exposure to direct sunlight. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from premises. 

3.03 BATT INSTALLATION 

A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. 

C. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services 

within the plane of the insulation. 

3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION 

A. Insulate interior face of exterior concrete foundation, including returns under floor slab as 

indicated on the drawings. Provide complete insulation membrane around entire building 

whether specifically indicated or not. 

B. Mechanically fasten insulation boards to substrate at NRCA, UL or FM required spacing, 

whichever is more stringent. 

C. Apply insulation boards parallel to roof perimeter edges. 

D. Lay second layer of insulation with joints staggered from first layer 

E. Lay insulation boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly 

to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. 

F. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day. 

G. Keep insulation a minimum of 3 inches from heat emitting devices, and a minimum 2 inches 

from sidewalls. 

H. Install after building embankment and granular cushion have been completed and vapor 

retarder is in place. Lay insulation in place, edges closely pressed together, against inside face 

of foundation beam excavation; returned under floor slab as shown on the drawings. Pour 

concrete to cover insulation. 

3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK 

A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. 

3.06 CLEAN-UP 

A. Upon completion of work of this section, remove related debris from premises. 



07212 -3




SECTION 07240 – EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM 

A. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS), Class PB. 


A. Section 01300 – Administration Requirements: for submittal procedures. 

B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: for wall framing and sheathing. 

C. Section 07620 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 

D. Section 07920 – Joint Sealants: Expansion joint and perimeter sealants. 

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Water Drainable EIFS: A “nonload bearing, water drainage exterior wall cladding system that 

consists of a fluid applied water resistive coating applied over sheathing or concrete masonry, 

insulation board attached adhesively with notched trowel; an integrally reinforced base coat; 

and a textured protective finish coat,” as defined by ASTM C 1397. 



1. ASTM C150 – “Spec for Portland Cement”. 

2. ASTM C578 – “Spec for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation”. 

3. ASTM C 1397 – “Practice for Application of Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish 

Systems”. 

4. ASTM C 1481: Guide for Use of Joint Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems 

(EIFS). 

5. ASTM D 578-00: Specification for Glass Fiber Strands. 

6. ASTM D 1784-03: Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and 

Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 

7. ASTM D 3273: Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior 

Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 

8. ASTM D 3274: Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films 

by Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil and Dirt Accumulation. 

9. ASTM E84 – “Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.” 

B. EIFS Industry Members Association (EIMA) Standards: 

1. EIMA101.01 – Standard Test Method for Freeze-Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation 

and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB (Modified ASTM C67). 

2. EIMA 101.02 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Water Penetration of Exterior 

Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB, (Modified ASTM E 331). 

3. EIMA 101.03 – Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Strength of an 

Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS), and Components, Class PB (Modified ASTM 

C297). 

4. EIMA 101.86 – Standard Test Method for Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish 

Systems (EIFS), Class PB, to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). 

5. EIMA 105.01 – Standard Test Method for Alkali Resistance of Glass Fiber Reinforcing 

Mesh for use in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB. 

6. EIMA 300.01 – Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of 

Sealants when used with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB. 

7. EIMA- Class PB Details - Exterior Insulation and Finish System Class PB Details. 

8. EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board. 

12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM 

07240 -1


C. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES): 

1. ICC-ES AC12: Interim Criteria for Foam Plastic Insulation. 

2. ICC-ES AC24: Interim Criteria for Exterior Insulation and Finish System. 

3. ICC-ES AC219: Acceptance Criteria for Exterior Insulation and Finish System. 

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. EIFS Performance: Provide a system to comply with the following: 

1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and 

supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other 

in-service conditions. 

2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into water-drainage EIFS 

and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in 

deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and 

assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish, 

and including a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assembly to drain to the 

exterior. 

B. Class PB EIFS: Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that 

comply with the following: 

1. Abrasion Resistance: No cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity when tested per 

ASTM D 968, Method A. 

2. Absorption - Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss 

after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01. 

3. Accelerated Weathering: Five samples per ICC-ES AC219 showing no cracking, checking, 

crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination per ASTM G 153. 

4. Freeze -Thaw: No surface changes, cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, 

blistering, peeling, or delamination per ICC-ES AC219. 

5. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: No growth when tested per ASTM D 3273 and 

evaluated according to ASTM D 3274. 

6. Salt-Spray Resistance: No deleterious affects when tested according to ICC-ES AC219. 

7. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in EIFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat when tested per 

EIMA 101.03. 

8. Water Penetration: No water penetration into the plane of the base coat to expandedpolystyrene 

board interface per EIMA 101.02. 

9. Water Resistance: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or 

delamination after testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247. 

10. Wind-Driven-Rain Resistance: When applicable with stud framed wall substrates; resist 

wind-driven rain according to ICC-ES AC219. 

11. Impact Resistance: Tested per EIMA 101.86; and meeting or exceeding the following: 

12. Standard Impact Resistance: 25 to 49 inch-lb. 

13. High Impact Resistance: 90 to 150 inch-lb. 

14. Drainage: According to ICC-ES AC235. 

15. Structural Performance Testing: EIFS assembly and components to comply with ICC- 

ES AC219 when tested per ASTM E 330. 



B. Installer’s Certification: 

1. List of at least 3 successfully completed EIFS projects of similar complexity, completed 

within the last 2 years. 

2. Installer’s approved and current Applicator’s Certificate. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer, certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install 

manufacturer's system using trained workers. 


07240 -2


B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from 

sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components. 

C. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following 

fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system 

components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of 

applicable testing agency. 

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and 

finish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or 

less, per ASTM E 84. 

2. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268. 

3. Potential Heat: Acceptable level when tested according to NFPA 259. 


A. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging with labels 

intact clearly identifying products. 

B. Inspect products for damage and notify manufacturer of any discrepancies. Do not use 

damaged or unsatisfactory materials. 

C. Store materials inside under cover protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface 

contamination, aging, damaging temperatures, construction traffic and other causes. 

1. Do not store at less than 40 deg. F. 

2. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. 


A. Weather Limitations: Comply with exterior insulation finish system manufacturer’s requirements 

for temperatures and environmental conditions before during and after application. 

1. Do not apply EIFS system unless the ambient temperature is above 40 deg. F and rising at 

the time of installation and remains so for 24 hours following installation. 

2. Do not apply EIFS system materials to substrates whose temperature is below 40 deg. F. 

3. Do not apply EIFS system during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is 

employed. 


A. Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall 

assemblies, including sheathing, flashing, trim, joint sealants, aluminum framing systems, and 

doors, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, corrosion, moisture, and other 

causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and barrier coating of EIFS. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers and System: 

1. Dryvit System Inc.: (Outsulation MD System). 

2. Senergy, Inc.: (Senerflex Channeled Adhesive System). 

3. STO Corporation.: (StoTherm Essence Next). 

4. Parex Inc.: (Standard Water Master System). 


A. Compatibility: Provide water-resistive coating, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing 

meshes, base- and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one 

another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project. 


07240 -3


B. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use 

as water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and 

performance criteria of ICC-ES AC212. 

1. Sheathing Joint Tape: Type recommended by EIFS manufacturer for sealing joints 

between and penetrations through sheathing. 

C. Drainage Strip/Track: Manufacturer’s standard PVC track or strip to provide drainage of system. 

Coordinate component selected with specific details indicated on Drawings. 

D. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use, 

compatible with substrate, and complying with the following: 

1. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and fillers 

specified for base coat. 

E. Insulation Board: Molded, rigid cellular polystyrene insulation board complying with 

ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline 

Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for most stringent requirements 

for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible 

variations, and the following: 

1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less 

than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results. 

2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, per 

ASTM E 84. 

3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards in thickness indicated, but not more than 4 inches 

thick or less than thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397. 

4. Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings. 

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for 

compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multi-end strands with retained 

mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. per EIMA 105.01; complying with ASTM D 578 

and the following requirements for minimum weight: 

1. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 

2. High-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 15 oz./sq. yd. 

3. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 

4. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd. 

G. Base Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following: 

1. Formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or natural color; 

and manufacturer's standard 100% acrylic adhesive designed for use with portland 

cement. 

2. Materials to be shipped pre-measured for job-site mixing. 

H. Tinted Base-Coat Primer (provide if required by manufacturer): EIFS manufacturer's standard 

100% acrylic primer for preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat. 

1. Note: Primer to be tinted to closely match Finish Coat including custom colors. 

I. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard 100% acrylic-based coating complying 

with the following: 

1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound 

stone particles, and fillers. 

2. Refer to EIFS Schedule at end of this Section for finish coat color and texture. 

J. Mildew Resistant Finish Additive: EIFS manufacturer's standard mildew resistance additive for 

the EIFS system finish coat. 

Dryvit: “PMR Finish”. 

Comparable products from other specified EIFS manufacturers. 

K. Water: Potable. 


07240 -4


L. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply 

with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and 

complying with ASTM D 1784. 

M. Sealant: Sealant and joint backing materials as specified under Section 07900 – Joint Sealers, 

(SLNT7), and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in ASTM C 1481. 

1. Sealant Color: To match EIFS topcoat color. 

2.03 MIXING 

A. General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. 

1. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS 

manufacturer. 

2. Mix materials in clean containers. 

3. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS. 

B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other 

construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry. 

2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 


A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. 

Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish 

coats on other work. 

B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during 

installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of 

substrates. 

C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain 

optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation. 

1. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for insulation 

installation. Verify suitability of substrate by performing bond and moisture tests 

recommended by EIFS manufacturer. 

3.03 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS 

as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. 

3.04 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION 

A. Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to 

provide water-/weather-resistive barrier. 

1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of 

sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over sheathing, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at 

openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written 

instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime substrates, if required, and install 

flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions and details. 


07240 -5


3.05 TRIM INSTALLATION 

A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, at window sills, and 

elsewhere as indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with 

installation of insulation. 

1. Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door heads of waterdrainage 

EIFS unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Window Sill Flashing: Use at windows unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings. 

4. Casing Bead: Use at other locations. 

3.06 INSULATION INSTALLATION 

A. Mesh Backwrap at Edge Conditions: Prior to installing insulation and before applying reinforcing 

mesh, fully wrap board edges with detail reinforcing mesh. Cover edges of board and extend 

encapsulating mesh not less than 2 inches over front, edge and back face of board as indicated 

on Drawings. 

1. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows: 

a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat, 

reinforcing mesh, and finish coat. 

b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between EIFS 

and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 

B. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397, 

EIFS manufacturer's written application instructions, and the following: 

1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method in a manner that results in coating 

the entire surface of sheathing with adhesive once insulation is adhered to sheathing. 

a. NOTE: Apply the adhesive so that the ribbons run vertically when the insulation board 

is placed on the wall. 

2. Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over the entire surface of insulation 

to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level surface. 

3. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period recommended by EIFS 

manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, before beginning rasping and sanding insulation, 

or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh. 

4. Apply insulation over dry substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented 

horizontally. 

5. Begin first course of insulation from a level base line and work upward. 

6. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond 

pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches wide or 6 inches 

high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches from corners of window and door openings and 

not less than 4 inches from aesthetic reveals. 

a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches from horizontal 

and 4 inches from vertical joints in sheathing. 

7. Place insulation with adhesive channels aligned in the vertical position for drainage. Align 

drainage channels in insulation boards above and below. 

8. Interlock ends at internal and external corners. 

9. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, 

continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater 

than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using 

adhesive or other material. 

10. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and 

shapes complying with details indicated. 

11. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 

1/16 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do 

not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch. 


07240 -6


12. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured 

to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations 

indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic reveals to less than 3/4 inch. 

13. Install foam shapes and attach to sheathing or structure. 

14. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated. 

15. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and 

between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to 

produce joint widths indicated on Drawings after encapsulating joint substrates with base 

coat and reinforcing mesh. 

16. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not 

allow water to penetrate behind flashing and EIFS protective-coating. 

C. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as 

follows: 

1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS. 

2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other EIFS. 

3. At floor lines in multilevel framed construction. 

4. Where wall height or building shape changes. 

5. Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations. 

3.06 BASE COAT INSTALLATION 

A. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of concrete, insulation and foam shapes, as applicable, 

in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16- 

inch dry-coat thickness. 

B. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free 

installation with mesh continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2 inches or otherwise 

treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Do 

not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying 

additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible. 

C. Install reinforcing mesh types where recommended by the manufacturer and as follows: 

1. Standard Mesh: Wall areas subject to normal impact and flat walls or walls with moderate 

contours. 

2. High Impact Mesh: Wall areas as follows: 

a. Areas below 8’-0” in height or subject to touch. 

b. Areas where projects are located in Wind Debris Zones (120 mph or higher). 

c. Where specifically indicated on Drawings. 

3. Detail Mesh: Used over special shapes and irregular detail work, at the base of a wall, at 

aesthetic and expansion/control joints, around openings and projections. 

4. Corner Mesh: For clean, crisp arises, outside corners, prefabricated panel edges and 

additional impact resistance. 

D. Double-Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and 

second layer of reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2 inches to comply with 

ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions in same manner as first application. 

1. Do not apply until first base coat has cured. 

E. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches 

beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of 

openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- wide strip corner reinforcing mesh at both inside 

and outside building corners. 

1. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip detail reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches wide. 

2. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh. 

F. Foam Shapes: Fully embed detail reinforcing mesh in base coat. 


07240 -7


G. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and 

thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat 

has cured. 

3.07 FINISH COAT INSTALLATION 

A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform 

appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color 

and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture 

variations. 

1. Refer to EIFS Schedule at end of this Section for finish coat color and texture. 

3.08 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Sealant and installation of sealant as specified under Section 07900. 

1. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat. 

3.09 FINAL INSPECTION/REVIEW 

A. General: Conduct inspections, and make repairs or replace unsatisfactory EIFS panels as 

required. Completed work exposed to view, to be uniform in texture and color without defects. 

B. Additional Requirements: in addition to above, in-place EIFS panels may be rejected for any 

one of the following: 

1. Exceeding specified installation tolerances. 

2. Damaged during construction operations. 

3. Exposed-to-view surfaces which develop surface finish deficiencies. 

4. Exposed-to-view color and/or texture of surfaces which does not match other surfaces, 

adjacent or remote. 

5. Exposed-to-view color and texture of surfaces which does not match approved samples 

and/or approved mock-up sample. 

3.12 EIFS SCHEDULE 

A. Refer to Exterior Finishes Schedule Drawing Sheet A100 for EIFS Key Note Locations. 

B. Colors and Textures indicated are those of Dryvit Systems, Inc. Provide comparable colors and 

textures from other specified manufacturers with approved samples. 

(EIFS1): Key Note 18 

Color: # 401, “Pretzel”. Finish: Sandpebble. 

(EIFS2): Key Note 19: 

Color: Color to Match Sherwin Williams Color # SW6898, “Social Butterfly”, (C13). 

Finish: Sandpebble. 

Note: The following two colors are used together in an alternating 2’-0” pattern in locations as 

indicated on Drawings. 


Color: # 714, “Licorice”. Finish: Sandpebble. 


Color: # 310, “China White”. Finish: Sandpebble. 


07240 -8



A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials 

from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS 

coatings. 



07240 -9


SECTION 07260 - AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS 



A. Air Barriers: Materials to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints between exterior 

walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls. 


A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: for vapor retarder under slab. 

B. Section 07212 - Board and Batt Insulation. 

C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques. 


A. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 

B. ASTM E 1677 - Specification for an Air Retarder (AR) Material or System for Low-Rise Framed 

Building Walls. 

C. AATCC – American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists. 

1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test 


A. Vapor Permeability (Perm): Measure in accordance with ASTM E 96 Procedure E. 


A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, 

during and after installation. 



A. Air Barrier: Spunbonded olefin, nonwoven, non-perforated: 

1. Tyvek(R) Water Resistant Barrier, Manufactured by DuPont Company, Wilmington, DE. 

a. Classification: ASTM E 1677, Type I; air leakage at 25 mph wind pressure less than 

0.06 cubic feet per minute per square foot. 

b. Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms ASTM E 96, Method B. 

c. Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 78.7 inches per AATCC Test Method 127. 

2. Sealing Tape: DuPont Tyvek Tape. 



A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. 

3.02 AIR BARRIER INSTALLATION 

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Install air barrier materials and assemblies in conjunction with materials described in other 

sections to provide continuous sealed barrier in the exterior enclosure of the building. 

04-27-11 AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS 

07260 -1


C. Over exterior surface of sheathing, behind facing brick, install sheet with fasteners as 

recommended by sheet manufacturer. 

1. Note: Do not install air barrier over sheathing in areas that receive EIFS. In EIFS areas, a 

liquid water resistive barrier will be installed over sheathing as part of EIFS system. Refer 

to Section 07240. 

D. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 

E. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 


04-27-11 AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS 

07260 -2




SECTION 07411 - PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS 

A. Standing Seam Metal Roofing and Wall System. 

B. Accessories and miscellaneous components. 


A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Roof framing and purlins. 

B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing. 

C. Section 07212 – Board and Batt Insulation: Board insulation under roof system. 

D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants. 


A. Standing Seam Roof System: Standing seam metal roof system applied over # 30 roof felt over 

1” polyisocyanurate board insulation on 5/8” roof sheathing on metal roof deck. 

B. Standing Seam Canopy End Panel System: Standing seam metal roof system applied vertically 

over # 30 roof felt on 5/8” plywood sheathing for canopy end panels. 


A. AAMA 621: Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated 

Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. 

B. ASTM D 226: Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and 


C. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron 

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 

D. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 


A. Performance Requirements: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified 

requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movement 

of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system. 

B. Wind Uplift: System to comply with requirements for UL Classification 580 for UL classified 90 

rated assemblies. 



B. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions, 

spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayment, and special conditions. 

1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled. 

C. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been 

completed in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems 

similar to those required for this project, with not less than 5 years of documented experience. 

04-27-11 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS 

07411 -1



A. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to 

panels prior to installation. 


A. Coordinate sheet metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of 

sheathing, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a watertight, secure, and 

noncorrosive installation. 

1.10 WARRANTY 

A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. 

B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s special warranty covering failure of factory-applied 

exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence 

of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified 

warranty period of 20 year period from date of Substantial Completion. 

C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s warranty for weathertightness of roofing 

system, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within 

specified warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 

1. Architectural Building Components: www.archmetalroof.com. Permaseam Roofing 

System. 

2. Petersen Aluminum Corporation: www.pac-clad.com. Snap Clad Roofing Panels. 

2.02 METAL PANELS 

A. Panel Material: G-90 galvanized steel sheet in compliance with ASTM A653. 

1. Gauge: 24 gauge. 

2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 1-3/4” inch seam height; concealed fastener system 

for field snap lock type installation. 

3. Texture: Smooth, not embossed. 

4. Length: Maximum possible length to minimize lapped joints. 

5. Width: 12 inch wide panels. 

6. Finish: 70% polyvinylidene flouride resin type “Kynar 500” or equivalent, AAMA 621. 

a. Color: Matte Black. 

2.03 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM 

A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard concealed anchor clips designed for 

specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including 

anticipated thermal movement. 

1. Note: Roof system manufacturer to provide extended panel clips or bearing plates to 

accommodate the 1” thick roof insulation and to allow direct fastening of system to plywood 

substrate. 

2.04 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 

A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, trim, moldings, closure strips, and other 

exposed components of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels. 

Items completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless or galvanized 

steel. 

B. Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel, furnished by metal panel manufacturer for 

specific substrate. 


07411 -2


C. Roofing Felt: Type 30, asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, conforming to ASTM D226. 

D. Roof Insulation: 1” thick, polyisocyanurate insulation board as specified under Section 07212 for 

mechanical installation to plywood substrate. 

E. Sealants: As specified under Section 07900. 

1. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency. 

2. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type. 


A. Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer’s standard 

processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements. 




requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of 

the Work. 

1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or 

blocking, that tops of fasteners are flush with surface, and that installation is within flatness 

tolerances required for finished roofing installation. 

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely 

anchored, and that provision has been made for drainage, flashings, and penetrations 

through sheet metal roofing. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other 

adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks. 

B. Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to installation. Strip film 

carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces. 

C. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt 

sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer. 

D. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal 

joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint. 


A. General: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel 

manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions. 

Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and 

structural movement. 

B. Standing Seam Roof System: 

1. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and 

application indicated. 

2. Install roofing system clips and bearing plates to plywood substrate with approved 

fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to allow for thickness of 

insulations board. 

3. Mechanically fasten insulation board to plywood substrate with anchors and washers as 

recommended by insulation manufacturer with edges butted tightly in both directions. 

Anchor clips should protrude through insulation joints for anchoring of roof panels. 


07411 -3


4. Roofing Felt: Install felt underlayment over insulation board under sheet metal roofing. 

Use adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under 

sheet metal roofing. Apply over entire roof surface, in shingle fashion to shed water, with 

lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. 

5. Install roof flashing, trim and moldings securely to substrate. Seal joints and laps in 

components for water tight seal. Install metal flashing to lap over sheet metal roofing to 

allow moisture to run over and off the material. 

6. Install roof panels securely in place in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions 

with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 

C. Standing Seam Canopy End Panel System: 

1. Install roofing system clips and bearing plates to plywood substrate with approved 

fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

2. Roofing Felt: Install felt underlayment over plywood substrate under sheet metal roofing. 

Use adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under 

sheet metal roofing. Apply over entire vertical surface, in shingle fashion to shed water, 

with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. 

3. Install roof flashing, trim and moldings securely to substrate. Seal joints and laps in 

components for water tight seal. Install metal flashing to lap over sheet metal roofing to 

allow moisture to run over and off the material. 

4. Install roof panels securely in place in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions 

with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 


A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, 

excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and 

unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish. 

B. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary 

walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until 

completion of project. 

C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of Substantial 

Completion. 



07411 -4




SECTION 07424 - ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM 

A. Aluminum composite panels including related flashing and accessory components. 


A. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: Canopy framing and sheathing. 

B. Section 07260 – Air Barriers. 

C. Section 07620 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 

D. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers. 

D. Section 08310 – Access Doors and Panels: for access panel in entry soffit. 


A. System: Preformed and prefinished aluminum composite panel system with sub-girt 

framing/anchorage, clip angles fasteners and other accessories for secure anchorage to 

structural subframe installed using a rout and return wet joint system. 



1. ASTM B 209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 

2. ASTM C 920: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 

3. ASTM D 2244: Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally 

Measured Color Coordinates. 

4. ASTM D 4214: Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 

B. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA): 

1. AAMA 620: Voluntary Specification High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated 

Architectural Aluminum. 

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA). 

1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 


A. Manufacturer: Minimum 5 years of continuous experience manufacturing composite panels of 

the type specified, and capable of providing a list of 5 projects of comparable size. 

B. Fabricator/Installer: Certified by panel manufacturer, minimum 5 years of continuous experience 

fabricating and installing composite panels of the type specified. 

C. Take field measurements prior to completion of shop fabricate and finishing. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material 

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of 

composite panel and accessory. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate fabrication and installation layouts of composite panels; details of edge 

conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, 

closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish among factory, shop, and fieldassembled 

work. 

C. Warranties: Samples of special warranties. 

04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM 

07424 -1


1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Store and handle panels according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Deliver, composite panels, and other manufactured components so as not to be damaged or 

deformed. Package composite panels for protection during transportation and handling. 

C. Unload, store, and erect composite panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, 

and surface damage. 

D. Store metal-faced composite panels vertically, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated 

covering. Store composite panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. 

Do not store composite panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, 

or other surface damage. Do not allow storage space to exceed 120 deg F. 

E. Retain strippable protective covering on composite panel for period of panel installation. 

F. Protect installed panels from damage. Replace any panels damaged during storage and 

construction. 



conditions permit assembly of composite panels to be performed according to manufacturer's 

written instructions and warranty requirements. 

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by 

field measurements before composite panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop 

Drawings. 


A. Coordinate composite panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction 

of studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a watertight, secure, and noncorrosive 

installation. 

1.10 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace components of composite panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within 

specified warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. 

b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 

2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer 

agrees to repair finish or replace composite panels that show evidence of deterioration of 

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: 

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. 

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. 

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 

2. Finish Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion. 


07424 -2





1. Alcoa Architectural Products: Reynobond ACM. www.alcoaarchitecturalproducts.com 

2. Firestone Metal Products: Una-clad Series 1000UC Aluminum Composite Panel System. 

www.unaclad.com 

3. Mitsubishi Plastics Composites, Inc.: Alpolic Composite Metal Panels. 

www.alpolic-usa.com 


A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with 

temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required. 

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 

2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: 

a. Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. 3-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended 

metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color 

coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pre-treat, and apply coating to exposed metal 

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 

3. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored 

acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum 

total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 

B. Panel Sealants: 

1. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use 

classifications required to seal joints in composite panels and remain weathertight; and as 

recommended in writing by panel manufacturer. 

a. Sealant Color: Color to match panel color. 

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING 

A. Panel System Subgrits: Provide galvanized steel of gauge and spacing required for panel 

system structural requirements, as recommended by panel manufacture and in accordance with 

approved shop drawings. To avoid galvanic reaction, separate dissimilar metals. 

B. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, 

holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to 

substrates. 

2.04 COMPOSITE PANELS 

A. General: Provide factory-formed and assembled, aluminum faced composite panels fabricated 

from two metal facings bonded, using no glues or adhesives, to solid, extruded thermoplastic 

core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment system 

components and accessories required for weathertight system. 

B. Aluminum Composite Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet 

facings. 

1. Panel Thickness: 4 mm. 

2. Core: Standard. 

3. Exterior Finish: 3-coat Metallic fluoropolymer. 

4. Color: Una-Clad “Silver Metallic”. 

a. Comparable color from the other specified composite panel manufacturer’s with color 

samples approved by Architect. 


07424 -3



A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete composite panel 

assembly including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar 

items. Match material and finish of composite panels for exposed items. 

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and 

other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 

C. Flashing: Aluminum, same finish as for aluminum panel where exposed; secured with 

concealed fastening method. 


A. General: Fabricate and finish composite panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent 

possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles 

and with dimensional and structural requirements. 

B. Metal-Faced Composite Panels: Factory form panels in a continuous process with no glues or 

adhesives between dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no displacement 

of face sheets or protrusion of core material. 

1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp 

and buckle. 

2. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion 

of core material. 

3. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits, attached 

to back of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape. 

4. Dimensional Tolerances: 

a. Panel Bow: 0.8 percent maximum of panel length or width. 

b. Squareness: 0.25 inch (5 mm) maximum. 

C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in 

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and 

other characteristics of item indicated. 

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, 

and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded 

back to form hems. 

D. System Type: Rout and Return Wet Joint System. 

PART - 3 EXECUTION 



requirements for installation tolerances of composite panel supports, and other conditions 

affecting performance of the Work. 

1. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking 

and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by composite panel 

manufacturer. 

2. Verify that air barrier has been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air 

infiltration or water penetration. 

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating composite panels to verify actual 

locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of panels before panel installation. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


07424 -4



A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support 

members and anchorage according to composite panel manufacturer's written instructions and 

approved Shop Drawings. 


A. Attachment System Installation: Install attachment system required to support metal-faced 

composite panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including perimeter 

extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels. 

1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery, 

and panel-system joint seals. 

B. Install composite panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, 

and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to subgirts unless otherwise 

indicated. Anchor panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions 

for thermal and structural movement. 

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving composite panels. 

2. Flash and seal composite panels at perimeter of all openings. Do not begin installation until 

air barrier and flashings that will be concealed by panels are installed. 

3. Install flashing and trim as composite panel work proceeds. 

4. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating panels. 

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, 

protect against galvanic action as recommended by composite panel manufacturer. 

D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for 

weathertight performance of composite panel assemblies. 

1. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07900 Joint 

Sealers. 

E. Coordinate installation of composite panel system with installation of entry canopy access 

panel. Refer to Section 08310. 

3.04 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and 

provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 

1. Install components required for a complete composite panel assembly including trim, 

flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation 

instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners 

where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, 

and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool 

marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form 

hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and 

weather-resistant performance. 

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space 

movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner 

or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be 

sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked 

flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). 


07424 -5


3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES 

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align composite panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 

inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 

1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 

3.06 CLEANING 

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as composite panels are 

installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On 

completion of installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer. 

Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 

B. After composite panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, 

and sealant. 

C. Replace composite panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful 

repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 



07424 -6




SECTION 07535 - MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING 

A. Mechanically-attached single-ply roofing, insulation and accessories, installed in accordance 

with drawings and specifications approved by the roofing membrane manufacturer. 

B. Indicated on the drawings as: Membrane Roofing System. 


A. Section 05310 - Steel Deck. 

B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. 

C. Section 07212 – Board and Batt Insulation for roof insulation board. 


A. ASTM D 471 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Effect of Liquids. 

B. ASTM D 751 - Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics. 

C. ASTM D 1149 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration--Surface Ozone Cracking in a 

Chamber. 

D. ASTM D 1204 - Standard Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of Nonrigid 

Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated Temperature. 

E. ASTM D-2136 - Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics - Low-Temperature Bend Test. 

F. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation. 

G. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 



B. Certification: Manufacturer's written approval of this specification and of any proposed 

deviations from the specification or drawings or previously approved details. The 

manufacturer's approval does not constitute a waiver of the requirements of this specification or 

the drawings or approval of deviations not specifically itemized. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Roofing contractor certified by manufacturer. 

1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 

A. Deliver materials with packaging labels indicating appropriate warnings, storage conditions, lot 

numbers, and usage instructions. 

B. Store materials in their original undamaged packaging; maintain storage conditions in 

accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 

1.07 WARRANTY 

A. See Section 01700 - Execution Requirements, for additional warranty requirements. 

B. Provide manufacturer's standard "Total System" material and labor, 10-year warranty. 

04-27-11 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING 

07535 -1



2.01 MANUFACTURER 

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. 525 Morley Drive, Saginaw, MI 48601, 800- 

248-0280. www.duro-last.com 

2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM 

A. Duro-Last 5-Foot Tab, Mechanically-Attached. 

1. Classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Class A roofing material for use in 

construction of Class A roofing assemblies. 

2. Meet test requirements for FM Class 1A fire and I-60 wind resistance. 

B. Membrane: Scrim-reinforced, thermoplastic based sheet, bearing UL label on the packaging. 

1. Thickness: 0.40 inch, nominal, when measured in accordance with ASTM D 751. 

2. Sheet Length: As required to avoid end seams. 

3. Color: White. 

4. Breaking Strength: 350 lbf, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 751, Grab Method. 

5. Tear strength (ASTM D 751, Procedure B), 8 x 8 inch sample: 100 lbf. 

6. Brittleness test (ASTM D 2136, at minus 40 deg C): Pass. 

7. Dimensional stability, percent change max. (ASTM D 1204 B: 1 hr at 212 deg F, W: 6 hrs 

at 176 deg F): Plus/minus 0.1 percent. 

8. Water absorption (ASTM D 471) 158 degrees F for 7 days: Plus 1.0 percent maximum 

weight change 

9. Ozone resistance of reinforced membrane: No cracking when tested in accordance with 

ASTM D 1149, for 70 hr at 100 degrees F. 


A. Flashing: Same membrane as specified above. 

B. Bonding Adhesive: 

1. Contact cement to adhere membrane and flashings to various substrates e.g., insulation 

surfaces, masonry surfaces, plywood, concrete, or metal. 

2. It is not acceptable to use bonding adhesive in the seams. 

C. Perimeter Sheets: As specified in Part 3. 

D. Sealant: Use for water cut-off mastic, pitch-box sealer, and to seal membrane to metal. 

E. Cut-Edge Sealant: Use to seal exposed cut edges of reinforced membrane. 

F. Seam Cleaner: Use to remove contaminants from the surface of the membrane where hot-air 

welding is to occur. 

G. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board that is accepted and warranted in writing by membrane 

manufacturer for use in a mechanically attached system. Refer to Section 07212 for 

requirements. 

1. R-Value: 30. 

H. Mechanical Fasteners: Type and spacing as required by roofing manufacturer; supplied by 

roofing manufacturer. 

I. Two-Way Air Vents: Manufacturer's standard vents. 

J. For vent stacks, pipes, drains, and corners: Prefabricated pipe boots and inside and outside 

corners provided by manufacturer. 


07535 -2


K. Roof Walkway Pads: Duro-Last Roof Trak II Walkway Pad. Heat weld to membrane in 

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

1. Color: Gray. 


3.01 GENERAL 

A. Do not deviate from this specification without written approval of the manufacturer. Should 

deviations or changes occur without the manufacturer's approval, the project will not be eligible 

for warranty coverage. 


A. Verify that surfaces to be bonded to are dry, clean and free of debris. Suitable surfaces are 

smooth, solid masonry, wood, and metal, plus insulation board fastened to the specific 

manufacturer's recommendations for receiving mechanically fastened roofing membranes and 

accepted by roofing system manufacturer for mechanically fastened application. 

B. Verify that positive roof slope exists in all areas. 

C. Verify that rooftop mechanical units are to have their condensation lines piped to drains or off 

the roof. 

D. Verify that rooftop grease units will have approved grease containment systems or a regularly 

scheduled maintenance program. 

E. Correct unsuitable conditions before proceeding with installation. Commencing installation 

signifies acceptance by the installer of the substrate. 

3.03 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION 

A. Prior to the start of work, make the substrate smooth and free of debris, sharp edges, and other 

surface irregularities that will be detrimental to the installation. 

B. Correct unevenness and joint gaps greater than 1/4 inch in the membrane substrate as they can 

cause inconsistent membrane welds. When such conditions occur fill with appropriate and 

properly secured insulation or material approved by manufacturer's technical review 

department. 

C. Flashing Substrates: Verify that the substrate is smooth and free of sharp edges and other 

surface irregularities that will be detrimental to 100-percent adhesion of the flashing membrane. 

3.04 FASTENERS - GENERAL 

A. Install fasteners with a depth-sensing screw gun to prevent overdriving or underdriving, unless 

otherwise approved or required by project conditions. 

3.05 INSULATION INSTALLATION 

A. Handle and secure insulation boards so as to not damage or rupture the facer and surface. Cut 

out damaged areas and replace with structurally sound insulation, properly secured in place. 

B. Install boards with the longest dimension perpendicular to the direction of the membrane seams 

and with end joints staggered. Butt boards as closely as possible with no gaps over 1/4 inch. 

C. Mechanically attach boards: 

1. Use fastener pattern and spacing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

2. Provide additional fasteners as necessary to conform to the substrate surface geometry. 

D. Tapered Insulation: Install tapered boards under a layer of flat insulation boards; maintain 

smooth transition at changes of slope. 

1. Provide tapered insulation boards and thicknesses to create tapered areas as indicated on 

Roof Plan. 


07535 -3


E. Insulation must have and approved nonstyrene facer or provide a slip sheet between insulation 

and membrane. 

3.06 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 

A. Membrane Attachment: Space fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's standard and 

approved submittals. 

B. Perimeter Sheets: Install perimeter sheets and full-sheet in accordance with fastener pattern 

specified by manufacturer. Install fasteners along the edge of the membrane through the 

insulation, and into the roof deck. 

C. Field Sheets: 

1. Unroll membrane on the area to be covered. 

2. Install fasteners along the leading edge of the membrane, as illustrated in membrane 

manufacturer's details, through the insulation, and into the roof deck. 

3. Lap adjoining rolls of membrane over the fastened edge of the installed membrane by 6 

inches in accordance with standard details for fastener location and specific deck type 

penetration requirements. 

3.07 FASTENING PATTERNS 

A. Meet the requirements of the membrane manufacturer for fastener type, spacing and pattern. 

3.08 SEALING OF MEMBRANE 

A. Lap Splices: Overlap and hot-air weld membrane without any contaminants (adhesive, dirt, 

debris, etc.) in the seam. 

1. Automatic hot-air welder and hand-held welder. 

2. Use hand-held welders for small work and repairs. 

3. Use automatic hot-air welders for field seaming. 

4. Caulk cut edges by applying Cut-Edge Sealant from a squeeze bottle. 

B. Welding of Membrane After Exposure: 

1. Remove visible dirt and debris with a clean cloth and water. If necessary, use a detergent 

cleaner (e.g. Fantastik or 409) followed by a water rinse. 

2. With a clean scrub pad saturated with manufacturer recommended seam cleaner, 

aggressively agitate the seaming area. 

3. Follow the standard hot-air welding procedure with an approximate 20 percent reduction in 

speed. 

4. Final weld strength may not be achieved for several days. 

3.09 FLASHINGS, EXPANSION JOINTS, DRAINS, AND WALKWAYS 

A. Flashing: Flash perimeters as shown in manufacturer standard detail drawings. Do not cover 

weep holes or any form of through-wall drainage. 

1. Mechanically fasten all flashing at the top, under or through counter flashing, with approved 

fasteners and with an approved HT termination detail as shown in detail drawings. 

2. Install pipe flashings in accordance with membrane manufacturer's details. Do not flash to 

lead. 

B. Two-Way Air Vents: Install two-way air vents at a rate of one for every 1,000 square feet of 

deck. Install vents centered between rows of fastening tabs. 

C. Roof Drains: Install in accordance with membrane manufacturer's details. 

1. Properly secure all bolts to provide 100-percent continuous compression of the clamping 

ring. 

2. Do not run field seams through drains. 

3. Clean or replace existing drains as required to achieve manufacturer's recommended 

clamping detail; remove old lead and packings. 


07535 -4


D. Roof Walkway Pads: Install pads in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions. 

1. Prepare dirty or weathered membrane: 

a. Remove any visible dirt and debris with a clean rag and water. 

b. For heavily contaminated surface, scrubbing with a detergent cleaner (i.e. Fantastik or 

409) followed by a water rinse may be necessary. 

2. Install roof walkway pads forming a direct path, in lines parallel to the building faces, from 

the roof access hatch to each piece of rooftop mechanical equipment. 

3. Position walkway pad and cut to desired length. 

4. Whenever possible, do not cover membrane seams with walkway pad. When installed 

adjacent to a seam, keep the pad a minimum of 2 inches from the edge of the seam on the 

bottom sheet of the completed lap and a minimum of 6 inches from the edge of the seam 

when located on the top sheet of a completed lap. 

5. When covering seams is unavoidable, the lap seam should be completed in accordance 

with manufacturer's specifications and thoroughly probed with any deficiencies repaired 

prior to pad installation. 

6. In circumstances where drainage around the walkway pad is a concern, shorter walkway 

pad lengths spaced with a 2 inch gap may be desired. 

7. Weld perimeter of walkway pad to the membrane following standard welding procedures. 

Periodic breaks in the weld of 1 to 2 inches are required on the low slope edge of the pad 

to prevent the accumulation of water under the pad. 


A. Ensure that metal work shall be secured in a manner approved by roofing manufacturer, or in 

accordance with SMACNA guidelines, to prevent damage from buckling, or wind exposure. All 

metal work that is part of the waterproofing envelope shall be sealed, structurally sound, and 

appropriately anchored to prevent leakage. 

B. Tests: 

1. Seam Tests: Probe the entire lap edge of each seam with an approved seam probing tool 

(Sears cotter-pin extractor) after seam has cooled completely to verify seam consistency. 

Probing before the seam area has cooled will damage the membrane. 

2. Destructive Seam Tests: Test 3 inch wide area of seam weld to verify good peel strength. 

A properly welded seam will have membrane delamination from scrim prior to weld failure. 

Perform the following destructive tests on welds: 

a. First seam of each working day. 

b. First seam after the automatic hot-air welder has been allowed to cool down. 

c. After any extreme changes in weather conditions. 

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Upon completion of the installation, the manufacturer's 

representative shall make an inspection to ascertain that the roofing membrane system has 

been installed according to manufacturer's approved specifications and details. 

D. Warranty Inspection: Provide manufacturer's inspection for acceptance for warranty. 

E. Rejection of Defective Work: Areas having excessive patching as a result of damage to the 

membrane or faulty installation may be rejected by membrane manufacturer or the Architect; 

replace the membrane completely in these areas. 



07535 -5




SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 

A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including scuppers, flashings, counterflashings, reglets, gutters, 

downspouts, and coping caps. 

B. Miscellaneous flashing work not specified as work of other sections. 


A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Thru-wall masonry flashing. 

B. Section 07535 - Mechanically Attached Membrane Roofing: Roofing system. 

C. Section 07720 - Roof Accessories: Roof Hatch. 

D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 

E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings. 


A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for 

Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 

B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or 


C. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. 

D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning 

Contractors' National Association. 


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and 

standard details, except as otherwise indicated. 


A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope 

metal sheets to ensure drainage. 

B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. 

C. Protect pre-finished surfaces from damage. 


2.01 SHEET MATERIALS 

A. (SHT MET1) Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc 

coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. 

1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 

2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. 

2. Color: Color to match Una-Clad “Silver Metallic”. 

B. (SHT MET2) Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 

0.02 inch thick base metal. 

04-27-11 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 

07620 -1



A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. 

B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. 

C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc alkyd. 

D. Sealant: (SLNT6) specified in Section 07900. 

E. Bituminous Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. Verify compatibility with roofing membrane 

2.03 REGLETS 

A. Reglets: Recessed and surface mounted types for concrete and unit masonry applications; 26 

gauge galvanized steel. 

1. Recessed Reglet: Type MA reglet with Springlok Flashing. 

2. Surface Mounted Reglet: Type SM reglet with Springlok Flashing and 7/8” diameter, 

stainless steel washers with neoprene facing. 

B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product: 

1. Fry Reglet Corporation: Springlok Reglets and Flashing System. 


A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 

B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. 

C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. 

D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use 

sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. 

E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with 

sealant. 

F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form 

drip. 

G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. 

2.05 SCUPPER FABRICATION 

A. Scuppers: Fabricate to dimensions and configurations shown on the Drawings. 

B. Seal metal joints. 

2.06 MULTI-PIPE ROOF PENETRATIONS 

A. Fabricate hooded sheet metal enclosure at multiple roof penetrations. Do not use pitch pockets. 

1. Fabricate enclosure of proper size to accommodate pipes, insulation and necessary work 

clearances. 

2. Pipe penetrations shall be through the side of the exterior of the enclosure and shall occur 

a minimum of 8 inches above the roof membrane. 

3. Provide sloping sheet metal top on enclosure with hemmed drip edges on all sides and 

extended overhang a minimum of 6 inches on the side where pipe penetrations occur. 

4. Coordinate with Section 06100 for required curbing. 



A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets 

in place, and nailing strips located. 


07620 -2


B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 


A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. 

B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film 

thickness of 15 mil. 


A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where 

permitted. 

B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. 

C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines 

accurate to profiles. 

D. Seal metal joints watertight. 

3.04 SCHEDULE 

A. Scuppers and Downspouts: 20 gauge. 

B. Coping, Cap, Parapet, Sill and Ledge Flashings: 24 gauge. 

C. Counterflashing at Roofing Terminations (over roofing base flashings): 24 gauge. 

D. Counterflashing at Curb-Mounted Roof Items: 24 gauge. 

E. Hook strips and keepers: 22 gauge. 

F. Other sheet metal work: 24 gauge. 



07620 -3




SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES 

A. Roof hatches, ladder post and safety railing. 


A. Section 05310 - Steel Deck. 

B. Section 07535 – Mechanically Attached Membrane Roofing. 

C. Section 09900 – Painting and Coatings. 


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 

B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. 


2.01 ROOF HATCHES 

A. Manufacturers - Roof Hatches: Bilco Co.: www.bilco.com 

1. Product: Bilco Type S Roof Hatch. 

B. Roof Hatch: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release 

hardware. 

1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting conditions indicated on the 

drawings. 

3. Size(s): 

a. For Ladder Access: Single leaf; 2’-6” x 3’-0”. 

C. Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings; 

extended bottom flange to suit mounting. 

1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick. 

2. Finish: Factory prime paint. 

3. Insulation: 1 inch rigid fiber board, located on outside face of curb. 

4. Curb Height: 12 inches from finished surface of roof, minimum. 

D. Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction. 

1. Capable of supporting 40 psf live load. 

2. Material: G-90, galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick, liner 22 gage, 

0.03 inch thick. 

3. Finish: Factory prime paint. 

4. Insulation: Concealed 1 inch rigid glass fiber. 

5. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter. 

E. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by 

manufacturer. 

1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that 

automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load. 

2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type. 

3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release. 

4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release. 

5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior. 

6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior. 

04-27-11 ROOF ACCESSORIES 

07720 -1


F. Telescoping Safety Post: 

1. Bilco, LadderUp telescoping safety post. Bilco Model LU-1, steel with black powder coat 

finish. 

G. Safety Railing: Bilco Model Bil-Guard Hatch Railing System., OSHA approved, mounted on 

side and front of hatch curb. 




B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory 

preparation before proceeding. 


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather 

integrity. 

B. Finished installation shall meet approval of roofing installer. 


04-27-11 ROOF ACCESSORIES 

07720 -2


SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS 



A. Sealants and joint backing. 


A. Section 07260 - Air Barriers. 

B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 

C. Section 07535 - Mechanically Attached Membrane Roofing: Sealants required in conjunction 

with roofing. 

D. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. 


A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. 

B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 

C. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 

D. ASTM C 1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid 

Applied Sealants. 

E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; www.aqmd.gov. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in 

this section with minimum three years documented experience. 

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with 

minimum three years experience. 


A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after 

installation. 


A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. 

1.07 WARRANTY 


B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. 

C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight 

seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. 

04-27-11 JOINT SEALERS 

07900 -1




A. Silicone Sealants: 

1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com 

2. Dow Corning Corp: www.dowcorning.com 

3. GE Plastics: www.geplastics.com 

4. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com 


B. Polyurethane Sealants: 



3. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.chemrex.com 

4. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com 


C. Butyl Sealants: 





D. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants: 



3. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.chemrex.com 



2.02 SEALANTS 

A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound 

(VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management 

District Rule No.1168. 

B. (SLNT1) General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, 

Uses M, G, and A; single component. 

1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 

2. Applications: Use for: 

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. 

b. Joints between concrete and other materials. 

c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. 

d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. 

C. (SLNT2) General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, 

Grade NF single component, paintable. 


a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. 

b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. 

c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. 


07900 -2


D. (SLNT3) Sanitary/Tile Sealant: ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component silicone, 

mildew resistant. 

1. Color: White, Black and Clear. 


a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces, White. 

b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces, Clear. 

c. Control joints in tile installations in toilet rooms and kitchen, Black. 

E. (SLNT4) Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25, 

Uses T, I, M and A; single component. 


a. Joints in concrete sidewalks and vehicular paving. 

F. (SLNT5) Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single 

component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging. 


a. Seam sealant for masonry flashing. 

b. Bedding sealant for thresholds and sills. 

G. (SLNT6) Low Modulus Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, 

M, O; single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, nonbleeding. 

1. Color: Clear. 

2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 

3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 

4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. 


a. Air barrier perimeter. 

b. Exterior sheet metal joints. 

H. (SLNT7) Ultra-Low Modulus Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, 

Class 100/50, for Use NT, Silicone rubber based, 1 part neutral cure elastomeric sealant. 

1. Color: To match EIFS. 

2. Movement Capability: Plus 100 percent to minus 50 percent movement. 

3. Accepable Manufacturers and Products: 

a. Dow Corning Corporation: 790 Building Sealant. 

b. General Electric Company: GE SilPruf 

c. Tremco Construction Division: Spectrem 1. 


a. Perimeter and internal joints in EIFS System. 

2.03 JOINT SEALANT BACKING 

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint 

substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated 

by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 

B. Sealant Backer Rod: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of 

size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant 

performance. 

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant 

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint 

surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 


07900 -3



A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; 

compatible with joint forming materials. 



A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 

B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 


A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. 

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. 

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 


A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of 

surfaces and material installation instructions. 

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. 

C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck 

dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific 

dimensions are indicated. 

D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. 

E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. 

F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when 

sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. 

G. Tool joints concave. 

3.04 CLEANING 

A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 


A. Protect sealants until cured. 



07900 -4


SECTION 08110 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 



A. Non-fire rated steel doors and frames. 


A. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. 

B. Section 08380 - Traffic Doors. 

C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. 


A. ANSI A250.6 - Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement--Application). 

B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 

C. ANSI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 

D. ASTM A 366/A 366M - Standard Specification for Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon, (0.15 

Maximum Percent) Cold-Rolled. 

E. ASTM A 569/A 569M - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot- 

Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial. 

F. ASTM A 591/A 591M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light 

Coating Weight (Mass) Applications. 

G. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or 


H. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, 

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 

I. ASTM A 1011/A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, 

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 

J. ASTM C 1036-01: Specification for Flat Glass. 

K. DHI A115.1G - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute. 

L. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association. 

M. SDI 105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel frames; Steel Door Institute. 

N. SDI 113 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Apparent Thermal Performance of Steel 

Door and Frame Assemblies; Steel Door Institute. 



B. Door and Frame Schedule: Prepared by the Door and Frame Supplier, indicating a listing of 

each hollow metal door and frame component for each door opening. Schedule includes frame 

size, throat dimension, door size and type. 

1. Organization: Door and Frame Schedule to be organized to follow the same numbering 

order as Door Schedule on Drawings. 

2. Door and Frame Schedule to be coordinated with Hardware Schedule for Hollow Metal 

Doors and Frames. 

04-27-11 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 

08110 -1



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all products from a single manufacturer who is a member 

of the Steel Door Institute. 

B. Manufacture products only after receipt of approved hardware schedule and templates. 


A. Upon delivery, inspect all materials for damage; notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. 

B. Protect products from moisture, construction traffic, and damage. 

C. Store vertically under cover. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters. Should 

wrappers become wet, remove immediately. 

D. Place units on 4 inch high wood sills or in a manner that will prevent rust or damage. Provide 

1/4 inch space between doors to promote air circulation. 


2.01 DOOR AND FRAME SUPPLIER 

A. Hollow metal doors and frames are to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin City 

Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package. 


Twin City Hardware Company 

723 Hadley Avenue North 

Oakdale, MN 55128 

651-735-2200 

A. Ingersoll Rand, Steelcraft. 


A. Steel Sheet for Doors and Frames: 

1. Cold rolled steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS. 

2. Hot rolled steel: Pickled and oiled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Designation CS Type B. 

3. Galvanized steel: Hot-dipped, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60/Z180 coating, minimum. 

B. Steel Sheet for Anchors and Accessories: Electrolytically deposited zinc coated steel; ASTM A 

591/A 591M, coating 40Z (12G), minimum. 

C. Accessory Materials: 

1. Rubber Door Silencers: Furnish three at each single leaf door frames and two at each pairs 

of doors. 

D. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08800 Glazing. 

2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 

A. General: Comply with requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.8. 

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricate frames from metallic-coated steel sheet assembled with a 

mechanical interlock joint, face miter seam “closed and tight”. Weld face seam and full web of 

frame (T-3). Grind and dress smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area. 

1. Sheet Thickness: 14 gauge. 

2. Material and Finish: Zinc-alloy-iron coating (galvannealed) to a minimum coating weight of 

A60 to comply with ASTM A 653. 

3. Galvanize internal members and reinforcements. 


08110 -2


C. Interior Frames: Fabricate from cold rolled steel sheet assembled with a mechanical interlock 

joint, face miter seam “closed and tight”. Weld face seam of frame (T-2). Grind and dress 

smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area. 


D. Traffic Doors Frames: Fabricate from cold rolled steel sheet assembled with a mechanical 

interlock joint, face miter seam “closed and tight”. Weld face seam of frame (T-2). Grind and 

dress smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area. 


2. Configuration: Fabricate without stop and with added reinforcement for traffic door 

hardware. 

E. Frame Finish: Shop prime for field painting under Section 09900. 

F. Finished work to be smooth and free from warps and buckles. 

G. Silencers: Glynn-Johnson, 64 Silencer. Furnish 3 at single door strike jambs, 2 at head of pair 

doors. 

H. Provide floor clips for frames. Provide jamb anchors spaced not over 30" on center for frames. 

Furnish temporary spreader bars and bracing. 

2.05 HOLLOW METAL DOORS 

A. Exterior Flush Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level III, Model 2,Extra Heavy 

Duty, seamless design, Full Flush Door. 

1. Face Sheet Thickness: 16 gauge. 

2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inch. 

3. Core: Polystyrene. 

Note: Provide Polystyrene core for exterior doors and Mechanical Room door, (Type 6). 

5. Fabricate with watertight top closure and construct to receive weatherstripping as specified 

under Section 08700. 

6. Material and Finish: Zinc-alloy-iron coating (galvannealed) to a minimum coating weight of 

A60 to comply with ASTM A 653. Shop prime for field painting under Section 09900. 

B. Interior Flush Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level II, Model 2, Heavy Duty, 

seamless design, Full Flush Doors. 

1. Face Sheet: 16 gauge. 

2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inch. 

3. Core: Impregnated kraft honeycomb core. 

4. Material and Finish: Cold rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008. Shop prime for 

field painting under Section 09900. 

5. Glazing Stops: Construct removable glazing stops of 16 gauge steel. Factory fit and install 

stops. Form neat hairline joints. Install stops using screws not over 16" on center with at 

least two screws per piece. 

2.06 LOUVERS 

A. Metal Louvers: Provide manufacturers standard 12” high by 18” wide metal louver in Office 

door, in location as indicated on Drawings. 

1. Shop prime louver for field painting under Section 09900. 

2.07 GLAZING 

A (GL5): One-Way Mirror Glass 1/4 inch thick; ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 2, q3 quality, Style B, 

clear tempered glass with a reflective coating one side. 

1. Provide glass for Office door in location as indicated on Drawings. 


08110 -3




A. Verify that project conditions are suitable before beginning installation of frames. 

B. Correct unsatisfactory condition before preceding with installation. 


A. Install frames plumb, level, rigid, and in true alignment as recommended in ANSI A250.11 and 

DHI A115.1G. 

B. Install doors plumb and in true alignment and fasten to achieve the maximum operational 

effectiveness and appearance of the unit. Maintain clearances specified in ANSI A250.8 and 

NFPA 80 whichever is more restrictive. 

C. Fill welded wrap-around frames in masonry construction with grout as masonry is laid-up. 

Brace or fasten frame in such a way to prevent pressure of the grout from deforming frame. 

1. Mix grout to provide 4 inch maximum consistency and hand trowel into place. 

2. Do not use grout mixed to thin "pumpable" consistency. 

D. If additives are used in masonry or plaster work during cold weather, field coat the inside of 

steel frames with a bituminous compound to prevent corrosion. 

E. Install doors plumb and in true alignment and fasten to achieve the maximum operational 

effectiveness and appearance of the unit. Maintain clearances specified. Shim as indicated in 

DHI A115.1G and SDI 122. 

F. Install hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's recommendations and templates. 

Consult DHI A115.1G and ANSI A250.6 as necessary. 

G. Install door silencers shortly before substantial completion. 

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN 

A. Adjust doors for proper operation, free from binding or other defects. 

B. Clean and restore soiled surfaces. Remove scraps and debris, and leave site and a clean 

condition. 



08110 -4


SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 



A. Flush wood doors; non-rated. 


A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. 

B. Section 08110 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 

C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. 

D. Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings: for field finishing of doors. 


A. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural 

Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada. 

B. ANSI A208.1: Particleboard. 

C. DHI-A115-W: Wood Door Hardware Standards, Hardware Preparation. 

D. DHI-WDHS-3: Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors. 


A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. 

B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and 

characteristics. 

C. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts 

required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory 

finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing. 


A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, 

Section 1300, Custom Grade. 

B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section 

with minimum three years of documented experience. 


A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. 

B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. 

C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or 

wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with 

tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 


A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weather 

tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining 

ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the 

construction period. 

04-27-11 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 

08211 -1


1.08 WARRANTY 

A. See Section 01700 - Execution Requirements for additional warranty requirements. 

B. Provide warranty for the following term: 

1. Interior Doors: Life of installation. 

C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, 

defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. 


2.01 WOOD DOOR SUPPLIER 

A. Wood doors are to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin City Hardware as part 

of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package. 





651-735-2200 

A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 

1. Lynden Door Inc: www.lyndendoor.com 

2.03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL 

A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 

B. Particleboard-Core Doors: 

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no ureaformaldehyde 

resin. 

2.04 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 

A. (Wood Doors): Interior 1-3/4” Solid-Core Doors: 

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 

2. Species: Select White Maple. 

3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 

4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 

5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 

6. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces. 

7. Core: Particleboard. 

8. Construction: 5 or 7 ply. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive 

planed before veneering. 

2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION 

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. 

B. Cores Constructed with Stiles and Rails: Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware 

reinforcement. 

C. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. 

D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with 

hardware requirements and dimensions. 

E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge 

clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. Doors to be field finished. 


08211 -2


F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1700. 

2.06 FIELD FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS 

A. Refer to Section 09900 for field finishing of wood doors. 



A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. 

B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 

C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or 

alignment. 


A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 

B. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges a maximum of 3/4 of an inch (19 mm). 

C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. 

D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. 

3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES 

A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. 

B. Conform to specified quality standard for maximum diagonal distortion. 

C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to 

bottom, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. 

D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to 

edge, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. 


A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. 

B. Adjust closers for full closure. 



08211 -3


SECTION 08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 



A. Access panel and frame units, non-fire-rated, in ceiling and soffit locations. 


A. Section 07424 - Aluminum Composite Panel System. 

B. Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation Finish System: Openings in exterior EIFS surfaces. 

C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings in drywall ceilings and walls. 

D. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish. 



A. Access Panel Manufacturers: 

1. Milcor Inc: www.milcorinc.com. 

2. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com 

3. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com 


2.02 ACCESS PANEL UNITS 

A. (AP) Access Panels: 

1. Milcor Style DW with drywall flange. 

2. Milcor Style K with plaster type flange for EIFS. 

3. Milcor Style ME with exposed flange. 

4. Comparable products from the other specified manufacturers. 

B. Sizes: As indicated on the drawings. 

C. Hardware: 

1. Hinge: 175 degree stainless steel piano hinge with removable pin. 

2. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock. 

D. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard prime coat, to be field painted under Section 09900. 

2.03 ACCESS PANEL AT ENTRY CANOPY 

A. (AP) Entry Canopy Access Panel: Steel access panel with 1 inch deep recessed door for 

installation in ceiling of entry canopy. Door panel infill to be plywood filler and aluminum 

composite panel to match finish of canopy. 

1. Acudor Model No. AT-5020. 

2. Milcor Model No. 3205-030. 

B. Sizes: 24 inch x 24 inch. 

C. Hardware: 

1. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock. 

D. Finish: 

1. Galvanized, hot dipped finish. 


A. Weld, fill, and grind joints to ensure flush and square unit. 

04-27-11 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 

08310 -1




A. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. 


A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place. 

C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. 

D. Provide shimming as necessary so that plaster screed is positioned to match thickness of 

surrounding finish system. 

E. Installation of surface mounted wall unit through adhered roofing membrane: Set flange in 

continuous sealant. Provide weatherstrip on all edges and aluminum rain drip applied to top 

edge. 

F. Installation of panels in EIFS as applicable: Install prior to finish coat of EIFS. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ENTRY CANOPY ACCESS PANEL 

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Securely fasten access panel in wood frame opening. Set frame at height so that aluminum 

composite panel infill will be flush with finished composite panel system of canopy. 

C. Adhesively apply backer sheet of plywood and composite panel sheet in door recess. 

Composite panel should set flush with canopy finish. 

D. Coordinate installation of access panel with installation of composite panel system. Refer to 

Section 07424 Aluminum Composite Panel System for specific panel system installed at 

canopy. 


04-27-11 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 

08310 -2


SECTION 08380 - TRAFFIC DOORS 



A. Double-acting, self-closing traffic doors. 


A. Section 08110 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Traffic door frames. 


2.01 TRAFFIC DOOR SUPPLIER 

A. Traffic Doors in this section to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin City 

Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package. 





651-735-2200 

A. Chase Industries, Inc., 800-543-4455, www.chasedoors.com. 

2.03 TRAFFIC DOORS 

A. (TD) Traffic Door: Chase Model # SC-3018 solid core traffic door. 

1. Core: 3/4” thick, 7-ply plywood. 

2. Door Faces: Plastic laminate. 

a. Black: Formica Black 909-58, Dining/Public side of door. 

b. White: Formica White 949-58, Kitchen side of door. 

3. Hardware: Chase “E” series stainless steel adjustable gravity close hardware system. 

4. Vision Panel: 9 x 14 inches, clear acrylic glazing with black rubber molding. Center window 

at 60” above floor. 

5. Impact Plates: 18” high, 18ga stainless steel impact plates both sides of door. Impact 

plates to set flush with door edge trim. 

6. Edge Trim: 18ga stainless steel channel edge trim, all sides of door. 



A. Verify that door frames are plumb, secured to substrate and ready for installation of door. 


A. Install traffic doors with necessary hardware and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's 

written installation instructions. 

B. Install doors plumb and level and properly aligned in door frame. 


A. Lubricate and adjust doors for smooth operation and proper closing. 


04-27-11 TRAFFIC DOORS 

08380 -1




A. Aluminum storefront framing. 

B. Aluminum window framing. 

C. Aluminum doors and frames. 

SECTION 08410 – METAL FRAMED STOREFRONTS 

D. Door hardware for aluminum doors less cylinders. 


A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. 

B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: for additional hardware items provided under Owner’s Door 

and Hardware Package. 

C. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 


A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American 

Architectural Manufacturers Association. 

B. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 

C. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 

[Metric]. 

D. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, 

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 

E. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, 

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]. 

F. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior 

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the 

Specimen. 

G. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, 

Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 

H. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, 

Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 

I. BHMA A 156 – Standards for Builders Hardware. 

J. SSPC-Paint 12: Paint Specification No. 12: Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film). 


A. General Performance: Design and construct framing systems and associated systems to 

comply with performance requirements specified and applicable building code requirements for 

this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects 

in construction. 

B. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or 

permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design 

wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 

1. Positive Design Wind Load: 25 lbf/sq ft. 

2. Negative Design Wind Load: 25 lbf/sq ft. 

04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 

08410 -1


3. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with 

full recovery of glazing materials. 

C. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection 

of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 

D. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, 

measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in 

accordance with ASTM E 283. 

E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure 

difference of 2.86 lbf/sq ft. 

F. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any 

water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture 

occurring within system. 

G. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, 

primarily in line with inside pane of glass and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing 

compound. 

H. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components 

caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F. over a 12 hour period without causing 

detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 

1. Estimated spacing of vertical mullion movement joints: 20 feet. 



B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, 

specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation 

procedures. 

C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's 

name and registered with manufacturer. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems 

with minimum five years of documented experience. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized installers who are trained and approved for 

installation of the following systems required for this Project. 


A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. 

B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed 

coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 


A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this 

minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 

1.09 WARRANTY 


B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. 

C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. 

Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. 


08410 -2





1. Vistawall Architectural Products; Series 3000T: www.vistawall.com 

2. Kawneer North America; Product Trifab 451/451T: www.kawneer.com 

3. United States Aluminum Corp; FT451: www.usalum.com 


A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 

B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B209M). 

C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 

D. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members. 

E. Perimeter Sealant: Type A specified in Section 07900. 

F. Glass: As specified in Section 08800. 

G. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration 

requirements. 

H. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08800. 

I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 

2.03 ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEM 

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded or formed aluminum framing members of 

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 

3. Glazing Plane: Center glazed to accept 1/4" and 1” insulated glass. 

4. Profile: 2” x 4-1/2”. 

5. Finish: Clear Anodized Finish; AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I. 

2.04 ALUMINUM SWING DOORS 

A. Exterior Doors: Nominal 2” deep, medium stile aluminum doors, with 3/16” wall thickness and 

nominal 3-1/2" wide stiles, 6" nominal top rail and actual 10" high bottom rail. Door units to be 

fabricated complete with hardware as indicated in Hardware Schedule. 

1. Doors to be glazed with the following glass units: Refer to Section 08800 for glass units. 

a. 1/4 inch clear tempered glass units, (GL1), in interior doors. 

b. 1 inch insulated, clear glass units, (GL2), in exterior doors and transom. 

2. Glazing Stops: Non-removable from the exterior side, snap-in type, square, extruded 

aluminum sections with vinyl or neoprene glazing inserts. Form neat hairline joints. 

3. Finish: Same as storefront. 

B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 

1. Vistawall Architectural Products; MS-375 Rugged Medium Stile Door. 

2. Kawneer North America; 350 Heavy Wall Door. 

3. United States Aluminum Corp; Durafront Series 800 Medium Stile Door. 

2.05 DOOR HARDWARE 

A. Refer to Hardware Schedule at the end of this section. 


08410 -3


B. Hinges: BHMA 156.1, butt type, ball bearing, non-removable pin on exterior outswinging doors. 

1. Hinge Size: 2 inch doors / 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches. 

2. Finish: US26D for interior doors and US32D for exterior doors. 

C. Exit Devices: BMHA 156.3, Grade 1. 

1. Provide on exterior pairs of doors. 

2. Keyed lock cylinder on outside of door by Section 08710. 

3. Keyed dogging cylinders by Section 08710. 

3. Finish: US26D. 

4. Manufacturer: Von Duprin 99 Series with concealed vertical rods. 

D. Push/Pull Set: BHMA 156.6. 

1. Provide on each interior door and provide pull on exterior of exterior pair of doors. 


3. Note: Coordinate and match Pull design on projects that have existing mall hardware 

design and finish. 

E. Closers: Universal mounting and multi-sized modern surface type with full cover, sized for 

individual door sizes and locations, (unless other types are required by special conditions. 

1. Provide 110 degree arm. 

2. Provide with cushion stop for exterior doors. 

3. Finish: AL. 

F. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all exterior doors. 


G. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, of neoprene; provide on all exterior doors. 


H. Threshold: ADA compliant extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; 

provide on all exterior doors. 



A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of 

assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. 

B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. 

C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. 

D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar 

metals with bituminous paint. 

E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. 

F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware. 

G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. 

H. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 

1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in 

completed assemblies, including joint edges. 



A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. 

B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of 

this section. 


08410 -4



A. Install framing system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and 

other irregularities. 

C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. 

D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional 

tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. 

E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. 

F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. 

G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. 

H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal 

barrier. 

I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. 

J. Install operable door units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust 

weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation. 

K. Install hardware using templates provided. 

L. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, using glazing method required to achieve 

performance criteria. 

M. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900. 

N. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be 

satisfactorily repaired. 

O. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact 

surfaces with bituminous paint. 


A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, 

whichever is less. 

B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 


A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 

3.05 CLEANING 

A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. 

B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean 

wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. 

C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 


08410 -5


3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 


3 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB or Comparable 

2 Pull 535B 8” CTC Hiawatha 

2 Push Bar 1081 LBP Hiawatha 

2 Closer 1461 x 110 degree LCN 

Refer to Section 08710 – Door Hardware for Balance of Hardware for Group 1 provided 

by Hardware Supplier. Floor Stops. 

GROUP 2: Exterior Entry and Dining “B” (Patio) Doors – Door No.s 01 and 15 

3 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB or Comparable 

1 Exit Device CD3347NL (Concealed Vertical Rods) Von Duprin 

1 Exit Device CD3347EO(Concealed Vertical Rods) Von Duprin 

2 Offset Pull 658 8” CTC Hiawatha 

2 Closer 1461 x cush arm stop x 110 degree LCN 

1 set Weatherstrip Reese 

2 Door Sweep 323 x 36” Reese 

1 Threshold S245A x 72” Reese 


by Hardware Supplier. Cylinders and Floor Stops. 

GROUP 14: Bar (Patio) Door – Door No. 19 

1-1/2 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB or Comparable 

1 Exit Device CD33EO Von Duprin 

1 Pull 535B 8” CTC Hiawatha 

1 Closer 1461 x cush arm stop x 110 degree LCN 

1 set Weatherstrip Reese 

1 Door Sweep 323 x 36” Reese 



by Hardware Supplier. Cylinder and Floor Stop. 



08410 -6


SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE 



A. Commercial door hardware furnished by General Contractor from Owner’s Door and Hardware 

Supplier. 

B. Aluminum Door Hardware: Hardware for manual aluminum doors, except cylinders and door 

stops, are furnished and installed under Section 08410. Installation of cylinders and door stops 

under the work of this Section. 

C. Installation of Owner Furnished construction and permanent cores. 

D. Installation of hardware components. 


A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Custom Fabricated Gates. 

B. Section 08110 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 

C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. 

D. Section 08410 - Metal-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for aluminum doors. 

1.03 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS 

A. Owner Furnished Cores and Keys: Construction and permanent interchangeable cores and 

keys will be provided By Owner for installation by General Contractor. 

1. Coordinate delivery of cores to project site with Owner. 

B. Padlocks: Owner will provide padlocks for gates, coolers and roof hatch. 


A. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI) and Builders Hardware Manufacturers 

Association: 

1. ANSI/BHMA A156, Door Hardware Standards. 

2. ICC/ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 

B. Door and Hardware Institute, (DHI). 

C. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA): 

1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 

2. NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Fire Windows. 

3. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 

4. NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 

D. Underwriters Laboratories, (UL): 

1. UL, "Building Materials Directory". 



B. Hardware Schedule: Prepared by the Hardware Supplier, indicating a listing of each hardware 

component for each door opening. 

1. Organization: Hardware Schedule to be organized to follow the same numbering order as 

Door Schedule on Drawings. 

2. Hardware schedule to be coordinated with Door and Frame Schedule for Hollow Metal 

Doors and Frames and Wood Doors. 

04-27-11 DOOR HARDWARE 

08710 -1



A. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door 

hardware. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Workers trained and approved to install commercial door hardware and 

electrified door hardware as required. 

C. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. Comply with accessibility requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), 

"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" and ANSI A117.1. 

2. Comply with NFPA 101 for means of egress doors. 

3. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a 

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 

that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 


A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to 

match hardware schedule. 

1. Include basic installation instructions, mounting diagram and applicable wiring diagrams. 

B. Inventory door hardware on receipt at project site and provide secure lock-up for door hardware 

delivered to Project site. 


A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of 

internal reinforcement for door hardware. 

B. Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory 

prepared for installing door hardware. 

C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware 

with connections as required. 

D. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work. 


2.01 HARDWARE SUPPLIER 

A. Hardware components in this section are to be furnished by the General Contactor through 

Twin City Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package. 




651-735-2200 

2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL 

A. Door hardware for each door to comply with requirements of this section and door Hardware 

Groups indicated in Part 3, Hardware Schedule. 

B. Provide hardware components that are new, free from scratches, mars and other defects. 

Furnish hardware complete with accessories of proper size and design required for the purpose 

intended, including screws, shields, and other anchorage devices necessary for complete 

installation. 


08710 -2


2.03 DOOR HARDWARE COMPONENTS AND FINISHES 

A. Hinges: BHMA 156.1, butt type, ball bearing, non-removable pin on exterior outswinging doors. 

1. Manufacturer: PBB. 

2. Hinge Size: 1-3/4 inch doors / 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches. 

3. Spring Hinge: Self-closing hinges, BHMA 156.17, 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches. 

4. Finish: US26D for interior doors and US32D for exterior doors. 

B. Lock and Latch Sets: Cylindrical Locks, BHMA A156.2, Grade 1, prepared to accept “Insta-Key” 

interchangeable cores. 

1. Manufacturer: Schlage; ND Series. 

2. Lever Handle Trim Design: Schlage “Rhodes”. 


4. Manufacturer: Schlage; AL Series. 

5. Lever Handle Trim Design: Schlage “Saturn”. 


C. Cylinders: BHMA 156.2, Grade 1, prepared to accept “Insta-Key” interchangeable cores. 

1. Manufacturer: Schlage. 


D. Exit Alarm Locks: BMHA 156.3, Grade 1. 

1. Manufacturer: Von Duprin; Guard – X, Series 2670. 

2. Finish: US28. 

E. Panic Exit Devices: BMHA 156.3, Grade 1. Rim exit device with exit alarm, weatherized. 

1. Manufacturer: Detex; Value Series, V40. 

2. Finish: Black Anodized Aluminum. 

F. Push/Pull Sets: BHMA 156.6. 

1. Manufacturer: Hiawatha. 


G. Closers: Universal mounting and multi-sized modern surface type with full cover, sized for 

individual door sizes and locations, (unless other types are required by special conditions. 

1. Manufacturer: LCN. 

2. Provide 110 degree arm. 

3. Provide with cushion stop for exterior doors. 


5. Maximum force to operate doors shall not exceed 8.5 pounds for exterior doors and 5 

pounds for interior doors. Fire rated doors to be set to minimum operating force to allow 

positive latching when closed. 

H. Flush Bolts: BHMA 156.16, manual flush bolt, 12 inch long rod length. 

1. Manufacturer: Ives. 


I. Double Coat Hooks: Brushed aluminum double wardrobe hook. 


2. Finish: US92, aluminum clear coated. 

J. Hinge Pin Stops: 


2. Finish: US15, satin nickel plated. 

K. Wall Stops: Concave design, with dry wall anchor. 

1. Manufacturer: Don-Jo Manufacturing. 



08710 -3


L. Floor Stops: 


2.. Models: 

a. 446PA28, US28, Aluminum. 

b. FS18S, no finish. 

M. Door Viewers: Solid Brass one way viewers. 



N. Kick Plates/Armor Plates: BHMA 156.6, 0.050" thick, BHMA 630, Type 304 stainless steel 

plates. 

1. Manufacturer: Hiawatha. 


O. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors. 

1. Manufacturer: Reese. 


P. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, of neoprene; provide on all exterior doors. 



Q. Thresholds: ADA compliant extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; 

provide on all exterior doors. 

1. Manufacturer: Reese/Hiawatha. 


R. Rain Drips: Mill aluminum drip cap continuous over full width of door frame head with 2-1/2” 

projection. 



2.04 DOOR SIGNAGE 

A. Special Signage: When required, provide vinyl self-adhesive signage reading, "NOT AN EXIT". 

Font shall be non-serif, 2 inches minimum in height, red letters on white background. Comply 

with the requirements of the local code authority. 

2.05 KEYING 

A. Door Locks: Master keyed. 

1. Include construction keying. 

B. Supply keys in the following quantities: 

1. Six master keys. 

2. Two construction keys. 

3. Two change keys for each lock. 

4. Two removable core control keys. 



A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on 

mounting diagrams. 

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct 

characteristics. 


08710 -4



A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. 

B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. 

C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As 

recommended by the Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association and DHI. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE 

A. Install hardware according to hardware supplier’s written installation instructions, mounting 

drawings and wiring diagrams included in hardware packages using experienced personnel. 

Maintain fire rating on labeled openings as applicable. 

B. Completely fit hardware before final coat of paint or other finish is applied, and then remove until 

final finish coat is applied. Perform mortises and cutting neatly, and conceal evidence of cutting 

in finished work. Permanently install hardware after finishing operations are complete and dry. 

Protect from scratching or other damage. 

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper 

operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as 

intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and 

ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. 

C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. 


A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without 

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 


2 Floor Stops 446FS28 Ives 

Refer to Section 08410 – Metal Framed Storefronts for Balance of Hardware for Group 1 

provided by Storefront Manufacturer. 

GROUP 2: Exterior Entry and Dining “B” (Patio) Doors – Door Nos. 01 and 15 

1 Rim Cylinder Schlage 

2 Mortise Cylinders for cylinder dogging Schlage 

2 Floor Stops 446FS28 Ives 




08710 -5


GROUP 3: Restroom Doors – Door Nos. 03 and 07 

1-1/2 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB 

1 Pull/Plate 535B 8” CTC x 200D 3.5” x 15” Hiawatha 

1 Push Plate 200F 4” x 16” Hiawatha 

1 Closer 1461 x hold open x 110 degree LCN 

1 Kick Plate B3E 10” x 34” Hiawatha 

1 Wall Stop 1407 DON 

GROUP 4: Office – Door No. 10 


1 Lockset ND80BD Rhodes x less core Schlage 

I/C core by Owner 




1 Security Window 10” x 10” in door AIR 

1 Metal Louver 18” x 12” in door AIR 

GROUP 5: Family Restroom – Door No. 20 

1-1/2 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB 

1 Lockset N40 Rhodes x privacy Schlage 

1 Closer 1461 x Hold Open x 110-degree NCN 


3 Silencer Rubber Door Silencer Q146-2500 STL 

1 Kick Plate 10” x 34” x 0.050” B3E Hiawatha 

GROUP 6: Exterior Service Doors - Door Nos. 11 and 14 

1-1/2 pair Hinges 4B51 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB 

1 Exit Alarm Lock 2670 x less core Von Duprin 

1 Rim Cylinder 80-129 Schlage 

1 Closer 1461 Cush x 110 degree LCN 

1 Viewer 698B Ives 

1 Armor Plate KP 36” x 40” Hiawatha 

1 set Weatherstrip DS75 x 4070 Reese 

1 Door Sweep 377A x 42” Reese 


1 Rain Drip R201A x 46” Reese 

GROUP 7: Restroom Stall Doors – Door Nos. 4, 5, 6, and 8 

1 Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB 

2 Spring Hinge SP81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB 

1 Latchset AL40 Saturn x Privacy Schlage 

2 Hinge Pin Stop 69F15 Ives 


1 Dbl. Coat Hook 582A92 Ives 

Note: Provide (2) two additional dbl. coat hooks for Purse Shelf in Women’s Restroom. 


08710 -6


GROUP 8: Rear Vestibule (Interior) - Door No. 13 





2 Hinge Pin Stop 69F15 Ives 


GROUP 9: Mechanical Room – Door No. 18 

3 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB 




1 Flush Bolt FB458 12” Ives 

1 Threshold 425S x 72” Hiawatha 

GROUP 10: Patio Gates – Door Nos. 16 and 17 

1 Panic Device V40xEBxWx36” Detex 

1 Mortise Cylinder 80-102 x less core Schlage 

Balance of Hardware by Gate Manufacturer 

2 Hinges Steel Weld-on Barrel Hinges 

GROUP 11: Traffic Doors – Door Nos. 9 and 12 

All Mounting Hardware by Door Manufacturer 

GROUP 12: Coat Hooks – Bar Stool Area 

8 Dbl. Coat Hook 582A92 Ives 

GROUP 13: Padlocks – Keg Storage, Trash & Chemical Enclosure & Roof Hatch 

6 Padlocks By Owner Insta-Key 

GROUP 14: Bar (Patio) Door – Door No. 19 

1 Mortise Cylinder for cylinder dogging Schlage 

1 Floor Stop 446FS28 Ives 





08710 -7


SECTION 08800 - GLAZING 



A. Clear tempered glass. 

B. Insulated spandrel glass for windows. 

C. Clear insulated glass for entrances storefronts and windows. 

D. Un-framed tempered glass mirrors. 

E. Tinted window film. 


A. Section 01700 – Execution Requirements: for final cleaning of glass and mirrors. 

B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. 

C. Section 08110 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: for one-way mirror glass provided under 

Hardware Package. 

D. Section 08410 - Metal-Framed Storefronts. 

E. Section 10810 – Toilet Accessories: for framed mirrors. 


A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. 

B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, 

Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. 

C. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, 

Setting Blocks, and Spacers. 

D. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 

E. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 

F. ASTM C 1048: Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and 

Uncoated Glass. 

G. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 

H. ASTM C 1503: Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror. 

I. ASTM E 2190: Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation 

J. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America. 


A. Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads 

(where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: 

defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain 

watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. 


A. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing 

with certification label. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and 

safety glazing standard with which glass complies. 

04-27-11 GLAZING 

08800 -1



A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Fabricators for Glass: 

1. AFG Industries, Inc: www.afgglass.com. 

2. Guardian Industries Corporation: www.guardian.com. 

3. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppg.com. 

4. Oldcastle Glass: www.oldcastle.com 

5. Viracon: www.viracon.com. 


2.02 MONOLIHIC GLASS 

A. (GL1): Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Condition A uncoated, Type I, Class 1, q3 quality, 

horizontally tempered, clear float glass. 

1. 1/4" thick; clear, tempered. 

2.03 MIRROR GLASS 

A. (GL4): Tempered Mirror Glass: ASTM C1048, Condition A uncoated, Type I, Class 1, q3 quality, 

horizontally tempered, clear float glass before silver coating is applied. 

1. 1/4" thick; Mirror glazing quality, tempered, 

2. Refer to drawings for locations for un-framed mirrors in Women’s Restroom and Back Bar 

areas. 

B. (GL5): One-way Mirror Glass: Refer to Section 08110 – Steel Doors and frames for one-way 

glass installed in steel door provided by Twin City Hardware under current Hardware Package. 

2.04 INSULATED GLASS 

A. (GL2): Insulated Glass Units: 1 inch thick unit constructed of 1/4 inch clear exterior light, 1/2 

inch air space, and 1/4 inch clear interior light. Low-emissivity coating on No. 2 surface. Both 

lights heat strengthened (tempered where necessary to comply with safety code requirements). 

1. Visible transmittance: 70 percent. 

2. Outside reflectance: 10 percent. 

3. Nighttime winter U-value: 0.29 BTU/hour/square foot. Maximum. 

4. Summer U-value: 0.26 BTU/hour/square foot. Maximum. 

5. Shading coefficient: 0.43. Maximum. 

6. Relative heat gain: 90 BTU/hour/square foot. 

7. Acceptable products: 

a. Viracon: VE1-2M. 

b. Comparable products of other specified manufacturers that meet or exceed 

performance characteristics of specified glass. 

B. (GL3): Insulated Spandrel Glass Units: 1 inch thick unit constructed of 1/4 inch clear exterior 

light with ceramic frit on No. 2 surface, 1/2 inch air space, and 1/4 inch clear interior light. Both 

lights heat strengthened (tempered where necessary to comply with safety code requirements). 

1. Ceramic Frit Color: Black. 

2.05 TINTED WINDOW FILM 

A. Manufacturers and Product: 

1. (TF1): 3M Sun Control Window Films. 

a. Product: Prestige Series, PR 70. 

b. Manufacturer: 3M Corporation; Renewable Energy Division; www.3m.com 

c. Contact: John Aguzino, 1-800-229-1566. 


08800 -2


B. Locations: Interior Entry Aluminum Door # 02, Patio Aluminum Doors # 15 and # 19; applied to 

interior surface of glass after signage is installed. 

2.06 GLAZING COMPOUNDS 


1. Dow Corning Corp: www.dowcorning.com. 

2. GE Plastics: www.geplastics.com. 

3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 


B. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore 

A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning. 

C. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of 

properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, 

and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. 

D. Coordinate compatibility of silicone sealants specified in section 07900 with sealants used for 

insulated glass edge seals. 

2.07 GLAZING ACCESSORIES 

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. 

Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet 

space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. 

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. 

Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self 

adhesive on one face. 

C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 

Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size as required; black color. 

D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM 

C 864 Option I; Black color. 

E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 

F. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting 

mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with 

glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. 

G. Mirror Clips: Manufacturers standard top and bottom mirror clips fabricated to mechanically 

fasten mirrors to wall surface and allow for removal of mirrors. 



A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. 

B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may 

impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 


A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. 

B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. 

C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual. 

D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 


08800 -3


3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) 

A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. 

B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to 

attain full contact. 

C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous 

contact. 

3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING) 

A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing 

junctions with butyl sealant. 

B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. 

C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full 

contact. 

D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous 

contact. 

E. Trim protruding tape edge. 

3.05 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) 

A. Install Owner supplied 1/4 inch logo glass as indicated on the Drawings. 

B. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) 

above sight line. 

C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. 

D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. 

E. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. 

F. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous 

contact. 

G. Knife trim protruding tape. 

3.06 MIRROR INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with 

referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids 

distorting reflected images. 

B. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and/or mirror clips as applicable. Attach 

mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors 

or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of 

mirrors. 

1. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of 

mirror edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced. 

2. Install mastic as follows: 

a. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and 

to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. 

b. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum 

air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface. 

C. Refer to Drawings for wood trim mirror frames. 


08800 -4


3.07 TINTED WINDOW FILM INSTALLATION 

A. Application: Apply window film using manufacturer’s trained and certified installers in strict 

accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 

B. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel in proper cleaning of window surface after installation in 

accordance with manufacturers instructions. 

3.08 CLEANING 

A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. 

B. Remove labels after Work is complete. 

C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 



08800 -5




A. Metal furring and lathing. 

SECTION 09220 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) 

B. Portland cement plaster system (Stucco). 

C. Smooth and special rendered surface finish. 


A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. 

B. Section 07260 - Air Barriers. 

C. Section 07920 - Joint Sealers. 


E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings. 



B. Product Data: Submit data on plaster materials, characteristics and limitations of products 

specified. 

C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, 

and suggested schedule for cleaning. 

D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating finish color and texture to match 

existing material. 


A. ASTM C150 – Portland Cement 

B. ASTM C206 – Finishing Hydrated Lime 

C. ASTM C932 – Bonding Compounds for adhering plaster to concrete or concrete unit masonry 

D. ASTM C926 – Standard specification for application of Portland Cement based Plaster 

E. ASTM C897 – Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement Based Plasters 

F. ASTM C1063 – Specifications for installation of lathing and furring to receive interior and 

exterior Portland Cement Plaster 

G. PCA (Portland Cement Association) – Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual 

H. ACI (American Concrete Institute) ACI 524R – “Guide to Portland Cement Plastering” 


A. Perform work in accordance with PCA Plaster (Stucco) Manual and applicable manufacturer’s 

performance guidelines. 


A. Fabricate vertical elements to limit finish surface to 1/180 deflection under lateral point load of 

100 lbs. 

04-27-11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) 

09220 -1


B. Fabricate horizontal elements to limit finish surface to 1/240 deflection under superimposed 

dead load and wind uplift loads. 

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS 

A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a minimum of three 

years experience and / or approved by manufacturer. 

1.08 MOCKUP 

A. Provide mockup of plaster system with accessories. 

B. Construct mockup, 4 feet long by 4 feet wide, illustrating surface finish and color to match 

existing. 

C. Locate where directed by Owner. 

D. Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 


A. Comply with ASTM C926 requirements 

B. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 40° F or above 

100°F for 48 hours before, during and after stucco applications and until materials can be fully 

cured. 

C. Apply stucco to clean, adequately prepared surfaces free from dust, dirt or other deleterious 

substances. 

D. Provide adequate protection from contaminates and the weather for substrates prior to 

application of stucco and for stucco coat applications. Maintain in place until stucco is 

adequately cured. 

E. Protect stucco surfaces from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry or windy 

weather. Use procedures required by climatic conditions including moist curing, providing 

coverings and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 

F. Take necessary care to identify and protect adjacent surfaces from damage from stucco 

application and promptly remove all droppings. 



A. This specification is written on the basis of using the products of Degussa Wall Systems / 

Senergy, Such is intended to establish minimum quality standards, not to limit competitive 

bidding. Products with equal or superior characteristics by other manufacturers will be 

considered under conditions of the Specifications. 

2.02 PLASTER BASE MATERIALS 

A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1 Portland. 

B. Lime: Special finishing hydrated lime, ASTM C-206, Type S. 

C. Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand, in accordance with ASTM C897. 

D. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster. 

E. Bonding Agent: ASTM C932; type recommended by manufacturer for bonding plaster to 

concrete masonry surfaces. 

F. Plaster Sand: Must be clean and free from deleterious amounts of loam, clay, silt, soluble salts 

and organic matter. Sampling and testing must comply with ASTM C144. 


09220 -2


G. Senergy STUCCOBASE Concentrate: Factory-blended stucco mixture of Portland cement, 

reinforcing fibers, and proprietary ingredients for scratch and brown coats. Sampling and testing 

must comply with ASTM 926 and ICC ESR-1094. 

H. Senergy ALPHA BASE COAT (A/ BC): 100% acrylic polymer base coat, site mixed with 

Portland cement. To attach and reinforce optional EPS shapes over face of dried stucco. 

I. Reinforcing Mesh: Open weaved, glass fiber reinforcing mesh for reinforcing optional EPS 

shapes. 

2.03 PLASTER FINISH MATERIALS 

A. Cement: As specified for plaster base coat, pure white color. 

B. Lime: As specified for plaster base coat. 

C. Color Pigment: Synthetic type, color "Pure White". 

D. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster. 

E. Primer (if needed): Senergy STUCCO PRIME: 100% acrylic based primer for stucco. 

F. Finish: Senergy SENERFLEX: Factory mixed formulation of 100% acrylic polymers and 

aggregate, integrally pigmented and formulated for specific textures. Color to be determined. 

2.04 FURRING AND LATHING 

A. Metal Lath at Walls: ASTM C841 and C847; flat diamond self furring mesh with ASTM A653A 

G60 hot dip, galvanized zinc coating, 3.4 lb/sq. yd. of weight to suit application. 

B. Metal Lath at Soffits: ASTM C841 and C847; Flat Diamond non-furred and non-backed mesh 

with ASTM A653A G60 hot dip, galvanized coating, 3.4 lb/sq. yd. 

C. Casing Bead: Formed zinc; minimum 26 gage thick; depth governed by plaster thickness; 

maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with square edges. 

D. Corner Bead: Formed zinc; minimum 26 ga. thick; depth governed by plaster thickness; 

maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with bull nosed edge. 

E. Base Screed: Formed zinc; minimum 26 gage thick; depth governed by plaster thickness; 

maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with beveled edge. 

F. Corner Mesh: Formed zinc; minimum 26 ga. thick; expanded flanges shaped to permit 

complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inches wide; galvanized finish. 

G. Anchorage Accessories: Tie wire, nails, staples, or other approved metal supports, of type and 

size to suit application, and to rigidly secure lath and associated metal accessories in place, 

galvanized, complying with ASTM C1063. 

2.05 CEMENT PLASTER MIXES 

A. Mix and proportion cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926. 

B. Mix and proportion Senergy STUCCOBASE in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

C. Finish Coat: Mix Senergy SENERFLEX to ensure a homogeneous consistency. Add water as 

needed. 

D. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set. 

E. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water. 

F. Add air entrainment admixtures to all coats to provide 5-7 percent entrainment. 

G. Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and evaporation. 


09220 -3


H. Do not re-temper mixes after initial set has occurred. 



A. Verify surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work under this Section. 

B. Masonry: Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this Section. Verify 

no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface. 


A. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction. 

3.03 INSTALLATION - LATHING MATERIALS 

A. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. 

B. Lap ends minimum 2 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. 

C. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 2 inches. 

D. Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials. 

Secure rigidly in place. 

E. Attach metal lath to supports using fastening method recommended by manufacturer to suit 

back-up material. 

F. Place strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place. 

G. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, return metal lath 3 inches from corner 

to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only. 

3.04 INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES 

A. All openings, plaster edges or where plaster edges terminate, and provide plaster screeds. Use 

vented screed at soffit perimeter and where indicated on drawings. 

B. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only. 

C. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in 

place. 

3.05 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. Establish control and expansion joints with back to back casing beads, as located in drawings. 

Set both beads over 6 inch wide strip of building wrap tape for air seal continuity. 

3.06 PLASTERING 

A. Apply Portland cement plaster (stucco) in a three-coat application over metal lath with thickness 

not less than 7/8" in locations as indicated on drawings. Scratch, brown and finish coat shall be 

applied as follows: 

1. First (Scratch) Coat: Shall be applied to metal reinforcement with sufficient material and 

pressure so that it is shoved through the metal reinforcement to completely embed the 

reinforcement. 

a. Thickness of scratch coat shall be approximately 3/8". Before scratch coat has 

hardened, it shall be evenly scratched with a standard scratcher to provide good 

mechanical key for the second or brown coat. 

b. Scratch coat shall be continuously moist cured for not less than 48 hours after 

application. 


09220 -4


2. Second (Brown) Coat: Shall be applied not sooner than 48 hours after application of 

scratch coat. Before applying the brown coat, the surfaces of scratch coat shall be 

dampened evenly to obtain uniform suction (or fogged as environmental conditions (hot, 

dry, sunny days) dictate to properly cure). 

a. Thickness of brown coat shall be a minimum of 3/8" total thickness and shall be 

applied in two applications or coats, one immediately following the other. 

b. Surface shall be brought to a true, even surface by floating or rodding and left 

rough, ready to receive finish coat (for acrylic finishes: wood float or darbying the 

surface and fill all voids for uniform surface). 

c. Brown coat shall be continuously moist for 48 hours after application and then 

allowed to dry. 

3. Finish coat: Shall be laid out to permit completion of an entire surface in one operation. 

If this is impracticable, the plastering shall be carried to some natural breaking point as 

approved by the Owner. 

a. Finish coat shall be applied not sooner than 5 days after the application of 

preceding coat. Before applying finish coat, the surface of preceding coat shall be 

dampened evenly to obtain uniform suction. 

b. Primer (if needed): Senergy STUCCOPRIME: Apply STUCCOPRIME to the 

Senergy STUCCOBASE with either an airless sprayer, roller or brush at rate of 

175 – 275 s.f. per gallon. 

c. Acrylic Finish Coat: Senergy SENERFLEX: Apply finish directly to 

STUCCOBASE or STUCCOPRIME with a clean stainless steel trowel. Maintain a 

wet edge on finish by applying and texturing continually over the wall surface. 

Work finish to corners, joints or natural breaks and do not allow material to set up 

within an uninterrupted wall area. Float finish to achieve final texture. 


A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 

3.08 CLEAN-UP 

A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove related debris from premises. 



09220 -5


SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 



A. Metal framing. 

B. Metal framing components for suspended gypsum board ceilings. 

C. Standard gypsum board. 

D. Mold resistant gypsum board. 

E. Cement backer board. 

F. Joint treatment and accessories. 


A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wall wind-load-bearing metal stud 

framing and related soffit framing. 

B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: Exterior load bearing wood stud framing and sheathing. 

C. Section 07212 – Board and Batt Insulation: for fiberglass insulation used as acoustic insulation. 


A. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer 

Units. 

B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. 

C. ASTM A 641 - Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 

D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or 


E. ASTM C 36/C 36M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard. 

F. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing 

Gypsum Board. 

G. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. 

H. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive 

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 

I. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 

J. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the 

Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. 

K. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. 

L. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of 

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 

M. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building 

Construction. 

N. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association. 

04-27-11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 

09260 -1



A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated 

assemblies. 

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and 

finishing. 


2.01 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS 

A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size 

and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum 

deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 

1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C 

645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is 

continuously dimpled, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and 

maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using 

assemblies specified by ASTM C 754. 

2. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 

3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 

4. Insulation Furring: Z shaped for use with board insulation, 1 1/2 inch. 

B. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of 

sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as 


C. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that 

accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing 

rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. 

1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity 

required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American 

Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 

2. Material: ASTM A 653/A 653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped 

galvanized coating. 

2.02 SUSPENDED CEILING COMPONENTS 

A. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 12 gauge wire. 

B. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch. 

C. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 18 gauge wire. 

D. Ceiling Channels: 0.0312-inch, (20 Gauge) base metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide 

flanges. 

1. Depth: 2-1/2 inch. 

E. Furring Channels: Hat-Shaped, 2-9/16 inch wide with 1-1/4 inch face. 

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch, (25 Gauge). 

2. Depth: 7/8 inch or 1-1/2 inch, as indicated on Drawings. 

2.03 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS 


1. G-P Gypsum Corporation: www.gp.com. 

2. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 

3. USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 



09260 -2


B. Gypsum Board - All Types: Complying with applicable requirements of ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 

C. (GYB1) Standard Gypsum Board: Not Used 

D. (GYB2) Mold and Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board: With moisture and mold-resistant core 

and surfaces to comply with ASTM D 3273. 

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 

2. Long Edges: Tapered. 


a. USG Corporation: Sheetrock Brand “Mold Tough” Gypsum Panels. 

b. National Gypsum Company: XP Gypsum Board. 

c. G-P Gypsum Corporation: “Mold-Guard Gypsum Board. 

2.04 CEMENT BACKER BOARD 

A. (GYB5) Cement Backer Board: ANSI A118.9, aggregated Portland cement panels with glass 

fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces. 

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 


a. USG Corporation: Durock. 

b. National Gypsum: Permabase. 

3. Location: At Kitchen and Toilet walls. Refer to Wall Types. 


A. Corner Beads: Galvanized steel. 

B. Edge Trim: Vinyl tape style beads and as detailed. 

C. Control Joint: Zinc, v-groove with tape flanges. 

D. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project 

conditions. 

1. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. 

2. Chemical hardening type compound. 

E. Joint Tape: 

1. Standard Paper Tape: 2 inch wide. 

a. Interior Gypsum Wallboard except specific products indicated below that require 

fiberglass tape. 

2. Fiberglass Tape: self-adhesive, glass-fiber mesh. Sheetrock Brand Fiberglass Drywall 

Tape or comparable. 

a. Interior Mold and Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board. 

b. Cement Backer Board. 

F. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations. 

G. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to 

suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. 



A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 

3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION 

A. Metal Framing: Comply with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions. 


09260 -3


B. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain 

clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with 

continuous bridging. 

2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance 

between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical 

devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud 

connections; do not leave studs unattached to track. 

C. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not 

less than double 20 gauge studs at jambs. 

D. Standard Wall Furring: Install at masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more 

than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate 

channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 

E. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet 

accessories, and equipment. Comply with Section 06100 and Drawings for wood blocking. 

3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION 

A. Acoustic Batt Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around 

electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 

1. Refer to Section 07212 for batt insulation (INSUL1). 

B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing 

members. 

2. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and 

rough-in boxes. 

3. Refer to Section 07900 for (SLNT2) sealant. 

C. Install acoustical treatment at interior partitions where indicated on the Drawings. 

3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, 

especially in highly visible locations. 

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and 

edges occurring over firm bearing. 

C. Cement Backing Board: Install over framing members in locations as indicated on drawings, 

and in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. 

D. Installation on Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board. 

3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 

1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls over 50 feet long and in accordance with the 

Drawings. 

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. 

C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 


09260 -4


3.06 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD 

A. General: Tape and finish gypsum board surfaces, joints, interior angles, edge trim, control 

joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare 

gypsum board surfaces for final finish. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent 

surfaces. 

1. Apply materials strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations. 

2. Pre-fill open joints edges, and damaged surface areas. 

3. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not 

intended for tape. 

4. Finish joints to achieve uniformly smooth, true and satisfactory surface to receive paint or 

other scheduled finish material. 

5. Sand each coat, keeping sanding to a minimum to avoid raising nap on drywall board. 

B. Levels Gypsum Board Finish: as specified under ASTM C 840, and as summarized below: 

1. Level 0: (No Finish); Taping, finishing, and trim accessories, (cornerbeads, etc.) are not 

required. 

2. Level 1: (Tape set in compound); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint 

compound. Panel surfaces must be free of excess joint compound, but tool marks and 

ridges are acceptable. 

3. Level 2: (1 coat ); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and 

immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply one coat of the joint compound 

on fastener heads, and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces must be free of excess 

joint compound, but tool marks and ridges are acceptable. 

4. Level 3: (2 coat); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and 

immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply one additional coat of the joint 

compound over the tape. Apply two separate coats of the joint compound over fastener 

heads and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces and the joint compound must be 

smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. 

5. Level 4: (3 coat); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and 

immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply two additional separate coats of 

the joint compound over flat joints. Apply one additional coat of the joint compound over 

interior angles. Apply three separate coats of the joint compound over fastener heads and 

flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces and the joint compound must be smooth and 

free of tool marks and ridges. "Drywall primer" must be applied to surfaces before applying 

final decoration. 

6. Level 5: (Skim coat); Finish must be equal to Level 4 (embedding coat and three finish 

coats) plus a skim coat over the entire gypsum board surface. Surfaces must be smooth 

and free of tool marks and ridges. 

a. Note: Level 5 is considered a high-quality gypsum board finish and is recommended 

for areas that will receive glossy paint or that are subject to severe lighting conditions. 

3.07 GYPSUM BOARD FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE 

A. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view. 

B. Level 2: Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry. 

C. Level 4: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive paint finish. 



09260 -5




A. Cersmic Wall, Floor and Base Tile. 

B. Quarry Tile Floor and Base Tile. 

C. Mortar and Grout Materials. 

D. Accessory Materials. 


A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 

SECTION 09300 - TILE 

B. Section 08710 - Hardware: Thresholds at doors. 

C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: for wall substrate materials. 


A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the 

Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium). 

1. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile 

in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar. 

2. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile 

on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement 

Mortar. 

3. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the 

Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured 

Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 

4. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile 

with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 


with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy. 


with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. 

7. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in 

Tilework. 

8. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement 

Mortar. 

9. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement 

Grouts for Tile Installation. 

10. ANSI A118.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Epoxy Emulsion 

Mortar/Grout. 

B. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc. 



B. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal 

methods, and polishes and waxes. 


A. Maintain one copy of TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 

years of documented experience. 

04-27-11 TILE 

09300 -1



A. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar 

materials. 

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Provide 10 sq. ft of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified. 

B. Provide 1 gallon of each floor cleaner. 

1. Epoxy grout haze cleaner: Legsolve-it. 

2. Heavy grout and stain remover: Texspar and Texspar Plus. 

3. Floor cleaner/sealer: Floorshine R20. 


2.01 TILE SUPPLIER 

2.01 TILE 

A. Tile components in this section are to be furnished by the General Contactor through RBC Tile 

& Stone. 

RBC Tile & Stone 

1820 Berkshire Lane North 

Plymouth, MN 55441 

763-559-5531 

A. Ceramic Floor, Wall and Base Tile: (CT) 

1. (CT-1): 12” x 12” Floor and Wall Tile, Back Bay Iron Range, RBC # EQCP96-1212, Sparta. 

2. (CT-2): 6” x 12” Cove Base Tile, BWW Super Black Textured, RBC # BW9235-COVE12, 

Black. 

3. (CT2a): 1” x 6” Cove Base Out Corner, BWW Super Black Textured, RBC # BW9235- 

COVE12OC, Black. 

5. (CT-3): 4” x 4” Black Accent Tile, Back Bay BWW Accent #1, RBC # BB10890-44, Black. 

4. (CT-4): 4” x 4” Yellow Accent Tile, Back Bay BWW Accent #2, RBC # BB10380-44, Yellow. 

B. Quarry Tile Floor and Base Tile: (QT) 

1. (QT1): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile with abrasive surface, RBC # OT10A-66, Red. 

2. (QT2): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Base, RBC # 10-Q3565, Red. 

3. (QT2a): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Right Corner, RBC # 10-QCR3565, Red. 

4. (QT2b): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Left Corner, RBC # 10-QCL3565, Red. 

2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS 


1. Bostik USA- Hydroment, 800-726-7845. 

B. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: 

1. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4. 

a. Hydroment – Single Flex Modified Thinset – Gray. 

2.03 GROUT MATERIALS 


1. Bostik USA – Hydroment, 800-726-7845. 

B. Standard Grout: Polymer modified cement grout, sanded, as specified in ANSI A118.7. 

1. Hydroment Standard Sanded Grout. 

2. Color: Char Black, H139S-25. 

3. Location: Use for all Ceramic Tile. 

04-27-11 TILE 

09300 -2


C. Epoxy Grout: as specified in ANSI A118.3, water-cleanable, high heat and chemical resistant 

modified epoxy emulsion grout; use for floor and base applications in food preparation, bar and 

other areas as indicated on drawings. 

1. Hydroment Ezpoxy Grout. 

2. Color: Char Black, HY9300-404. 

3. Location: Use for all Quarry Tile. 


A. Waterproof Membrane System: complying with ANSI A118.10 and ANSI A118.12. 

1. Laticrete: 9235 Waterproof Membrane System. 

2. Bostik USA: Hydroment Black Top 90210. 

B. Cement Backer Board: As specified in Section 09260. 

C. (T2) Trim:Transition Strips: use with carpet and tile. 

1. Schluter Systems, Reno-TK; Finish: Brushed Aluminum. 

D. (T3) Trim: Wall Corner Protection: use with tile in restrooms. 

1. Schluter Systems, Rondec RO 80 EB, brushed stainless finish. 

E. Cleaning Materials: 

1. Legge System: Walter G Legge Company, 444 Central Ave., Peekskill, NY 10566; 800- 

345-3443; www.leggesystems.com 

a. Cementitious grout haze cleaner: Legge Grout Stripper. 

b. Epoxy grout haze cleaner: Legsolve-it. 

c. Heavy grout and stain remover: Texspar and Texspar Plus. 

d. Floor cleaner/sealer: Floorshine R20. 



A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, 

are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. 

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of 

setting materials to sub-floor surfaces. 

C. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 


A. Protect surrounding work from damage. 

B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. 

C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable 

flatness tolerances. 

D. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's 

instructions. 

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 

A. Install tile and thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 

through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations. 

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. 

C. Place thresholds at exposed tile edges. 

D. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases 

neatly. Align floor, base, and wall joints. 

04-27-11 TILE 

09300 -3


E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints 

watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. 

F. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. 

G. Install thresholds where indicated. 

H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. 

I. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. 

J. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. 

K. Grout tile joints. 

L. Clean tile using Legge system grout haze cleaning materials suitable for the grout type. Mix 

cleaning materials and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using rotary 

scrubber and wet/dry vacuum. 

M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 

3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS 

A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113, dryset 

or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated below. 

1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook 

Method F122 with epoxy grout. 

2. Where epoxy grout is indicated, but not epoxy bond coat, install in accordance with TCA 

Handbook Method F115. 

3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL AND BASE TILE 

A. Install wall corner protection at outside corners of tiled walls in Restrooms. 

B. Over cement backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W244. 

1. Where adjacent floors are installed with waterproof membrane, wrap membrane 4 inches 

up wall, behind base, and out from wall surface 16” unless noted otherwise. Use same tile 

installation method as for the floor. 

2. Use epoxy grout for base where adjacent floor installation uses epoxy grout. 

3.06 CLEANING 

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 

B. Apply floor cleaner/sealer. 


A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. 

B. Provide two layers of kraft paper over all tile and grout on floors. Tape down and stagger seams 

by half the width on second layer. 


04-27-11 TILE 

09300 -4


SECTION 09511 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 



A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. 

B. Acoustical units. 

C. Egg Crate Ceiling Panel. 


A. ASTM A 641, Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 

B. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal 

Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. 

C. ASTM C 636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for 

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. 

D. ASTM E 580 - Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical 

Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. 

E. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other 

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC 

equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 


2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS 


1. USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 

B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E 1264, Class A. 

C. (ACT1) Acoustical Panels: Vinyl faced gypsum board, with the following characteristics: 

1. Manufacturer and Product: USG ClimaPlus Vinyl, Stipple 3270. 

2. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 

3. Thickness: 1/2 inches. 

4. Composition: Vinyl facing bonded to smooth gypsum board. 

5. Edge: Square. 

6. Surface Color: White. 

7. Surface Pattern: Fine textured, non-perforated. 

D. (ACT2) Acoustical Panels: Vinyl faced gypsum board, with the following characteristics: 

1. Manufacturer and Product: USG ClimaPlus Vinyl, Stipple 3260. 



4. Composition: Vinyl facing bonded to smooth gypsum board. 



7. Surface Pattern: Fine textured, non-perforated. 

04-27-11 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 

09511 -1


E. (ACT3) Acoustical Panels: Mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following 

characteristics: 

1. Manufacturer and Product: USG, Radar ClimaPlus 2210. 



4. Composition: Wet felted. 



7. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured. 

F. (ACT4) Acoustical Panels: Mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following 

characteristics: 

1. Manufacturer and Product: USG, Radar ClimaPlus 2210. 



4. Composition: Wet felted. 


6. Surface Color: Flat Black, No. 205. 

7. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured. 

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 

A. (GRID1) Ceiling Suspension System: for (ACT1) and (ACT2); Light Duty grid system meeting 

requirements of ASTM C 635 when suspended at 4'-0" o.c. Exposed tee-grid, double web, 

aluminum system with 15/16" wide bottom flange. 

1. Finish on Suspension System: Baked enamel. 

a. Colors: White. 

2. Edge Molding: Angle type wall molding with nominal 2" mounting flange by 1" face flange 

and hemmed edges. Factory match suspension system finish. 

3. Hold Down Clips: Manufacturer’s standard. 

4. Acceptable Manufacturer’s and Products: 

a. USG; Donn AX Suspension System. 

B. (GRID2) Ceiling Suspension System: for (ACT3) and (ACT4); Intermediate Duty grid system 

meeting requirements of ASTM C 635 when suspended at 4'-0" o.c. Exposed tee-grid, double 

web, hot-dipped galvanized, cold rolled steel system with 15/16" wide bottom flange. 

1. Finish on Suspension System: Baked enamel. 

a. Colors: White and Black No. 205, in locations to match panel color. 

2. Edge Molding: Angle type wall molding with 1" mounting flange by 2" face flange and 

hemmed edges. Factory match suspension system finish. 

3. Hold Down Clips: Manufacturer’s standard. 

4. Acceptable Manufacturer’s and Products: 

a. USG; Donn DX/DXL Double Web Grid System. 

2.03 EGG CRATE CEILING PANEL 

A. Egg Crate Ceiling Panel: 1/2” x 1/2" x 3/8” thick, styrene plastic egg crate panel. 24” x 24” 

panel, Color Black. 

B. Manufacturers and Products: 

1. SLP Lighting; Tel. 800-248-0224; www.slplighting.com; TC500 black styrene eggcrate 

louver, 2 x 2. 

2. Intersource Specialties Company; 888-782-5011; www.intersourceco.com; Thincell TC – 

2 x 2 black styrene. 

3. Ridout Plastics Co, Inc.; 800-474-3688; www.eplastics.com; # B/EGG - .375 x 2 x 4 sheet, 

Black Styrene. 

4. Comparable products from other manufactures meeting specified requirements. 


09511 -2



A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling 

system flatness requirement specified. 

B. Wire Hangers: Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 

C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match suspension system units. 



A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. 

B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM 

A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's 

instructions and as supplemented in this section. 

B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum 

deflection of 1:360. 

C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. 

D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other 

work. 

E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where 

carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 

F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest 

affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. 

G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load 

to exceed deflection capability. 

H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or 

support components independently. 

I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. 

J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with 

other interruptions. 

1. Use longest practical lengths. 

2. Overlap and rivet corners. 

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS 

A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to 

appearance and function. 

C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. 

D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. 

E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. 

F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 

1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 


09511 -3


G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding. 

H. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of public entrance and exit exterior doors. 

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES 

A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 

B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. 

3.05 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and 

suspension system members. 

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish 

damage. 

B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to 

permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 



09511 -4


SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING 



A. Vinyl base. 


A. ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. 



A. (RB) Resilient Base; ASTM F 1861, Type TV, vinyl, thermoplastic; top set Style A, coved 

base. 

1. Height: 6 inch. 

2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 

3. Color: Black. 


a. BurkeMercer Flooring Products: www.burkemercer.com 

b. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com 

c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com 

d. Armstrong: www.ceilings.com 

e. VPI: www.vpicorp.com 


A. Resilient Base Adhesive: As recommended by material manufacturer for specific material, 

location and intended use. 

1. VPI No. 600 Acrylic Copolymer Wall Base Adhesive or comparable product from the other 

specified base manufacturers. 



A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat and are ready to receive vinyl base. 

3.02 INSTALLATION - BASE 

A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. 

B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use pre-molded units. At exposed ends, use premolded 

units. 

C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 

3.03 CLEANING 

A. Immediately after installation, remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces 

without damage. 


04-27-11 RESILIENT FLOORING 

09650 -1




SECTION 09666 - SPECIALTY FLOORING 

A. Specialty resilient vinyl flooring with heat welded seams and cove base. 



B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for watertight 

application. 

C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, 

and suggested schedule for cleaning. 

D. Manufacturer installation instructions for watertight applications along with required accessories. 


A. ASTM G-21 Bacteria & Mildew Resistance Excellent 

B. ASTM D-751 Breaking Strength (md) 405# 

C. ASTM D-751 Breaking Strength (cmd) 723# 

D. ASTM D-2407 Coefficient of Friction (avg) Dry.88 

E. ASTM D-695 Compressive Strength @ 20% Deformation 641 psi 

F. ASTM D-751 Elongation (md) 76.5% 

G. ASTM D-751 Elongation (cmd) 88.5% 

H. ASTM E-648 Critical Radiant Flux 1.052/cm2 

I. ASTM E-648 Burn Distance 12 cm 

J. Shore A Hardness 80-85 avg 

K. ASTM D-751 Tear Strength (md) 76.5# 

L. ASTM D-751 Tear Strength (cmd) 84# 

M. NFSI UWT-101A Coefficient of Friction Standard >.06 


A. Contractor will assure the compliance with 2.03 Job Conditions to allow for proper installation. 

B. Comply with governing codes and regulations. 

C. Use installers experienced in heat welding Protect-All flooring and approved by manufacturer. 

D. Manufacturer's product warranty shall be for a minimum of 10 years coverage. 

04-27-11 SPECIALTY FLOORING 

09666 -1




A. Oscoda Plastics: 5585 N. Huron Ave. P.O. Box 189 Oscoda, MI 48750 


Phone 800.544.9538 

Fax 989.739.1494 

e-mail: sales@oscodaplastics.com 

www.oscodaplastics.com 

A. (SPFL): Specialty Flooring: Protect-All® Specialty Flooring as Manufactured by Oscoda 

Plastics®, Inc. 

1. Protect-All® Specialty Flooring by Oscoda Plastics®, Inc. Sheets 5' x 5' or 5' x 8' x 1/4” 

thick in color chosen from manufacturer's samples. 

a. Finish: Matte finish. 

b. Color: Light Gray. 

2. Accessories: 

a. Protect-All® # 127 / # 139 Epoxy Adhesive. 

b. Protect-All Seam Welding Rod. 

c. Protect-All® 6” Cove Base and Preformed Corners. 

d. Protect-All® Aluminum Cove Base Cap. 

e. Stainless Steel Drain Rings As Provided By Protect-All®. 

f. Sealant provided by Protect-All®. 

g. Other installation materials as required and supplied by Oscoda Plastics®, Inc. 

2.03 VERIFICATION OF JOB CONDITIONS 

A. Proper substrate. 

1. Assure that the substrate material / system is suitable for installation of flooring as 

indicated by manufacturer. 

2. Follow recommendations for the use of curing compounds in concrete sub floors. 

3. If required, the installer will verify complete removal of existing finishes to the extent that 

proper adhesion will occur. 

4. Verify a clean and dry surface to accept adhesive. 

5. Use only Portland based patching / filling compounds. 

6. Assure that the levelness and smoothness of surface is in compliance with manufacturer 

guidelines. 

7. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing 

for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain 

instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring 

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. Reference ASTM F 710 - Standard 

Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 

B. Environmental Conditions. 

1. The contractor and installer of product shall be responsible for providing and maintaining a 

proper installation environment. 

2. Installation area must be enclosed and watertight with all walls, wall finishes, doors and 

floor penetrations in place. 

3. Proper acclimation of flooring material is required prior to installation. Minimum of 48 hours. 

4. Assure confinement of space during installation and curing of adhesives to prevent other 

trades from damaging the product or compromising the adhesion. 

5. Maintain a constant temperature during installation and throughout the curing of adhesives. 

6. Provide a secure area to store materials for installation. 


09666 -2


C. Proper Drain and Other Floor Penetration Elevations. 

1. All drains to be installed level and 1/8” above surface of sub-floor. 

2. When “dishing” of drain area is specified, the “dish” should not be less than 12” in diameter 

and more than 1” in depth. Drain to be 1/8” above floor surface. 

3. All other penetrations should be installed 1/8” above surface and provide accommodation 

for proper sealant. 

4. Penetrations not terminating at floor surface shall be a minimum of 6” above the surface of 

floor and be installed in such a way as to not interfere with the installation of the flooring or 

the base material and allow adequate space for sealant to be applied to the entire 

perimeter. 



A. Install specialty flooring per manufacturer's installation requirements and recommendations. 

Assure proper conditions for successful performance and installation. 

B. Follow manufacturer recommendations for laying out sheets. 

C. Flooring shall be cut to within 1/8” of penetrations. 

D. Adhere the floor material using manufacturer's recommended adhesive for the particular 

substrate type / job conditions and in compliance with spread rate and proper trowel size. Roll 

floor into adhesive with 100# roller per manufacturer directions. 

E. Install stainless steel drain rings around all drains and other surface penetrations. Rings are to 

be routed into floor surface and mounted flush with top of flooring. Secure drain rings using 

stainless steel fasteners and lead anchors that will properly anchor the ring to the substrate. 

F. Install cove base as recommended by manufacturer with proper adhesive and top sealant. 

Heat-weld all seams. 

G. Install aluminum cove base cap fastening to wall a minimum of 8” on center using non - 

corrosive fasteners that are compatible to secure to wall type. 

H. Heat-weld all field material seams using manufacturer's welding rod using proper tools and 

installation methods as approved by manufacturer. 

I. Transitions in doorways will have stainless steel transitions as provided by manufacturer and 

will be routed flush with surface of sheet and fastened 6” on center using stainless steel 

fasteners and lead anchors. 

J. All exposed edges are to be sealed with manufacturer's recommended sealant to assure a 

water tight seal. 

3.02 CLEANING 

A. Sweep-clean the floor after installation and clear area of scrap materials. Installer shall provide 

two copies of manufacturer cleaning recommendations for contractor and owner use. 



09666 -3


SECTION 09680 - CARPET 



A. Carpet, direct-glued. 

B. Carpet base. 

C. Accessories. 


A. Section 09300 - Tile: for metal floor transitions from carpet to tile. 


A. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and 

Rug Institute. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years 

experience. 


A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. 

B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during and 24 hours 

after installation. 

C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation. 


2.01 CARPET MATERIALS 

A. (CPT1): Carpet: Custom Carpet for Buffalo Wild Wings. 

1. Mohawk, Broadloom, BWW 50545-37907. 

B. (Carpet Base): 6” high carpet base with hemmed top edges. Provide lengths required to carpet 

vendor. 

1. Mohawk, Broadloom, Spectrum V, BC246; Color: XJ7234, Black. 


A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer. 

B. Adhesives: 

1. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer. 

2. Contact Adhesive: For concrete substrate as recommended by carpet manufacturer. 



A. Verify carpet backing and installation method used in the existing areas to be patched and 

matched. Notify Architect if installation method varies from that specified. 

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding 

of adhesives to sub floor surfaces. 

04-27-11 CARPET 

09680 -1



A. Concrete substrate: 

1. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. 

2. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler 

is cured. 

3. Clean substrate. 

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 

A. Install carpet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104. 

B. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. 

C. Lay out carpet: 

1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main 

traffic. 

2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings. 

3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent 

pieces. 

4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. 

5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area. 

D. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance. 

E. Coordinate with installation of metal floor Transition Strip, (T2), as specified under Section 

09300 – Tile. 

3.04 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET 

A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. 

Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately. 

B. Apply adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient open 

time, press carpet into adhesive. 

C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam 

straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. 

D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing. 

E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. 

F. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 

3.05 CARPET BASE INSTALLATION 

A. Adhesively apply carpet base with hemmed edges up, to wall surface after floor carpet is 

installed. Fit joints tightly together. 

3.06 CLEANING 

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage. 

B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 


04-27-11 CARPET 

09680 -2


SECTION 09720 - WALL COVERING 



A. Installation of sheet linoleum wall covering in prefabricated panels. 

B. Panels prefabricated furnished by Owner's vendor. 


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature 

ranges required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer. 

B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall 

covering. 



A. Forbo Flooring. 


A. (WC1): Forbo Marmoleum, Linoleum Wall Covering, conforming to the following: 

1. Pattern: Marmoleum Real. 

2. Color: #2939, Black. 

3. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to 

substrate. 

4. Substrate: 1/4 inch thick hardboard. Wall covering sheet mounted to substrate by Owner’s 

Millwork Vendor, installation by GC. 

A. (T4) Trim: Corner Guard; 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x length as required, PVC corner guard. 

1. Color: Black. 

2. Locations: Outside corners of WC1 panels. 

3. Furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor, installation by GC. 



A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform to 

requirements of the wall covering manufacturer. 


A. Install wallcovering panels with adhesive and hidden mechanical fasteners. 

B. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. 

C. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners. 

3.03 CLEANING 

A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. 

B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section. 


04-27-11 WALL COVERING 

09720 -1


SECTION 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS 



A. Surface preparation. 

B. Field application exterior and interior painting systems. 


A. Section 04810 - Face Brick (FBR) for paint color match. 

B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Shop-primed items. 

C. Section 05210 - Metal Joists: Shop-primed items. 

D. Section 05310 - Metal Deck: Shop-primed items. 

E. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. 

F. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Factory primed Fiber Cement Siding and Trim. 

G. Section 07240 - (EIFS1) for paint color match. 

H. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors: Field finished wood doors. 

I. Section 09900 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 


A. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): 

40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for 

Architectural Coatings. 

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

1. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and 

Applications. 

2. ASTM D523: Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. 

C. Master Painters Institute (MPI): www.paintinfo.com 

D. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA): 

1. PDCA P4: Responsibilities for Inspection and Acceptance of Surfaces Prior to Painting and 

Decorating. 

1.04 DEFINITIONS 

A. Paint: Paint system materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, 

and other applied materials whether used as primer, intermediate or finish coats, and of various 

degrees of opacity or sheen. 

B. Sheen: Specular gloss of paint finish as determined in accordance with The Master Painters 

Institute (MPI), Guide for use in Defining Gloss and Sheen Levels. 

1. Flat: refers to a lusterless or matte finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 1”. 

a. Gloss range below 5 units when measured at an 60-degree meter. 

b. Gloss range below 10 units when measured at an 85-degree meter. 

2. Eggshell: refers to low-sheen finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 2”. 

a. Gloss range below 10 units when measured at an 60-degree meter. 

b. Gloss range between 10 and 35 when measured at a 85-degree meter. 

3. Satin: refers to low-sheen finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 4”. 

a. Gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 

b. Gloss range 35 units minimum when measured at an 85-degree meter. 

04-27-11 PAINTS AND COATINGS 

09900 -1


4. Semigloss: refers to medium-sheen finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 5”. 


5. Full Gloss: refers to high-sheen finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 6”. 


C. Paint System (PS#): Two or more coats of paint, generally consisting of a prime coat and one 

or more coats of finish paint. 

1. Paint system includes surface preparation and required pre-treatment. 

D. Color (C#): Identified by a number after an abbreviation "C". 



B. Color Samples: Submit for approval (2) two paper-backed samples, standard draw-down type, 

of each color and sheen combination indicated. Samples will be reviewed for sheen as well as 

for color. 

1. Clear or semi-transparent wood finishes if specified: Submit on wood specified, as a 

complete system with stain if any. 

C. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include primers and miscellaneous materials. 

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. 

a. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and 

application. 

b. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification 

and color number. 

2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis 

and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. 


A. Applicator's Qualifications: Firm experienced in application or installation of systems similar in 

complexity to those required for this Project. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Products must meet current local and federal VOC requirements. 

C. Product Identification: Provide manufacturer's product identification on product containers same 

as that on final material list. In addition, provide color identification, analysis of contents, 

instructions for application and for reducing (if applicable) on containers. 


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. 

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand 

code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and 

instructions for mixing and reducing. 

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 

degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 


A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for conditions 

under which paint systems can be applied, and the following: 

1. Maintain ambient temperature above 50 degrees F. during and 72 hours after installation. 

2. Apply water-borne paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding 

air temperature is between 50 degrees F. and 90 degrees F. 

3. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the 

surrounding air temperature is between 45 degrees F. and 95 degrees F. 


09900 -2


4. Do not apply paint in precipitation, fog or mist, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, 

or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F. above dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 

B. Do not apply paint systems in areas where dust is being generated. 

C. Do not apply coatings until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by 

paint manufacturer. Test with a moisture meter. 

D. Provide minimum lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 

B. Extra Materials: Furnish (1) one gallon of each color for all major substrates for use by Owner. 

1. Label each container with substrate and color in addition to the manufacturer's label. 

2. Before Substantial Completion of Work, deliver extra materials to Project and store where 

directed. 



A. Primers and Paints: Sherwin Williams Co. www.sherwin-williams.com 

B. Transparent Finishes: Minwax Co. www.minwax.com 

2.02 COLORS 

A. All color numbers are from Sherwin Williams unless noted otherwise. 

1. (C1): Color to match Ralph Lauren NA-36, “Steeple Chase”, Satin, 

SW: Color Accents Custom Formula: 

(B1)2Y41, (W1)10/32, (N1)2Y13+1, (R2)9/32, (Y3)41+01 

2. (C2): SW #6328, “Fireweed”, Satin 

3. (C3): SW #6683, “Bee”, Satin 

4. (C4): SW #6991, “Black”, Flat 

5. (C5): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Satin 

6. (C6): SW #7006, “Extra White”, Satin 

7. (C7): SW #6683, “Bee”, Gloss 

8. (C8): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Semi-Gloss 

9. (C9): SW #7055, “Enduring Bronze”, Semi-Gloss 

Color to match Face Brick (FBR1) color, refer to Section 04810. 

10. (C10): SW #6117, “Smoky Topaz”, Semi-Gloss 

Color to match (EIFS1) color, refer to Section 07240. 

11. (C11): SW #7055, “Enduring Bronze”, Semi-Gloss Epoxy. 

12. (C12): SW #7006, “Extra White”, Semi-Gloss Epoxy 

13. (C13): SW #6898, “Social Butterfly”, Satin, Color match for (EIFS2). 

14. (C14): Clear Finish, Polyurethane Satin, Wood Doors. 


A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one 

another, with factory-applied primers and with the substrates indicated under conditions of 

service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's specified paint material of the various coating types 

that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint 

material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable. 


09900 -3


C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 

1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the 

following: 

a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for 

Architectural Coatings. 

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, 

Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added 

at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

2.04 MIXING 

A. Mix and thin materials according to manufacturer's instructions without modification. Use 

premixed paints insofar as possible. Thin only as permitted by manufacturer's label instructions, 

and avoid unnecessary thinning. 

B. Primer Tint: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when 

multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish 

coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 


A. Accessory Materials: Sealers, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically 

indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. 

B. Patching Material: Latex filler. 

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. 



A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, 

for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in 

PDCA P4. 

1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and 

surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly clean and dry. 

2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions 

within a particular area. 

B. Coordination of Work: Examine factory finished and primed surfaces to be painted, and verify 

compatibility of existing material with paint to be applied. 

1. Report incompatible or unsuitable materials immediately that may potentially affect proper 

application. 


A. Protection: Protect surfaces not being painted concurrently, or surfaces not to be painted, 

property of Owner, and finished Work of other trades. 

1. Remove device plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and similar removable 

items before painting. Reinstall items after final coat of paint has dried. 

2. Apply masking over UL labels and other items that cannot be removed before painting 

surface. 

3. Cover floors and fixed equipment with drop cloths. 

4. Remove protective coverings and masking when painting of surfaces is complete. 

3.03 PREPARATION OF NEW SURFACES 

A. General: 

1. Clean and prepare surfaces according to paint manufacturer's written instructions for 

specific substrate. 


09900 -4


2. Mildew Removal: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate 

and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 

3. Apply paint only to surfaces which are thoroughly dry, clean, and free of dust and properly 

prepared to receive intended finish. 

B. Concrete: Remove dirt, scale, powder, laitance, parting compounds, oil and grease. For cast-inplace 

work, allow at least 14 days (after forms are removed) before starting work. 

1. Removal of stains caused by weathering or corroding metals: Wash with sodium 

metasilicate solution after thoroughly wetting with potable water and allow to dry. Remove 

oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. 

2. Filling surface pock marks and air holes: Fill with an approved exterior latex base prime 

and fill material. Thoroughly brush or rub over surface. Let dry for not less than 24 hours 

before painting. 

3. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds 

that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Concrete Masonry Units: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, efflorescence or powder. 

1. Removal of stains caused by weathering or corroding metals: Wash with sodium 

metasilicate solution after thoroughly wetting with potable water and allow to dry. 

2. Thoroughly brush or rub specified block filler over concrete masonry units to fill all pock 

marks, air holes and other surface imperfections. Rub excess filler off surfaces and allow 

filler to dry for not less than 24 hours before painting. 

3. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds 

that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 

D. Unprimed Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, rust, and other 

foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's 

recommendations. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or 

sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Immediately apply prime coat. 

E. Shop Primed Steel and Iron Surfaces: Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that 

have been damaged. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make 

touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. 

F. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated 

from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote 

adhesion of subsequently applied paints. 

G. Aluminum: Remove surface contamination by steam, high pressure water, or solvent washing. 

Apply specified primer. 

H. Fiber Cement Siding and Trim: Sand factory primed surfaces, as necessary to remove surface 

defects. Wipe off surfaces to remove dust and dirt. 

1. Fill voids and nail holes with putty after installation. Sand filler smooth, level with surface. 

2. Prime cut edges and cutouts with specified primer. Touch-up bare spots in factory primer 

as necessary. 

I. Wood Products to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and minor grit prior to prime and 

subsequent coats. Spot coat knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Prior to its 

installation, apply backprime to exterior and interior woodwork as specified. Fill nail holes and 

fine cracks after primer has dried, sand filler smooth, level with surface. 

J. Wood Products to Receive Clear Finish: Sand, as necessary to remove surface defects, and 

remove dust. 

1. After stain is applied, set and fill exposed fastener heads with matching color filler. Sand 

smooth and level with surface, when dry. 

2. Back-prime non-exposed surfaces with sealer. 

3. Note: Seal top and bottom edges of wood doors with 2 coats of sealer. 


09900 -5


K. Gypsum Wallboard: Fill minor irregularities in gypsum board surface with joint compound. Sand 

smooth, level with surface, when dry. Avoid raising nap of paper. Remove dust prior to painting. 

L. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Prepare metal surfaces as specified for steel, galvanized 

metal, aluminum, as applicable to type of material scheduled to be painted. 


A. Apply materials according to manufacturer's instructions. Apply each coat at rate recommended 

by manufacturer for the type of surface and with a dry film thickness not less than that 

recommended. 

B. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. If undercoats or other conditions show through 

topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. 

C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is 

applied. 

D. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior 

to applying next coat. 

3.05 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK 

A. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. 

1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, 

hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment 

occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas. 


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from 

Project site. 

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by 

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of 

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, and leave in an undamaged 

condition. 

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced painted surfaces. 

3.07 PAINTING SCHEDULES - GENERAL 

A. Painting schedules outline the primary paint systems required. For substrates and conditions 

not scheduled, provide paint systems recommended by paint manufacturers. Submit proposed 

paint material product data for approval. 

B. Location and colors related to paint systems specified herein are indicated on Drawings. 

C. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 

1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. 

2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. 


09900 -6


3.08 PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULE Indicated as (PS#) 

EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS 

PS-1: Concrete and Concrete Block; Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish. 

Primer: 1 coat, SW: “Loxon” Block Surfacer, A24W200. 

Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial High-Bild Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss, B71 Series. 

PS-2: Fiber Cement Siding; Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish. 

Primer: 1 coat, SW: “Loxon” Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300. 


PS-3: Fiber Cement Siding; Satin Finish. 

Primer: 1 coat, SW: “Loxon” Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300. 

Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic, Eg-Shel, B66-660. 

PS-4: Steel / Galvanized Steel; Semi-Gloss Finish. 

Primer: 1 coat, SW: Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310. 

Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic, Semi-Gloss, B66-650. 

PS-5: Steel / Galvanized Steel; Gloss Finish. 


Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic, Gloss, B66-600. 

PS-6: Steel / Galvanized Steel; Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish. 

Primer: 1 coat, Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310. 


PS-7: Exterior Wood Sheathing; Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish. 

Primer: 1 coat, SW: Multi-Purpose Latex Primer, B51-8000. 

Finish: 2 coat, SW: Pro Industrial High-Bild Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss, B71 Series. 

Exterior Paint System Notes: 

1. Gas Piping: Paint exterior gas piping that runs on face of walls or exposed to view, the 

color of the surrounding substrate. Paint gas piping on roof, (C7) “Bee” unless local 

code requires another color. 

INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS 

PS-15: Gypsum Board; Satin Finish. 

Primer: 1 coat, ProMar 200 Interior Latex Primer, B28W8200. 

Finish: 2 coats, SW: ColorAccents Interior Latex Satin, Y38T-154. 

PS-16: HM Frames and Doors; Satin Finish. 

Primer: 1 coat, Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310. 


PS-17: Steel, Dry Fall, Flat Finish. 


Finish: 2 coats, SW: Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fall, Flat Back, B42B00081. 

PS-18: Wood, Paint, Satin Finish. 

Primer: 1 coat, SW: Multi-Purpose Latex Primer, B51-8000. 


PS-19: Wood, Clear, Satin Finish. 

Finish: 3 coats, Minwax: “Polycrylic” Water-Based Protective Finish, Satin. 



09900 -7




SECTION 09960 - FIELD APPLIED HIGH PERFORMACE COATING 

A. Field Applied, High Performance Paint System. 


A. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA): 

1. AAMA 2605: Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for 

Superior Performing High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and 

Panels. 

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

1. ASTM D1400: Standard Test Method for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film 

Thickness of Nonconductive Coatings Applied to a Nonferrous Metal Base. 

2. ASTM D1654: Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens 

Subjected to Corrosive Environments. 

3. ASTM D2244: Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences 

from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 

4. ASTM D4214: Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior 

Paint Films. 

C. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 

1. SSPC-SP 1: Joint Surface Preparation Standard SSPC-SP 1: Solvent Cleaning. 


A. Air dried, fluoropolymer paint system, field applied over an existing aluminum storefront and 

doors. 

1. System to include labor and materials for surface cleaning, preparation, and application of 

the field applied high performance paint system. 


A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's published product data on all exterior coating products 

including physical properties and performance characteristics. 

B. Samples for Verification: For field applied paint system in color and gloss of finish coat 

indicated. 

1. Submit (2) samples approximately 4” x 6” on aluminum substrate. 

C. Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures, and 

substrate conditions requiring special attention. 

D. Manufacturer's maintenance instructions. 


A. Exterior coating materials shall be applied evenly in accordance with manufacturer's directions 

and written specifications. 

1. Finish surfaces to conform to AAMA 2605, 4.2. "Coating shall be visibly free from flow 

lines, streaks, blisters or other surface imperfections in the dry-film state on exposed 

surfaces when observed at a distance of 10 feet from the metal surface and inspected at 

an angle of 90 degrees to the surface". 

2. The coating shall be applied to meet the dry-film thickness specification of the 

manufacturer and per AAMA 2605, 4.3. 

B. All work is subject to acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor will be required to correct Work 

that does not comply with the specifications and the Manufacturer’s requirements. 

04-27-11 FIELD APPLIED HIGH PERFORMACE COATING 

09960 -1


A. Applicator Qualifications: Coating manufacturer's approved Applicator who is equipped and 

trained for application of the specified coating system required for this Project, with a record of 

successful in-service performance. 

1. Pre-qualified Applicator: Stuart Dean Company, Inc. www.stuartdean.com 

2. Other proposed applicators for the work of this section must submit a successful record of 

completion for projects of the same scale and nature, including the type of coating system 

specified herein, to be considered qualified for approval. 

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Conform to applicable federal, state, and local regulatory requirements. 

B. Products must meet current local and federal VOC requirements. 

C. Flammable Liquids: Observe regulations regarding flammable liquids such as posting "No 

Smoking" signs. Allow no open flames, welding, or other ignition sources in the work area. 

D. Conform to all applicable laws, codes, and regulations for disposal of all materials, debris, and 

containers. 


A. Deliver products to site in Manufacturer's original sealed containers with labels intact and 

legible. 

1. Container labels shall include manufacturer's name, type of material, brand name, lot 

number, brand code and color designation. 

B. Store materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45° F and a maximum of 90° F, in 

ventilated area and as required by manufacturer's storage instructions. 

1. Store flammable materials to protect from fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 

C. Remove all materials and empty containers from the area of work at the close of each day. 


A. Do not apply coatings to wet or damp surfaces, or when relative humidity is outside the range 

required by the product manufacturer or when rain is imminent. 

B. Minimum Application Temperatures: 50° F. unless required otherwise by manufacturer's 

instructions. Minimum temperature to be maintained at a minimum of 24 hours prior to and 48 

hours following application. 

1.09 WARRANTY 

A. Coating Warranty: Coating Applicator's warranty in which Applicator agrees to repair finish or 

replace coated items that demonstrate deterioration of field applied finish within warranty period 

indicated. 

1. Exposed Coating: Deterioration includes but is not limited to: 

a. Color fading in excess of 5 Delta E Hunter units per ASTM D 2244. 

b. Peeling, checking, or cracking of coating adhesion to metal. 

c. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 per ASTM D 4214, when tested per Method D 659. 

d. Corrosion of substrate in excess of a No. 6 on cut edges and a No. 8 on field 

surfaces, when measured per ASTM D 1654. 

2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers: PPG Industries, Inc. www.coraflon.com 


09960 -2



A. Fluoropolymer Coating, AAMA 2605: Field applied, two component fluoropolymer finish 

consisting of a 100 percent FEVE resin component and an aliphatic isocyanate curing agent 

component. 

1. Product: PPG, Coraflon ADS. 

2. Color: No. ADS9833030, “Anodized Aluminum”. 

3. Dry Film Thickness, ASTM D 1400: 2.0-5.0 mil primer coat plus 1.5-2.0 mil color coat, 3.5 

mil total, minimum thickness. 

4. Properties: Product designed for field application containing uniformly dispersed pigments 

in a homogeneous coating with good flow properties; capable of air-drying or curing free of 

discoloration. 

B. Materials shall not be altered except for reducing in accordance with the recommendations of 

the manufacturer. 

2.03 PAINT SCHEDULE 

A. (PS30): Existing Aluminum Storefront and Doors: 

1. Prime Coat: PPG Bonding Primer. 

2. Finish Topcoat: PPG Coraflon ADS - high performance, fluoropolymer, VOC compliant 

topcoat finish system. 

a. Color (C20): No. ADS9833030, “Anodized Aluminum”. 



A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, 

for compliance with requirements for paint application. 

1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and 

surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly clean and dry. 

2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 

3.02 PREPARATION - SURFACES TO RECEIVE PAINT FINISH 

A. Existing Surface Appointments: Remove or mask hardware, fixtures, trim, escutcheons, and 

other fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. Store and protect from damage and 

reinstall after completion of the work. 

B. Surfaces: Clean all exterior surfaces to be coated of all dirt, dust, oil, grease, oxidized, loose 

and scaling paint, mildew, rust on metal and other foreign matter. Do not apply coating over 

existing joint sealants. To the extent possible, apply the coating system into the joint slot where 

sealants have been removed before the application of new joint sealants as applicable. 

C. Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer's application instructions. 

1. Solvent clean, per SSPC SP-1, substrate to remove any contamination that may be 

present. 

2. Abrade substrate to remove gloss and to obtain a minimum surface profile of 1.0 mil for 

adhesion of the paint system by hand sanding with 80 – 120 grit sandpaper. 

a. Care should be taken not to abrade the surface too aggressively as surface defects 

may be visible when coated. 


A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's application instructions. 

B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not clean and dry. Allow applied coats to dry as 

required before next coat is applied. 

C. Batch-mix multiple containers of a single color to assure a continuous balance of ingredients. 


09960 -3


D. Prior to coating, solvent wipe substrate to remove dust and residual contamination. Apply primer 

following cleaning as quickly as possible. 

E. Primer: Apply one coat of Coraflon ADS PVDF Bonding ADS510/ADS512 @ 2.0 – 5.0 mils 

DFT. Allow primer to cure 6 to 8 hours minimum @ 72° F before applying topcoat. 

F. Topcoat: Apply one coat Coraflon ADS topcoat @ 1.5 – 2.0 mils DFT. per instructions on the 

respective products technical data bulletin. 

G. Full cure of applied coating will be achieved in three to five days. 


A. Inspect field work upon initial completion. Correct all non complying work as required. 


A. Protect all adjacent materials and surfaces including landscaping from damage during work 

including cleaning, preparation, and application of exterior coating materials. Notify Site 

manager of any on-site or adjacent property such as parked vehicles, bicycles, landscaping, etc, 

which may be damaged from coating operations. Provide protection of grade-level horizontal 

surface to the greatest extent possible. 

B. Replace all materials in like kind that are damaged during work of this section. 

C. Touch-up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces that occur as a result of the work of 

this section. 

3.06 CLEANING 

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from 

Project site. 

B. After completing coating application, remove spills and overspray from adjacent surfaces. 

C. Legally dispose of debris in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 



09960 -4


SECTION 10010 – MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 



A. Fire Department Lock Box. 

B. Pre-cast Concrete Splash Blocks. 



B. Product Data: Submit product data for each product specified. 


2.01 RECESSED FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX 

A. Fire Department Lock Box: Recessed mounted, heavy duty key box and recessed mounting kit. 

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Knox Company; Phoenix, AZ; www.knoxbox.com 

2. Model: 3200 Series with, recessed mounting kit (RMK). 

3. Color: Dark Bronze. 

2.01 SURFACE MOUNTED FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX 

A. Fire Department Lock Box: Surface mounted, heavy duty key box. 

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Knox Company; Phoenix, AZ; www.knoxbox.com 

2. Model: 3200 Series. 

3. Color: Dark Bronze. 

2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCKS 

A. Provide precast concrete splash blocks at downspout locations as indicated on Drawings or as 

directed by Owner’s Site Representative. 

1. Provide splash blocks comparable to the following units: Standard concrete color. 

a. Aristone Designs; Splash Block SB37. 37” x 18-1/2” x 5”. Tel: 800-369-8118. 

www.aristonedesigns.com/watercat/scuppers.htm 


3.01 INSTALLATION GENERAL 

A. Install specialties according to manufacturer's instructions. Locate as indicated on Drawings. 

B. Install specialties plumb, true and square, in a neat, rigid, and substantial manner. 

C. After installation, clean surfaces. 

3.02 FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX 

A. Surface mount or recessed fire department lock box where indicated on Drawings according to 

manufacturer's installation instructions and at height above grade according to local Fire 

Marshal. 

B. Fire Department Lock Box: Install Lock Box inside RMK shell according to manufacturer's 

installation instructions. 


04-27-11 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 

10010 -1


SECTION 10210 - WALL LOUVERS 



A. Exterior Wall Louvers and accessories. 


A. Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Prepared exterior wall opening. 

B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: Prepared exterior wall opening. 

C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 


A. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; Air Movement and Control 

Association International, Inc. 

B. ASTM B 209 - .Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 



B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air 

velocity, design free area, materials and finishes. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type 

specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 


A. Coordinate work of this section with installation of mechanical ductwork. 

1.07 WARRANTY 


B. Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and failure of 

connections. 



A. Wall Louvers: 

1. Airline Louvers, Nystrom Building Products; Product LSA4W38: www.nystrom.com. 

B. Comparable products from the following manufacturers: 

1. The Airolite Company: www.airolite.com. 

2. Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com. 


04-27-11 WALL LOUVERS 

10210 -1


2.02 LOUVERS 

A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories; 

AMCA Certified under AMCA 511. 

1. Wind Load Resistance: Design to resist positive and negative wind load of 25 psf without 

damage or permanent deformation. 

B. Stationary Louvers: Horizontal blade, extruded aluminum construction. 

1. Free Area: 54 percent, minimum. 

2. Blades: Straight. 

3. Frame: 4 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and mechanically fastened, 

with continuous recessed caulking channel each side. 

4. Metal Thickness: Frame 0.081 inch; blades 0.081 inch. 

5. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard prime coat finish for field painting under Section 09900. 

6. Types: Verify with Mechanical Drawings. 

a. (LVR1): Intake Louvers 

b. (LVR2): Exhaust Louvers 

7. Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers. 


A. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209. 

B. Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of steel, 0.063 inch diameter wire, 1/2 inch open weave, 

diagonal design. 

C. Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh. 


A. Screen Frame: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced corners; removable, screw 

attached; installed on inside face of louver frame. 

B. Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel. 

C. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame, formed to required shape, single length in one 

piece per location. 

D. Sealant: A type, as specified in Section 07900. 



A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions 

are as instructed by the louver manufacturer. 

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. 


A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Install louvers level and plumb. 

C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion 

of moisture to exterior. 

D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners. 

E. Install perimeter sealant and backing rod in accordance with Section 07900. 


10210 -2


3.04 CLEANING 

A. Strip protective finish coverings. 

B. Clean surfaces and components. 



10210 -3


SECTION 10263 - CORNER GUARDS 



A. Surface-mounted wall corner guards. 


A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 

B. Section 09720 - Wall Covering. 


2.01 SURFACE MOUNTED CORNER GUARDS 

A. (WCG1) Wall Corner Guard: 2” x 2” x 48” long, 16 gauge, 304 stainless steel with radiused top 

edge. 

1. Locations and configuration as indicated on the Drawings. 


A. Provide appropriate adhesive and accessories as required to properly complete corner guard 

installation. 



A. Verify that walls are in proper condition to receive installation of corner guards. 

1. Surface mounted corner guards must be installed after wall finishes have been completed. 


A. Install corner guards in compliance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 

B. Surface Mounted Corner Guards: Fasten directly to finished wall surfaces using adhesive. 


04-27-11 CORNER GUARDS 

10263 -1


SECTION 10445 – DOOR AND ROOM SIGNS 



A. Wall mounted handicap restroom signs. 

B. Door mounted restroom signs. 


A. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and 

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. 


2.01 SIGN SUPPLIER 

A. Door and Room Signs in this section to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin 

City Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package. 

2.02 SIGN UNITS 




651-735-2200 

A. Handicap Restroom Wall Signs: 

1. (SIGN1): 6” x 9”, Handicap Wall Sign, black sign with engraved white letters and 

symbols and Braille coding. Product # SG 2521B, Women. 

2. (SIGN2): 6” x 9”, Handicap Wall Sign, black sign with engraved white letters and 

symbols and Braille coding. Product # SG 2511B, Men. 

3. Provide international and accessible symbols for men and women on toilet room signage. 

4. Mount center line of sign 60 inches above finished floor adjacent to the latch side of the 

restroom doors. 

B. Restroom Door Signs: 

1. (SIGN3): 4” x 16”, Door Sign, black sign with engraved white letters. Product # SG 2025B, 

“Women”. 

2. (SIGN4): 4” x 16”, Door Sign, black sign with engraved white letters. Product # SG 2015B, 

“Men”. 

3. Mount on restroom doors in location as indicated on Drawings. 

C. Mounting Tape: Double sided foam mounting tape. 



A. Verify that surfaces to receive signs have been finished, and that finishes are dry and correctly 

cured. 


A. Install room and door signs in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 

B. Install signs with double sided mounting tape in locations as indicated on Drawings. 

C. Locate signs in accordance with approved ADAAG requirements. 


04-27-11 SIGNS 

10445 -1




A. Locker units with hinged doors. 

1. Indicated on Drawings as: (Lockers). 


SECTION 10500 - LOCKERS 

A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers. 


A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or 



A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage. 



A. Lockers: 

1. ASI Storage Solutions Inc; Product Specialty Traditional Wall Mount: www.asilockers.com 

2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 and equipment cutsheets. 


A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M SS Grade 33/230, with G60/Z180 coating, stretcher leveled; 

to the following minimum thicknesses: 

1. Body and Shelf: 24 gage, 0.024 inch. 

2. Door Frame: 16 gage, 0.060 inch. 

3. Hinges: 16 gage. 

B. Accessories for Locker: 45" coat rod mounted under lockers. 

2.03 LOCKER UNITS 

A. Width: 12 inches. 

B. Depth: 18 inches. 

C. Height: 12 inches. 

D. Configuration: Double tier. 2 units high, 4 units wide. 

E. Mounting: Surface mounted. 

F. Ventilation Method: Door louvers. 

G. Frames: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body, resilient gaskets 

and latching for quiet operation. 

H. Number Plates: Provide rectangular shaped aluminum plates. Form numbers 1/2 inch high of 

block font style, in contrasting color. 

I. Form recess for operating handle and locking device. 

J. Finish edges smooth without burrs. 

04-27-11 LOCKERS 

10500 -1


2.04 FINISHING 

A. Clean, degrease, and neutralize metal; prime and finish with one coat of baked enamel paint. 

1. Color: Gray #25. 



A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Install lockers plumb and square. 

C. Mount bottom of lockers at 60 inches a.f.f. 

C. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 lb. 

D. Install accessories. 

3.02 CLEANING 

A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces. 


04-27-11 LOCKERS 

10500 -2


SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 



A. Fire Extinguishers. 

B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets. 

C. Mounting Brackets. 


A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association. 

B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 


A. Conform to NFPA 10. 

B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose 

specified and indicated. 



B. Product Data: Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing 

mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, 

cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. 

C. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. 


A. Coordinate size and locations of fire extinguisher cabinets with wall depths. 



A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories: 

1. JL Industries, Inc. www.jlindustries.com. 

2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. www.larsensmfg.com. 

3. Amerex Corporation. www.amerex-fire.com. 


2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 

A 

Wall Mounted Portable Fire Extinguishers: UL listed and bearing a UL label for type, rating, and 

classification and pressure indicating gauge as follows: 

B. (FE1): Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical 

1. UL Rating: 4A-80B:C. 

2. Capacity: 10 lbs. 

3. Manufacturer’s standard steel container. Red powder coat finish. 

C. (FE2): Class K Wet Chemical 

1. UL Rating: 2A:K. 

2. Capacity: 1.8 gallon/ 6 Liter. 

3. Manufacturer’s standard stainless steel container. 

04-27-11 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 

10523 -1


2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 

A. (FE1 CAB): Cabinet Mounted Portable Fire Extinguishers: Type (FE1) extinguisher. 

B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed. 

1. Trim: Returned to wall surface, with 2-1/2 inch projection, 1-3/4 inch wide rolled face. 

2. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim 

and door stiles. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. 

3. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal. 

4. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 

degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch. 

5. Door Glazing: Full glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick heat strengthened. Set in resilient channel 

gasket glazing. 

6. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors. 

7. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Manufacturer’s standard finish to accept field 

painting under Section 09900. 

8. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel. 


A. Wall Brackets: Provide metal wall brackets with strap and fasteners, of proper size for type and 

capacity of extinguishers, and as required for installation conditions. Extinguisher hooks are not 

acceptable to hang extinguishers. 



A. Install fire extinguishers, cabinets and mounting brackets in accordance with manufacturer’s 

written instructions, in locations indicated on the drawings and in compliance with requirements 

of authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Cabinets: Install fire extinguisher cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated. 

1. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 

2. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films and clean interior and exterior 

surfaces. 

C. Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to structure, square and plumb. Hang fire extinguishers on 

brackets and use straps to prevent free swinging. 

1. Mounting Height: Typically mount bracket at 48” A.F.F. If mounted unit projects greater 

than 4” out from face of wall, mount bottom of unit no greater than 27” A.F.F. 

3.02 SCHEDULES 

A. Field locate extinguishers: Maximum travel distance to extinguisher from any point in the 

building of 75 feet. 

B. Check, recharge and reuse existing extinguishers that are functional. Furnish new extinguishers 

as required. 

C. Add extinguishers as required by local fire authority. 


04-27-11 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 

10523 -2


SECTION 10536 - AWNINGS 



A. Awnings furnished as part of the overall exterior signage package. 

1. Aluminum framing and fittings. 

2. Indicated on Drawings as: (Fabric Awnings). 


A. ASTM B 210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless 

Tubes. 

B. ASTM B 210M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless 

Tubes (Metric). 

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 

A. Awning materials, assembly and attachments to resist snow loads, positive and negative wind 

design loads of 40 lb/sq ft at any point without damage or permanent set. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Awnings: 

1. Lawrence Sign, 945 Pierce Butler Route, St. Paul, MN 55104: 651-488-6711, 800-998- 

8901. 

2. Federal Heath: 1128 Beville Road, Suite E, Daytona Beach, FL 32114: 386-255-1901, 

ext. 225. 

2.02 ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEM 

A. Framing: Rectangular and square, tubing, conforming to ASTM B 210 (ASTM B 210M). 

B. Fittings: Elbows, T-shapes, wall brackets; cast aluminum. 

C. Mounting: Brackets and flanges, with aluminum inserts for embedding into masonry. 

D. Splice Connectors: Concealed spigot; cast aluminum. 

E. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk stainless steel screws or bolts; consistent with design 

of system. 

F. Finish: Mill Finish or clear anodized. 

2.03 COVERING MATERIALS 

A. Sunbrella by Glen Raven Custom Fabrics. 336-221-2211. www.sunbrella.com. 

B. Solution Dyed Acrylic: 9.25 oz/sq yd, resistant to ultra-violet and color degradation, mildew and 

water resistant 

1. Sunbrella Fabric No. 4608/6008 “Jet Black” with 8” x 8” squares in Pantone #116 coated 

yellow. Refer to Drawings for exact configuration. 

C. Lacing: Woven nylon. 

2.04 FABRICATION - FRAMING 

A. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site. 

B. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. 

04-27-11 AWNINGS 

10536 -1


C. Exposed Fastenings: Unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except 

where specifically noted otherwise. 

D. Supply components required for anchorage of framing. Fabricate anchors and related 

components of same material and finish as framing, except where specifically noted otherwise. 

2.05 FABRICATION - COVERING 

A. Manufacture covering in one piece wherever possible, sized and configured to suit framing. 

B. Form covering heading of triple thickness 2 inches wide, double fold bottom hem 2 inches wide. 

C. Prepare covering with grommets for attachment to framing 6 inches on center. 

D. Turn seam edges and lock stitch. 



A. Verify that wall substrate anchors are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 


A. Supply items required to be embedded in masonry with setting templates, to appropriate 

Sections. 

3.03 INSTALLATION - FRAMING 

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 

3.04 INSTALLATION - COVERING 

A. Install covering over framing members, stretched taut without creases or folds. 

B. Attach covering and fasten securely. 


04-27-11 AWNINGS 

10536 -2


SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES 



A. Toilet Accessories. 

B. Installation of Owner Furnished accessories. 


A. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry for wood blocking. 

B. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers. 

C. Section 08800 – Glazing for un-framed glass mirrors. 


E. Section 09300 - Tile. 


A. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and 

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. 

B. ASTM A 240/A 240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless 

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 


A. Factory-apply strippable protective vinyl coating to sight-exposed surfaces after finishing of 

products; ship products in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. 

B. Storage and Protection: Store products in manufacturer's protective packaging until installation. 

1.05 WARRANTY 


B. Manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in product workmanship and materials. 


2.01 TOILET ACCESSORY SUPPLIER 

A. Toilet accessories in this section that are not indicated as Owner Furnished to be furnished by 

the General Contactor through Twin City Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and 

Hardware Package. 





651-735-2200 

A. ASI-American Specialties, Inc.; 441 Saw Mill River Road, Yonkers NY 10701. 

www.americanspecialties.com 


A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 18-8 alloy. 

04-27-11 TOILET ACCESSORIES 

10810 -1


2.04 TOILET ACCESSORIES 

A. The following toilet accessories are to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin City 

Hardware as part of the current Hardware Package. 

B. (MIR1) Framed Mirrors: 1/2” x 1/2" x 1/2", 20 gauge, stainless steel channel framed mirror with 

1/4" thick tempered mirror glass. 

1. ASI Model 0620. 

2. Size: 24” w. x 36” h. 

3. Comparable product from the other acceptable manufacturers. 

C. (SND) Sanitary Napkin Disposal: 22 gauge, 304 stainless steel cabinet with access door and 

removable waste container. 1.5 gal. capacity. 

1. ASI Model 0473-A. 

2. Comparable product from the other acceptable manufacturers. 

D. (GB) Grab Bars: ASI Series 3200. 

1. (GB1): 18” long. 

2. (GB2): 36” long. 

3. (GB3): 42” long. 

E. (DCS) Diaper Changing Station: Koala, Model KD-200, wall mounted, horizontal. 

2.05 OWNER FURNISHED TOILET ACCESSORIES 

The following items are furnished by the Owner for Contractor installation: 

A. (SDISP) Soap Dispensers: Ecolab, Digitizer Handsoap Dispenser. 

B. (PTD) Paper Towel Cabinet: 

1. Tork, Intuition Hand Towel Roll Dispenser. 

OR 

2. Tork, Elevation H1 Matic Towel Dispenser. 

C. (TPD) Toilet Paper Holder: Tork, Bath Tissue Jumbo Roll Twin Dispenser. 



A. Verification of Conditions: 

1. Prepared openings are sized and located in accordance with shop drawings. 

2. Reinforcement and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in accordance with 

shop drawings. 

B. Installer's Examination: 

1. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have been 

corrected is prohibited. 

2. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of 

conditions. 


A. Install toilet accessories in locations as indicated on Drawings. 

B. Install toilet accessories plumb and level in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's 

written installation instructions. 

C. Locate toilet accessories at heights as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with 

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 


10810 -2


3.03 CLEANING 

A. Remove manufacturer's protective vinyl coating from sight-exposed surfaces 24 hours before 

final inspection. 

B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 



10810 -3


SECTION 12493 - WINDOW SHADES 



A. Manually operated roller shades, furnished and installed by Owner. 

1. Indicated on Drawings as: (Window Shades). 


A. Manually operated, roller shade system designed, developed and manufactured as a totally 

integrated unit complete with supports, operating system, fascia components, and fabric shade 

cloth. 

1. Mounting: Ceiling mount, regular roll with fascia. 



1. ASTM E84, "Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". 

B. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA): 

1. NFPA 701 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Resistant Textiles and Films. 



B. Product Data: Submit the following. 

1. Manufacturer's written installation instructions. 

C. Warranty: Copy of twenty-five year fit-for-use warranty on shade cloth and mechanical 

components. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's qualified installers experienced in the installation of 

specified components similar in complexity to those required for this Project. 

B. Shade Cloth: Shade cloth must be FR rated under NFPA-701 Vertical Burn Test and be Class 

rated in accordance with ASTM E-84. 

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Delivery: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's 

identification. 

B. Storage: Store materials in a cool dry place. Protect from damage and from the elements. 


A. Environmental Requirements: 

1. Maintain ambient temperature above 60 degrees F during and at all times after installation. 

1.08 WARRANTY 

A. If any component of the hardware or shade cloth system fails in normal operation, it shall be 

repaired or replaced under the terms of a factory return warranty for a period of twenty-five (25) 

years. Operating chain is not included in this warranty. 



A. MechoShade Systems, Inc.; as distributed by Tegan Marketing, Inc. 763-475-1340 or 800-510- 

5836. 

04-27-11 WINDOW SHADES 

12493 -1



A. Manually Operated Roller Shade System: MechoShade 5 consisting of the following 

components: 

1. Brackets and operating assembly consisting of 1/8" steel and molded Delrin. Bead chain 

drive operated Delrin drive bracket. 

2. Stainless Steel Chain: 90 lb. test, and hold-down brackets. 

3. Provide upper and lower stop limits. 

4. Shade Mounting System: extruded 6063T6 aluminum tube with a wall thickness of .100" 

with asymmetrically shaped channels in which a matching snap-on vinyl spline can be 

mounted. 

a. Spline and shade to be easily removable and replaceable without disassembling the 

hardware. 

b. Attachment of the shade band shall not be with adhesives or staples. 

5. Shades to be full width of windows as indicated. Splitting shades within one window will not 

be allowed. 

a. Provide lift assist mechanism for shades in excess of 5 pounds. 

b. Provide shade cloth clearance of 1/4" on idle end and 9/16" on the drive end. 

B. Shade Fabric: EuroTwill Shade Cloth; Series 6000. 

1. Fabric Color: No. 6012, “Charcoal”. 

2. Fabric to pass Class I Flame Spread per ASTM E-84 and large or small Vertical Burn 

Requirements of NFPA 701. 


A. Aluminum Fascia Units: Manufacturer's standard “L” shaped, snap-on, extruded aluminum 

fascia units as follows: 

1. MechoShade SnapLoc Fascia, for regular roll installation mounted on front of shade roll. 

2. End Caps: Provide pre-finished end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of 

roller shade brackets. 

3. Fascia Finish: Both fascia units and end caps as applicable to be factory finished. 

a. Color: Clear anodized to match window frames. 

B. Chain Tension Pulley: Manufacturer's standard chain tension pulley. 

1. Color: Clear anodized. 

C. Provide mounting brackets and other components required for complete installation. 


A. Fabricate shades square with a snap-on spline for mechanical fastening directly to mounting 

tube. Staples and tape are not allowed. 

B. Provide a weighted hembar, heat sealed within the shade. No loose hembar will be allowed. 

C. Cut shade cloth by means of an edge-sealing hot-knife. 

D. Fabricate shade system with set stop positions at upper and lower limit points. 



A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed 

and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 

1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable 

to installer. 

2. Beginning the installation indicates the installer accepts the substrate. 


12493 -2



A. Coordinate with General Contractor for access to site and installation of window shades. 

A. Install shade units in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 

B. Install shades regular roll, with shade and fascia level and square on front and back of shade. 

C. Place lower shade limit so the shade stops 1 inch above window sill. Place upper limit at the 

point the hem bar meets the roll. 

D. Shade fabric to hang flat without buckling or distortion. The edges, when trimmed, should hang 

straight without curling or raveling. 

D. Mount chain tension pulley on window sill. 


A. Adjust and balance system for smooth operation. 

B. Instruct the Owner’s personnel on the proper operating procedures and maintenance of the 

system. 

3.04 CLEANING 

A. Clean all visible surfaces and repair or replace any damaged items. 

B. Remove all debris caused by this installation. 



12493 -3

SECTION 15010 – MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 

PART 1. - GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. General and Supplementary conditions within Division 0 and 1 are hereby incorporated 

and become part of these Specifications, covering all work in Division 15000, Mechanical. 

B. Before submitting a proposal on the project, the Contractor shall visit the site and 

familiarize themselves with the conditions and limitations affecting Division 15000 work. 

No additional costs to the Owner shall be allowed for items verifiable during site visits. 

C. Contractor shall provide sufficient workers and materials to keep pace with the 

construction schedule. Contractor shall place orders for equipment such that job progress 

is not slowed due to late delivery and shall confirm delivery dates with suppliers. 

D. The Contractor shall provide office space and storage for materials and equipment 

supplied as required. Location shall be as directed by the General Contractor or the 

Architect. 

E. Upon completion of the work shown and specified under Division 15000 and prior to final 

close out of the Project, the Contractor shall verify in writing that all systems are 100% 

complete and operating properly. This notification shall include copies of all 

Subcontractor notifications. Any system not operating properly at final inspection shall be 

immediately repaired and demonstrated to the Engineer. 

F. Rebates or credits provided by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall be 

directly credited to the Owner. 

1.2 MECHANICAL PLANS 

A. The Mechanical Drawings and Specifications shall form a set of Plans for the mechanical 

work. Neither the Drawings nor the Specifications shall be complete without the other. 

Any item shown on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications shall be considered as 

shown and specified on both. 

B. Any questions regarding the intent of the Drawings or Specifications shall be brought to 

the Engineer’s attention as soon as possible. If direction from the Engineer cannot be 

obtained due to time or communication limitations, the greater quantity, higher quality or 

condition most favorable to the Owner shall be assumed. Contractor shall provide all 

labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for a complete and 

operational mechanical installation, as shown on the Drawings and called for in these 

Specifications. 

C. Drawings: 

1. Contractor shall become familiar with Architectural, Structural and Electrical 

Drawings and Specifications. Coordinate all shafts, chases, furred spaces, 

suspended ceilings, locations of equipment, etc. 

2. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate routing of all piping and ductwork within 

soffits provided by the General Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall 

provide all soffiting required to cover installations not coordinated or specifically 

approved by the Architect and Engineer. 

06/25/09 MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 

15010-1

3. Mechanical Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate 

location only. Placement of mechanical equipment and devices shall not interfere 

with locations or clearances of other trades’ materials or equipment. 

4. Dimensions given on the Drawings shall take precedence over scaled 

dimensions. Dimensions, whether given in figures or scaled, shall be verified in 

the field. 

5. Contractor shall verify that the equipment to be furnished under Contract will fit 

within the available space. 

6. Notify the Architect and Engineer of any discrepancies between Electrical, 

Architectural and Mechanical Drawings. 

7. Verify items such as door swings, window locations, casework, etc., before 

installing any mechanical equipment or devices. All devices conflicting with other 

trade’s work due to lack of coordination shall be relocated at no additional cost to 

the Owner. 

D. The following terms used in the Drawings and Specifications shall be defined as follows: 

1. Contractor: Shall mean Mechanical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors. 

2. Work: Shall mean labor and/or materials of the Mechanical Contractor or any of 

their Subcontractors. 

3. Furnish: Shall mean purchase, submit for Engineer approval, coordinate with 

Contract Documents and deliver to site in new, undamaged condition. 

4. Install: Shall mean to schedule for delivery, deliver or have delivered to the site, 

store as directed, protect from damage, set in place, make all necessary final 

connections, test as required and turn over to the Owner in full operating 

condition. 

5. Provide: Shall mean furnish and install. 

6. Connect: Shall mean to bring mechanical service and/or low voltage control 

wiring to equipment, make all final connections, provide all necessary 

miscellaneous materials required and do final check out to ensure proper 

equipment connections. 

E. CAD and Drawing Files: 

1. Mechanical CAD drawings by Engineer of Record for this Project are instruments 

of Engineer of Record for use solely with respect to this Project. During the 

course of the implementation of the Project, and with Engineer of Record 

approval, copies may be obtained of CAD drawings for the preparation of Shop 

Drawings. These CAD drawings shall not be used on other projects, for additions 

to this Project, or for completion of this Project by others. Any revisions, 

additions and/or deletions to these CAD drawings, either intentional or 

unintentional, shall be made at the full risk of the person(s) making such 

revisions, additions and/or deletions. Such person(s) shall hold harmless and 

indemnify Engineer of Record of any and all responsibilities and liabilities. 

2. CAD drawings files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc, shall be 

requested directly from the Architect. 


15010-2

3. The cost for mechanical CAD drawing files, provided in AutoCAD, will be $50.00 

per sheet payable directly to Engineer of Record CAD files will be sent via email 

only. 

1.3 COORDINATION OF DRAWINGS 

A. Contractor shall submit a ¼-inch scale drawing to the Engineer indicating placement of all 

mechanical and electrical systems and equipment. Indicate proposed locations of all 

major equipment and materials, including but not limited to service equipment, exterior 

wall and foundation penetrations, fire-rated wall and floor penetrations, sizes and location 

of required concrete pads and bases, and mechanical/electrical equipment room layouts. 

This effort will require each trade to closely work together to produce a ¼=1’-0” set of 

coordination drawings for each area of the building. 

B. Coordinate scheduling and sequencing required for movement and positioning of large 

equipment into the building with all other Contractors to minimize impact on their work. 

C. This Contractor shall provide any and all input required to complete these drawings. 

1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Materials: 

1. All materials shall be new and of the type and quality specified herein. 

2. Specific materials and equipment specified is intended to establish a minimum 

standard of required quality. Where specified materials and equipment fail to 

meet minimum standards of existing federal, state and local codes and 

ordinances, the governing codes and ordinances shall prevail. 

3. The Contractor shall provide all minor miscellaneous materials necessary for the 

complete mechanical installation. 

4. For materials and equipment specified by description only, the Contractor shall 

provide materials or equipment suitable for the purpose intended. These shall be 

in conformance with all governing codes, these Specifications and normal trade 

practice. 

5. For materials or equipment specified by manufacturer’s name and catalog 

number, the Contractor shall provide the item specified. The Contractor may 

submit materials and equipment for prior approval to the Engineer. 

6. Supply materials and equipment to the site in original packages, containers or 

crates insofar as is practical. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to schedule 

deliveries in accordance with the overall Project schedule. The Contractor shall 

closely coordinate all deliveries with other Contractors. 

7. Provide for proper receipt, handling, storage, and protection from the elements 

for all materials and equipment to be used on this Project so as to effectively 

prevent damage or deterioration. Materials or equipment sustaining damage or 

undue deterioration from any cause whatsoever shall be replaced or repaired by 

Contractor as required by the Engineer. 


15010-3

8. The Contractor shall properly protect all equipment from damage during 

construction. Thoroughly clean all fixtures, equipment and other supplied 

materials. Make all necessary repairs and apply touch up paint as required prior 

to final inspection and contract close out. 

9. All materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. 

(UL). Materials and Equipment shall meet the UL requirements of each standard 

in every case where such a standard has been established for that particular type 

of material. Equipment shall be UL listed as an entire assembly or system. 

B. Prior Approvals 

1. All requests for prior approvals must be received by the Engineer at least seven 

working days prior to bid date. Applications for prior approval shall be considered 

only from Contractors submitting bids on the Project. Contractors shall determine 

whether materials receiving prior approval are actually in accordance with details 

of the Specifications. 

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all deficiencies that may exist from the 

use of substituted products or equipment, including all additional labor and 

materials required to complete the work. All dimensions and characteristics of 

substituted products shall be verified and coordinated with all affected trades and 

Subcontractors. Any required changes or modifications to the work of any other 

trade or Subcontractor incurred due to using accepted substituted products shall 

be coordinated and performed by this Contractor at no additional cost to the 

Owner. 

1.5 WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 

A. Installation of all materials specified herein shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike 

manner by workers experienced and skilled in the trade. Only the best quality 

workmanship will be accepted. 

B. The Contractor shall regularly clean their work area of debris. Removal of all Contractor 

generated debris and rubbish caused by their work shall be at the Contractor’s expense. 

C. Coordination: 

1. Contractor shall give careful consideration to work of other Contractors on the 

Project and shall organize work as detailed in the Contractor’s ¼=1’-0” 

coordination drawings so as to not interfere with or delay the work of other 

trades. 

2. Contractor shall consult all Architectural, Structural and Electrical Drawings and 

Specifications that apply for correlating information. 

3. Conflicts or interference with work of other trades shall be brought to the 

attention of the Engineer, in writing, before installation. 

4. Should the Contractor not follow above procedures and install work that 

interferes with work of other trades, the Contractor shall make all necessary 

changes as directed by Engineer to eliminate the interference or conflict at the 

Contractor’s expense. 


15010-4

1.6 LICENSES, CODES AND FEES 

A. The Contractor shall be a licensed Contractor in the State of which project is being 

constructed. The Contractor shall employ all Licensed Professional Tradesmen required 

for each type of work covered under these Drawings and Specifications. 

B. The Contractor shall procure all necessary certificates and permits and pay all required 

fees. The Contractor shall pay all fees and installation charges by the utility company for 

the permanent services. 

C. Codes and Ordinances: All work and materials shall meet the requirements of national, 

state and local codes and ordinances, in every respect. This requirement shall not relieve 

the Contractor from meeting the requirements of Drawings and Specifications that may 

be in excess of all codes and ordinances and not contrary to them. Following is a partial 

list of governing codes and/or standards. 

1. WBC: Wisconsin Building Code 

2. WMC: Wisconsin Mechanical Code 

3. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code 

4. UPC: Uniform Plumbing Code 

5. NFPA NEC: National Electric Code 

6. UFC: Uniform Fire Code 

7. Building Facility Association, ANSI: Handicapped Code 

8. Applicable Federal Regulations 

9. International Building Code 

10. International Plumbing Code 

11. International Mechanical Code 

12. International Fire Code 

13. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA) 

14. American Standards Association 

15. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 

16. Contractor’s National Association 

D. Inspections: Regular inspections shall be requested by the Contractor to meet all state 

and local requirements. Contractor shall furnish a certificate of final inspection and 

approval from all enforcement agencies to the Owner. 

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. The Contractor shall deliver two sets of Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manuals to 

the Engineer prior to final close out. O&M manuals shall consist of approved shop 

drawings, manufacturer’s bulletins, equipment manuals, a list of manufacturers with 

telephone numbers for all equipment that contains replaceable parts and all other data 

covering the care, maintenance and operation of each piece of furnished equipment. 

O&M manuals shall be neatly bound in 3-ring binders, contain an index and section tabs 

and be labeled with the Project name. 

B. Name, address, and telephone number of each Contractor and subcontractor installing 

equipment and systems, local representative for each item of equipment and each 

system. Table of contents shall correspond to the Specifications with the Section tab 

sheets placed before the respective Shop Drawings and operation and maintenance 

instructions. 

1. Warranties for more than 1 year shall be included in appropriate section. 


15010-5

2. A maintenance and lubrication schedule shall include each motor, function, 

control location, fuse location, belt sizes type of lubricant, and rate of lubrication 

in accordance with manufacturer. 

3. A filter maintenance schedule shall include filter size and quantity for each unit, 

located by room number. 

1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TESTING 

A. The Contractor shall fully instruct the Owner in the operation of mechanical equipment 

prior to final close out. Contractor shall provide, without additional expense Owner, 

services of competent instructors who will give full instruction in the care, adjustment, 

operation and maintenance of all mechanical systems provided by this Contractor to 

Owner’s permanent employees. Instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the 

installation that they are to give instructions and shall be trained in operating theory, as 

well as in practical operation and maintenance work. Factory trained instructors shall be 

employed wherever they are available. Instruction shall be given during regular work 

week and at a time just prior to the time the equipment is accepted and turned over to 

Owner for regular operation. 

B. The Contractor or his representative shall provide a minimum of two (2) days instruction 

period for Owner’s personnel. 

C. Contractor shall test all equipment installed under this Specification and shall 

demonstrate its proper operation to the Engineer. No equipment shall be tested or 

operated for any purpose until it has been fully prepared, connected and made ready for 

normal operation. Damage to equipment due to improper or ill-timed operation or testing 

shall be repaired, at Contractor’s expense, before final inspection and acceptance. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment to be free of defects that may 

develop in any part of their work, caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment 

failures, for a minimum of one year from the date of final acceptance of the work or for as 

long as normal equipment manufacturer warranties are in effect from the date of final 

acceptance of the work. 

B. During the guarantee period, notification by letter, personal contact or telephone 

conversation of a problem with any mechanical system, shall cause the Contractor to 

respond within one week, making repairs or corrections as necessary. After all repairs 

and corrections are complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. 

C. The Contractor shall agree to provide 24 hour service on call for emergency. 

PART 2. - PRODUCTS 

Not Used 

PART 3. - EXECUTION 

Not Used 

END OF SECTION 15010 


15010-6

SECTION 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Work included under this division shall consist of furnishing labor and materials 

necessary for the installation of the work called for under the Mechanical, Fire Sprinkler 

Protection, Temperature Control and Mechanical Test & Balance contracts as listed in 

the Instruction to Bidders, as specified, and as shown on Drawings to provide a complete, 

operable and approved system. 


A. The following is a partial list of related standards: 

1. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARt). 

2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 

3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 

(ASHRAE). 

4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 

5. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE). 

6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 

7. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 

8. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA). 

9. Cast Iron Soil pipe institute (CISPI). 

10. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS of the Valve and Fittings Industry, 

Inc.). 

11. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 

12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 

13. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI). 

14. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 

15. Steel Tank Institute (STI). 


A. Where equipment is specified by manufacturer, brand name or catalog number, this shall 

establish the standard of quality and style of the product to be provided under the 

Contract. 

B. Where two or more units of the same kind of equipment are required, they shall be 

products of a single manufacturer. Mixing and matching of various manufacturer’s like or 

similar components shall not be permitted. 

C. The Contractor shall field verify and inspect existing buildings for connections to existing 

systems, equipment, and materials designated, on Drawings or in Specifications, to be 

used. 

D. The Contractor shall have full responsibility of component parts of the mechanical system 

to ensure that new equipment, integrated with existing equipment and systems, will 

perform and operate in accordance with requirements of the Specifications without 

excessive or unusual service or maintenance requirements. 

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying locations of such things as piping, 

ductwork, equipment, door swings, heights of cabinets and counters, etc., prior to the 

installation of any mechanical equipment. Installed mechanical work that interferes with 

06/25/09 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 

15050-1

the work of other trades shall be relocated by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional 

cost to the Owner. 

F. Contractors shall coordinate with all other trades and install their systems in the space 

provided/coordinated within the structure. Install systems and materials for ease of 

maintenance. Equipment arrangements shall provide at least the minimum clearances as 

recommended by equipment manufacturer to facilitate proper maintenance and servicing 

of system. Deviations in minimum clearance requirements shall be permitted only upon 

prior written authorization from the Architect/Engineer. 

PART 2.- PRODUCTS 

2.1 FIRE BARRIER PENETRATION SEALING SYSTEMS: 

A. Approved Supplier: Specialty Building Products or prior approved equivalent. 

B. Approved Manufacturers: 3M, Transco Products, Nelson Flameseal Systems, Tremco, 

Inc. or prior approved equivalent. 

C. Fire stopping materials shall conform to local building code requirements and shall be 

tested according to UL 1479 and ASTME-814 for through-penetration fire stop systems. 

D. Fire stopping materials shall be furnished by a supplier who specializes in the selection 

and furnishing of fire stopping materials for building systems. 

E. Contractor shall submit all fire stopping methods to Local Authorities for approval. 

Provide copies of all approved fire stopping methods to the Engineer. Seal all 

penetrations and sleeves through floors and fire walls with high temperature, fire rated 

sealant. Fire stop material shall be equal to 3M brand Fire Barrier Penetration System. In 

lieu of type system described above, modular component system equal to ProSet System 

Inc. or approved equal may be utilized. Install the appropriate concrete or wood 

penetration system as required by code. 

2.2 WALL, FLOOR, AND CEILING OPENINGS 

A. General Requirements: 

1. Contractor shall be responsible for exact sizes and locations of any chases 

and/or openings required for mechanical work. 

B. Chases and Openings: 

2.3 SLEEVES 

1. General Contractor shall leave chases and openings in walls, floors, ceilings, and 

partitions where shown on Drawings or otherwise necessary to receive 

mechanical work. It is this contractor’s responsibility to coordinate sizes and 

locations prior to framing or pouring. 


1. Provide sleeves in conjunction with water tight piping passing through concrete 

or masonry walls, partitions, and slabs. 


15050-2

2. Sleeves shall extend 3” beyond the full thickness of walls and slabs and shall be 

at least 2 pipe diameters larger than or 2” larger than ducts piping passing 

through. Where piping with covering is installed, a minimum of I” shall be 

provided between outside of pipe covering and inside surface of the sleeve. 

B. Duct Sleeves: 

1. Material: Except as otherwise indicated, duct sleeves shall be constructed of 

minimum 22 gauge galvanized iron. 

2. Vertical Sleeves: Vertical duct sleeves through floors shall have space between 

duct and sleeve packed with an approved fire stop material flush with top of 

sleeve to make a fire rated and watertight joint. Insulated duct shall have foamed 

rubber insulation full length within sleeves. 

3. Placement: Set sheet metal sleeves for ductwork passing through floors above 

grade. Sleeve shall extend 3-inch above finished floor elevation. Sleeve shall be 

supported in place before floor is poured and shall be caulked to make a 

waterproof joint between floor and sleeve. Where more than one duct is passing 

through a floor slab above grade and one floor opening for all ducts is provided, 

sleeve shall be same size as the overall opening. 

4. Interior Sleeves: Ductwork through walls shall have soundproof packing in nonrated 

wall sleeves and an approved fire stop material in fire rated wall sleeves. 

Ducts passing through corridor walls not containing fire dampers shall be 

sleeved. 

5. Exterior Sleeves: Ductwork passing through exterior walls shall be sleeved and 

caulked watertight. Exterior ductwork shall be so installed as to pitch away from 

wall penetration a minimum of ¼-inch per foot. 

6. Fire Rated Wall and Floor Openings: Ductwork passing through fire rated walls 

and floors shall be provided with an Underwriters’ Laboratories listed duct and 

sleeve assembly. Duct and sleeve assembly shall meet or exceed fire rating of 

wall and floor through which the duct passes. 

C. Pipe sleeves 

1. Exterior Walls: Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe. Install sleeves in 

exterior walls and floors below grade with approved caulking between sleeves 

and piping to make it waterproof. Plastic sleeves shall not be used. 

2. Floors: Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe Vertical pipe sleeves through 

floors shall have space between pipe and sleeve packed with an approved fire 

stop material flush with top of sleeve to make a watertight and fire rated joint. 

3. Interior Sleeves: Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe. Piping through 

walls of adjacent rooms shall have soundproof packing in non-rated walls and an 

approved fire stop material in fire rated walls. 

4. Fire Rated Wall and Floor Openings: Piping passing through fire rated walls and 

floors shall be provided with an Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. listed pipe and 

pipe sleeve assembly. Pipe and pipe sleeve assembly shall meet or exceed fire 

rating of wall and floor which the pipe passes through. 


15050-3

2.4 ACCESS PANELS 

A. The Contractor shall provide means of access for all equipment, smoke/fire dampers, fire 

damper, valves and fittings specified. Furnish wall and ceiling access panels as required 

to the General Contractor for installation. Access doors and panels required within rated 

separations shall carry the appropriate rating. Conform to Division 8 access panel 

specifications. 

PART 3. – EXECUTION 


A. Verification of Conditions: 


1. On-Site Review: Contractor shall visit site to become thoroughly acquainted with 

existing conditions of site and services. 

2. Existing Active Services: When encountered during construction, Contractor shall 

protect, brace or support pneumatic tubing, existing active sewers, water, gas, 

ductwork, or other services, where required, for proper execution of Work. 

3. Inactive Services: If encountered during construction, Contractor, as appropriate, 

shall cap or plug inactive pipes, ducts, and temperature control tubing or wiring at 

no additional cost to Owner. 

4. Responsibility: Liability for repairs or replacement of damaged or defective 

materials, including, but not limited to, property damage resulting from 

negligence or other causes, shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility until 

work has been accepted by Architect/Engineer and Owner. 

A. Protection: After delivery, and before and after installation, equipment shall be protected 

against theft or damage. 

1. Contractor shall protect plumbing fixtures, metal heating enclosures and other 

equipment and all baked enamel or glazed surfaces from damage by covering or 

coating as recommended in Bulletin, “Handling and Care of Enameled Cast Iron 

Plumbing Fixtures”, issued by Plumbing Fixture Manufacturers Association or by 

other methods approved by Architect/Engineer. 

2. Coat polished or plate metal parts with Vaseline immediately after installation. 

Protect equipment outlets, pipe and conduit openings with temporary plugs, caps 

or burlap as required to prevent filling with construction dirt. 

3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 

A. Excavation: Contractor shall perform excavation boring, drilling, back filling and 

compaction at required depth for installation of work indicated or specified. 

1. Excavated material not required or not suitable for backfilling shall be removed 

from site. 

2. Protect excavation by grading and pumping to keep space clear of water during 

construction. 


15050-4

3. Provide shoring and sheeting as necessary for protection of work and safety of 

personnel. Protect bottom of excavation from frost. 

4. Excavation in rock shall be 8-inch below invert of pipe to be installed and shall be 

backfilled to a depth of 8-inch with clean, washed sand before pipe installation. 

5. Excavation terminating in unstable or organic material at pipe invert elevation 

shall be continued to 30-inch below pipe invert elevation and backfilled with pit 

run gravel to pipe invert. Soil boring reports are available for inspection at 

Architect’s office. 

6. Pipe installation in backfilled areas shall not occur until backfill is 2 feet above 

pipe invert, at which time backfill shall be excavated to proper depth, pipe 

installed, and backfill replaced as specified. 

7. All lines are to be properly capped to prevent the entrance of dirt or any other 

foreign matter. All debris and water shall be removed from the trench prior to final 

installation. Properly protect piping or ductwork until backfilling can be performed. 

Inspection of all installations by Local Inspection Authorities shall be completed 

prior to backfilling. 

B. Backfilling Under Floors and Slabs: Backfill areas below concrete slabs on grade in 

horizontal layers not to exceed 8-inch in depth and compact with approved equipment 

until dry density is not less than 95 percent of Standard Proctor Density. 

1. Backfill material shall be pit run gravel or coarse sand free of rubbish, compacted 

and leveled to receive slab. If natural earth is of similar structure with same 

material as specified above, no additional material will be required. Fill to raise 

sub-grades to required elevation shall be accomplished as specified above. 

2. Areas not below concrete or asphalt slabs and footings shall be backfilled with 

suitable excavated material, free of debris and rubbish. 

3. Carefully backfill to a point 6” above piping or ductwork and thoroughly tamp. 

Complete backfilling in 8” lifts and compact each layer to 98% standard proctor 

density. Restore surface to its original condition, i.e. grass, concrete, blacktop, 

etc. 

4. Contractor shall pay costs for testing of compacted backfill by an approved 

testing laboratory when tests are requested by Architect/Engineer. 

C. Back filling Outside: Backfill excavations below finished grades with materials similar to 

that removed in excavation, free from rubbish or other unsuitable material. Place backfill 

and compact as required to prevent settling. 

1. Backfilling shall be done to finished grades indicated on Drawings. If no finished 

grading is done in excavated areas, Contractor shall backfill to existing grades 

and restore surface to original condition. 

2. Compaction over ditches less than 3 feet in width and around walls and columns 

shall be done by the use of mechanical hand compactors. 

3. Contractor shall pay costs for testing of compacted backfill by an approved 

testing laboratory when tests are requested by Architect/Engineer. 


15050-5

D. Pavement, Curb, and Sidewalk Replacement: 

1. Contractor shall be responsible for the replacement of existing Street pavement, 

curbs and sidewalks removed or damaged by Contractor or related 

subcontractors. 

2. Make necessary arrangements to perform such repairs and pay incurred costs in 

connection with said repairs, including amount in Bid. 

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Cutting and patching shall be held to practical minimum consistent with good construction 

practice by properly locating and leaving sleeves and boxes, or notifying General 

Contractor of openings, where required, as construction progresses. All cutting and 

patching shall be done with the prior approval of the Architect/Engineer. 

1. Necessary cutting and patching of walls, floors, partitions and ceilings, as 

required for the proper installation of work under this Contract, shall be the sole 

responsibility of this Contractor. Perform cutting and patching in such a manner 

as to leave no visible trace and to return the part affected to the condition of 

undisturbed work. Cutting and patching shall be performed by individuals 

experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior 

work will not be accepted. 

B. Pavements: Cutting of pavements shall be accomplished by saw cutting a minimum of 

½-inch deep prior to jack hammering. Contractor shall bore below pavement where 

indicated on Drawings or where required by Architect/Engineer. 

C. Existing Conditions: Patch pavements to match existing conditions. Labor and materials 

required to replace and rebuild parts cut or injured shall be furnished and installed by this 

Contractor. 


A. Connection to Equipment Specified: Provide material and labor required to connect to the 

mechanical system of fixtures and equipment having mechanical connections and which 

are specified in other Sections or Divisions of the Specifications or furnished by 

Owner/Vendor. 

1. Provide piping supply connections with shut-off valves. 

2. Ductwork connections to equipment, diffusers, and appurtenances shall be made 

with flexible ductwork unless a solid connection is indicated. 

3. Drainage connections shall be properly trapped and vented. 

B. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide concrete pads for all floor mounted equipment. 

Pads shall be 4” thick and extend a minimum of 2” beyond equipment. 

C. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: 

1. Where uncovered exposed pipes pass through floors, walls or ceilings in finished 

rooms and inside casework, fit with approved type chrome plated metal plate. 

2. Plastic escutcheon plates shall not be permitted. 


15050-6

D. Mechanical Systems Painting: Exposed supporting iron and steel work, bare pipe, fittings, 

hangers, and supports shall be wire brushed, washed with mineral spirits to remove dirt 

and grease, and painted with one coat of metal primer followed by two finish coats of 

battleship gray paint. 

E. Concealed Equipment location: Location of motor operated equipment, furnished under 

this Contract, installed above ceiling shall be identified by placing a color coded thumb 

tack (or adhesive applied dot) in the ceiling directly below item noted. Identification colors 

shall be as follows: 

1. Exhaust Fans: Green 

2. Air Handling Units: Blue 

3. Control Valves: Yellow 

4. Shut-off Valves: Orange 

F. Chlorination of Domestic Water Lines: Contractor shall clean entire domestic water 

system in building, shall disinfect system in strict accordance with governing codes and 

State Health Department Requirements, and shall flush entire system clean with potable 

water. 

1. The piping system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until no dirty water 

appears at the points of outlet. 

2. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water-chlorine solution containing 

at least 50 parts per million of chlorine, and the system or part thereof shall be 

valved off and allowed to stand for 24 hours. 

3. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water-chlorine solution containing 

at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours. 

4. Following the allowed standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean 

potable water until no chlorine remains in the water coming from the system. 

5. Contractor shall provide written certification to Architect/Engineer that 

chlorination and flushing of domestic water system has been completed. 

G. Filtration: At time of substantial completion, and prior to turning equipment over to Owner, 

Contractor shall install a complete set of unused, clean filters in each type of unit 

supplying filtered air to the building. 

3.6 PIPE IDENTIFICATION 

A. Exposed Piping: Bare and insulated, exposed new piping in Mechanical Rooms, and 

unfinished rooms shall be identified with labels, painted on using metal stencils. Stencils 

shall have 1-inch high letters and shall include a directional arrow 3-inch long by 1/2-inch 

wide, indication direction of flow. Color of stenciling shall be black lettering on a yellow 

background. 

1. Labels shall be located at each change in direction of pipe runs and at intervals 

not to exceed 20 feet. 

2. Setmark snap-on pipe markers by Seton Nameplate Corporation or snap-on pipe 

markers by W. H. Brady Company, which are similar to above stencil description 

shall be acceptable. 


15050-7

B. Concealed Piping: Bare and insulated new piping running in ceilings and soffits shall be 

identified with labels painted on using metal stencils. Each stencil shall have 1-inch high 

letters and shall include a directional arrow 3-inch long by 1/2-inch wide. indicating 

direction of flow. Color of stenciling shall be black lettering on a yellow background. 

1. Labels shall be located at each change in direction of pipe runs and at intervals 

not to exceed 20 feet. 

2. Labels shall be located on each side of wall, partition and floor penetrations. 

3. Setmark snap-on pipe markers by Seton Nameplate Corporation or snap-on pipe 

markers by W. H. Brady Company, which are similar to above stencil description 

shall be acceptable. 

C. Pipe Markers: Contractor shall label the piping as follows: 

1. Condensate Drain CD 

2. Domestic Cold Water CW 

3. Domestic Hot Water HW 

4. Natural Gas G 

5. Fire Sprinkler FIRE 

D. Mechanical Room Piping Paint Schedule: Mechanical Contractor shall paint piping in 

mechanical rooms to match the following schedule (based on Devoe Paint Protective 

Color Guide): 

3.7 CLEANING 

System Color Devoe 

Fire Equipment Safety Red R-1,3 06 

Natural Gas Safety Blue R-1 08 

Domestic Hot Water Dark Green R-1,3 Custom Mixed 

Domestic Cold Water Dark Green C-i ,3ii 

1. Piping shall also have labels and flow directional arrows. 

2. Color Chart: Mechanical Contractor shall prepare and submit a minimum of 3 

color charts for approval prior to beginning painting of boiler room piping. Paint 

color selection numbers listed are Devoe and are listed for reference. 

3. Mechanical Room Piping: Paint in accordance with Specification Section 09900, 

Painting. 

A. Housekeeping, Cleaning and Storage: Remove from the building and site, scrap material, 

temporary building, packaging material, miscellaneous debris, and dirt on a regular 

schedule, or as required, and in accordance with Architect direction, to maintain building 

in a reasonably clean, workable condition during construction. 

1. Cutting oil and steel shavings shall be caught in a suitable container to ensure 

final finish material in building will not be marred or damaged. 

2. Upon completion of work and before final inspection, Contractor shall remove 

plaster, paint, rust, stickers, and shipping tags from installed equipment. 

3. Clean foreign matter from installed equipment and remove dirt and debris, in 

connection with work, from building. 


15050-8

3.8 PRE-OPERATIONAL SYSTEM CLEANOUT 

A. Pre-Cleaning Chemicals: New piping systems and appurtenances shall be cleaned with a 

one percent solution of Ferrosol 345, neutral pH cleaner, or approved equal, to remove 

any iron deposits, oil-based coatings, mill scale and construction residues. 

1. Follow manufacturers’ directions regarding equipment. 



15050-9

SECTION 15150 - PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. All piping materials and methods of construction and workmanship shall be provided as 

per the requirements of local codes and regulations. 

B. Lead pipes solders, flux, etc., are not allowed. 

C. The contractor is responsible for verifying all invert elevations with respect to building 

finished floor elevations and site provisions. 


2.1 PIPING 

A. Below Grade Sanitary, Vent and Waste 

1. Bell and spigot cast iron piping and fittings ASTM A-74 with neoprene 

compression joints. 

2. Hub less cast iron pipe and joint system, with stainless steel bands or MG cast 

iron couplings, CISPI 301 -69T. 

B. Above Grade Sanitary, Vent and Waste 

1. Bell and spigot cast iron piping and fittings ASTM A-74 with neoprene 

compression joints. 

2. Hub less cast iron pipe and joint system, with stainless steel bands or MG cast 

iron couplings, CISPI 301-69T. 

3. ABS Schedule 40, ASTM D2661. Pipe and corresponding fitting installed per 

code limitations. 

C. Above Grade Domestic Water Piping (3” and smaller) 

1. Type “L” seamless hard temper copper tubing with wrought copper fittings, using 

95/5 solder or brazing. 

D. Natural Gas Piping 

1. Inside Building: 

a. Schedule 40 black steel with threaded fittings, ASTM A 53. 

b. Type L seamless soft copper, ASTM B 88 and copper fittings. Copper 

piping shall not be used if the gas contains more than an average of 0.3 

grains of hydrogen sulfide per 100 standard cubic of gas. 

c. Flexible Gas Piping System: Gastite System by TiteFlex (or Wardflex, 

approved equal) Plastic coated, 304 stainless steel flexible tubing. 

Installation of flexible gas piping must be performed by qualified installer 

06/25/09 PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 

15150-1

2.2 VALVES 

2. In Ceiling Air Plenum: 

who has successfully completed the manufacturer’s training. System 

must be installed with all of the flexible gas piping manufacturer’s valves, 

regulators, fittings, etc. The contractor must obtain specific local 

inspectors approval prior to installing the system. 

a. Schedule 40 black steel with standard weld butt fittings. 

b. Type L seamless soft copper and copper fittings. Copper piping shall not 

be used if the gas contains more than an average of 0.3 grains of 

hydrogen sulfide per 100 standard cubic of gas. 

c. All welded or brazed connections in air plenum ceilings and concealed 

spaces. Use no valves, threads, unions or connectors in these locations. 

Concealed gas piping in solid partitions shall be inside a Schedule 40 

black steel pipe sleeve capped at both ends and vented outside the 

building. 

3. Exterior Underground: 

a. PE (polyethylene) plastic and shall be marked “gas” and “ASTM D 2513” 

and shall be used with factory assembled steel riser. 

b. Type L seamless soft copper, ASTM B 88 shall be used with factory 

assembled steel riser. Copper piping shall not be used if the gas 

contains more than an average of 0.3 grains of hydrogen sulfide per 100 

standard cubic of gas. 

4. Exterior Aboveground: 

a. Schedule 40 black steel with threaded fittings, ASTM A 53. 

A. Acceptable Valve Manufacturers: 

1. Apollo, Powell, or approved equal, Crane, Jenkins, Watts, Mueller, (Powell) 

numbers shown). 

B. Gate Valves —Domestic Water Piping 

2 inches and Smaller: All bronze; #1 842, solder end. 

1. 4” and Larger: I .B.B.T; #1793, flanged. 

C. Check Valves —Domestic Water Piping 

1. 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: All bronze; #1 825, solder end. 

D. Ball Valves —Domestic Water Piping (use in lieu of gate valves only) 

1. All bronze, Watts #B-6000. 

E. Globe Valves —Domestic Water Piping 

1. 2-1/2 inches and Smaller—All Bronze; #1873, solder end. 


15150-2

2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 

A. Acceptable backflow pre-venter Manufacturers: 

1. Clayton “CIa-Va Series “RP” or approved equal. 

B. Provide strainer with blow off valve immediately upstream from backflow. 

C. Extend drain piping to safe-waste over floor drain. 

2.4 GAS VALVES 


1. DeZurik or approved equal. 

B. 2” and Smaller: No. 955 or DeZurik No. 425. 

C. 2-1/2” and Larger: Lubricated plug cock or DeZurick No. 425 Provide extended stems to 

accommodate insulation on insulated piping. 

D. Provide a natural gas pressure regulator equal to Maxitrol to reduce gas pressure to an 

acceptable limit at gas fired equipment. See plans for gas company meter outlet 

pressure. See mechanical equipment schedule for required capacities and operational 

manuals for pressure limits. Provide with code approved pressure limiting device or pipe 

pressure regulating valve relief vent individually to the outside. Verify with the local code 

authorities. 

E. Gas Solenoid Valves: Asco #K3A415, approved UL rated automatic gas shutoff valves. 

Normally closed, 24 volt with manual reset, sized to match gas piping service to 

equipment. 

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES: 

A. Solenoid Valve for Domestic Cold Water: 

1. Acceptable Manufactures: Gold, Jefferson, Burkert, Honeywell, W.E. Anderson. 

2. Gould Valve CD, or approved equal. Type M-3V, NPT, Full Port, 24 Volt, 

Normally open, UL listed. 

B. Drain Valves- Domestic Water Piping 

1. ¾“ hose bib, Chicago #151, rough brass. 

2. Equal to Apollo Series 78-1 00 ball valve, 600 pound, bronze body, chrome 

plated brass ball and blow-out proff brass stem, reinforced Teflon seals and 

seats and %“ hose thread outlet with cap. 

3. Domestic water drains shall be equipped with vacuum breakers. 

C. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Leonard Model No. TM-186-8015-PRV, 1” inlets, 1¼” outlet. 

High-low manifold temperature control thermostatic controller with inlet checkstops. Wall 

support, outlet ball valve adjustable high temperature limit stop, removable cartridge with 

strainer, stainless steel piston and liquid fill thermal motor with bellows element mounted 


15150-3

out of water. Provide volume control shutoff valve, bimetal dial thermometer, brass pipe, 

fittings, and unions mounted to exposed cabinet panel; bottom supplies; top outlet. ½” 

bypass; minimum 1.0” gpm @ 10 psi drop and set at 40 gpm @ 10 psi drop; 120°F 

discharge temperature. Other acceptable manufacturers: Lawler, Bradley. 


3.1 A. Slope water piping 1” per 40’ and arrange to drain at all low points. 

B. All storm and sanitary piping sloped 1/8” per foot unless noted otherwise or if required to 

meet inverts. Notify engineer of any changes. 

C. All underground sewer pipe within 10 feet of buried water supply piping shall be 

constructed in accordance with State and/or Local Code. 

D. Provide all appropriate sanitary piping fittings, wyes and bends. No double-wye fittings for 

sanitary drainage in horizontal position shall be used. 

E. Vent pipes passing through roofs shall terminate at least 12” above the roof line. 

F. Above grade plastic drain and vent piping horizontal and vertical runs cannot exceed 35 

feet. Solvent welds shall be done with a contrasting primer to the color of the pipe and 

cement. Plastic piping shall not be installed in air plenum spaces including parking 

garage area. 

G. Contractor shall provide all sleeves required through footings, foundation walls and floors. 

Underground services shall be sleeved with schedule 40 PVC sleeving. Sleeve to be (1) 

size larger than the pipe it serves. Extend sleeves 0-3” beyond penetration. Coordinate 

with Structural Engineer. 

H. Provide shut-off valves as required by Code and good installation practice for the proper 

isolation of equipment. All branch take offs shall have isolation shut off valves. Provide 

extended stem valves where required for insulation. Except as otherwise specified or 

shown on plans, valves 2-1/2 inch and smaller shall have screwed end connections and 

valves 3 inch and larger shall have flange end construction. Install manual drain valves at 

every low point of each water piping system. 

I. Mechanical formed tees connections as created by T-Drill or approved equal shall be 

formed in a continuous operation consisting of drilling a pilot hole and drawing out the 

surface to form a collar having a height of not less than three times the thickness of the 

tube wall. Branch tube shall not obstruct the flow in the main line tube. All joints shall be 

brazed in accordance with the Copper Development Association. Soft soldered joints will 

not be permitted. Mechanical formed connections shall be listed by the International 

Plumbing Code, B.O.C.A., l.A.M.P.O., S.B.C.C., ASME Code for Pressure Piping and 

shall be acceptable to governing authorities. 

J. All threaded nozzle fixtures to have atmospheric vacuum breakers. 

K. Installation of cross connection control devices and related valves shall maintain 1 ‘-6” 

clear from wall or other obstructions, no more than 5’-O” above floor or closer than 2’-O” 

from floor. 


15150-4

L. Pipe Supports: 

1. Hangers shall adequately support the piping system and shall be installed to 

allow for expansion and contraction. Insulation shall be continuous and jackets 

shall be sealed tight at hangers. Provide neoprene rubber or rubber coated pad 

where un-insulated pipes rest on hangers. 

2. For multi-level wood floor construction allow for wood shrinkage and movement. 

Provide clearance for piping near wood construction. Provide expansion joints on 

vertical sanitary and storm stacks equal to Josam model #26200. For horizontal 

take-offs from stacks use no-hub connections and on the inlet side and seal of 

traps provide slip joints. All mechanical joints shall be accessible. 

M. Provide escutcheon plates at all wall, floor, or ceiling piping penetrations. This includes all 

mechanical piping systems. Escutcheon plates shall match the finish of the surrounding 

area. 

N. Exposed PVC venting through roof shall be painted at the discretion of the Architect. 

O. Provide a dielectric coupling at all connections of dissimilar metals. Provide adequate 

clearance for insulation and for access to valves. All piping shall be concealed and shall 

maintain proper clearances for ceilings, ducts, walls, lighting, etc. except that piping may 

be exposed in mechanical areas. At all fixture and equipment connections where nipples 

are necessary between copper fixtures and tubing, such nipples shall be full size brass 

nipples with brass or copper adapters. 

P. Provide shut-off valve for all gas fired equipment. Locate valve in an easily accessible 

location. 

Q. Gas Piping on Roof: 

1. Piping on roof shall be supported on polyethylene, high U.V. resistant Quick 

“Pipe” Blocks manufactured by Nelson-Olsen Inc. (Erico, E-Z Sleeper Block) or 

approved equal. Piping and blocking shall be installed to allow for expansion and 

contraction. 

2. Exposed steel gas piping shall be properly cleaned and shall be painted with one 

coat of red primer and two (2) coats of oil paint “Silver Gray” color. This painting 

is not necessary on galvanized surfaces. 

R. Viega Pro-Press system maybe used for copper piping, sizes 1/2”- 4” diameter, up to 200 

psi operating pressure and 250°F for joining copper tubing. 

S. Provide 1/2” ethafoam on all above grade vertical piping to all pipes and slab movement 

at wood floor penetrations. 



15150-5

SECTION 15200 – INSULATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Insulation shall be applied to clean dry piping and ductwork. 


2.1 A. Materials. 

1. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket, and/or facing and adhesive 

used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation), fire and smoke hazard 

ratings as tested by Procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 225 and U/LI 723 not 

exceeding Flame Spread 25 and Smoke Developed 50. 

2. Jacket and Facing Descriptions. 

B. Ductwork. 

C. Piping. 

a. All purpose vapor barrier jackets. 

b. VB vapor barrier, white kraft bonded to 1 mil aluminum foil, reinforced 

with glass yarn. Water vapor permeability 0.02 perms. 

c. FSK reinforced foil and paper (Foil Scrim Kraft). Aluminum foil (minimum 

0.75 mu thick) reinforced with fiberglass yard mesh and laminated to 40 

lbs. chemically treated fire resistant Kraft UL rated. 

1. External rigid board insulation shall be equal to Owens Corning 703 Series with 

FRK or ASJ (All Service Jacket) vapor barrier facing, 3 pound density fiberglass 

complete with non-combustible foil faced vapor barrier. Entire system shall be UL 

listed. 

a. 0.030 thick PVC preformed jackets with seams made for welding. 

b. 0.024 thick stucco embossed, smooth or corrugated pattern equal to 

Childers Products Company. 

2. Fiberglass blanket shall be 1 pound density, with factory applied type FSK jacket. 

Conductivity shall be 0.26 average maximum at mean temperature of 75°F. 

3. Provide galvanized steel shields at all pipe hangers on insulated piping except 

hot water heating piping where pipes bear directly on the clevis. Shields shall be 

16 gauge for pipes 4” and larger diameter and 20 gauge for smaller pipes. 

1. Piping shall be insulated with Manville (IMCOA, Owens-Corning, Knauf) “FLAME 

SAFE” fiber glass insulation, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an 

average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.22 BTU in. per sq. ft. per °F. hour 

at mean temperature of 75°F. 

06/25/09 INSULATION 

15200-1

2. Exposed areas shall be furnished with factory applied “FLAME SAFE” All- 

Purpose Vapor barrier jacket. 

3. Concealed areas with factory applied “FLAME SAFE” VB (Vapor Barrier Jacket 

or All-Purpose Jacket). 

4. Fittings, valve bodies and flanges for pipe size 4” and smaller shall be provided 

with PVC jackets over fiberglass inserts. 

5. Armstrong (Rubatex, Halstead) Armaflex II flame retardant elastomeric thermal 

insulation, installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations and as 

allowed by Local Codes, shall be suitable for pipe temperatures between -40° 

and 2200. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Provide continuous vapor barrier over all seams. 

B. Apply insulation in thickness and type as follows or per applicable state energy code, 

whichever is greater: 

1. No external insulation for ductwork installed in areas open to the structure. 

2. Return Air Ducts: 3/4“ acoustical lining for all return ductwork within 10’-0” of any 

fan. 

3. Supply air ducts: 1” thickness glass fiberboards extended ten feet from handling 

unit discharge. 1” thickness glass fiber blanket may be used in lieu of board in 

concealed locations. 

4. Exhaust air ducts within 10 feet of exterior wall penetration: 1½” inch thickness 

glass fiberboards. 1½” thickness glass fiber blanket may be used in lieu of board 

in concealed locations. 

5. All ductwork in concealed plenum areas shall be insulated with 2” foil faced rigid 

board or wrap fiberglass insulation for ducts less than 1 square foot, larger that I 

square foot shall be insulated with 1½”. 

6. All individual room exhaust run outs shall be insulated with 1” wrapped insulation. 

C. Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork. 

D. Piping. 

1. See drawings for kitchen exhaust ductwork insulation requirements. 

1. On cold water piping all seam edges shall be additionally sealed with vapor 

barrier adhesive and ends wrapped with vapor barrier tape overlapped the 

adjacent jacket 


15200-2

2. Underground Piping, Direct Buried Outside Domestic and Fire Sprinkler Water 

Service, Sanitary and Storm Sewer: 

a. Styrofoam Brand as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company or 

approved equal. Product shall consist 1” extruded polystyrene closed 

cells, high moisture resistant, rigid foam. Insulation shall be two half 

sections for installation purposes. Insulated pipe shall be encased and 

sleeved with PVC Schedule 40 jacket at least 2” larger than the insulated 

pipe. 

b. Flat Styrofoam rigid board installed over piping. See detail on plan. 

3. Domestic Water Piping: 

a. Domestic re-circulating shall be insulated with 1” fiberglass. 

b. Apply fiberglass insulation in thickness as follows or per applicable State 

Energy Code, whichever is greater: 

(1) 1/2” thru 1” ½” 

(2) 11/4” thru 2” 1” 

(3) 2 1/2” and larger 1½” 

c. Pipe insulation not required for vertical risers located within insulated 

interior wall. 

4. All existing piping that may be exposed as a result of new work shall be re 

insulated to match existing. 



15200-3

SECTION 15300 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (PERFORMANCE BASED) 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. The Contractor for the fire protection installation must be a qualified Fire Protection 

Contractor regularly engaged in the installation of automatic fire sprinkler systems. 

Provide a fire protection technician certified with the National Institute of Certified 

Engineering Technicians (NICET level IV), to certify direct and supervise the work or if 

required by governing authorities, a registered professional engineer. 

B. Codes and Standards: 

1. NFPA compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with the latest 

edition of NFPA 13 “Standard for the installation of Sprinkler Systems.” 

2. UL Compliance: Provide fire protection products in accordance with pre approval 

guide UL standards; provide UL label on each product. 

3. Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: Install fire protection systems in 

accordance with local and/or state regulations of fire department or fire marshal. 

4. Latest applicable State and Local Codes. 

5. City Water Department Compliance: The water service connection and sprinkler 

system valve assembly shall comply with all City Water Department 

Requirements. 

6. Obtain all required approvals and permits. Permits shall be obtained from the city 

or municipality in which the system will be installed. If permits are not issued by 

the city or municipality, a permit shall be obtained from the State Fire Marshal. 

C. Description of Work 

1. The Contractor is responsible for verifying with State, City and Local 

municipalities any and all code requirements related to the fire sprinkler system. 

2. Verify need, if applicable, to provide fire sprinkler protection in wood construction 

ceiling space with local inspectors. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to 

review all construction documents and verify with local inspectors the need for 

any special coverage, dry fire sprinkler protection for unheated spaces, pressure 

and flow requirements prior to submitting a bid. VERIFY EXISTING SITE 

CONDITIONS INCLUDING SERVICE SIZE AVAILABLE AND PRESSURE. 

PROVIDE FIRE PUMP INCLUDING ALL ELECTRICAL AS REQUIRED. AN 

ALTERNATE PRICE FOR THIS ITEM SHALL BE PROVIDED. IF UPON FINAL 

CALCULATIONS THE PUMP IS NOT NECESSARY, THE ALTERNATE PRICE 

WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. Additional compensation will not be allowed for 

modification to the bid documents to meet any additional code requirements. 

3. Provide all labor and materials and perform all operations required in connection 

with the installation of the fire extinguishing systems. 

4. For fire alarm system, provide audio/visual devices and connect to local and offsite 

alarms. Provide all wiring and make all connections. Provide auto-dialer and 

make connection to outgoing telephone point-of-connection. Coordinate with 

06/25/09 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (PERFORMANCE BASED) 

15300-1

Division 16 to determine if a Fire Alarm and Detection system is specified. If so, 

coordinate system connections. 

5. If applicable, Contractor shall verify kitchen exhaust hood fire suppression 

requirements with general contractor and kitchen design consultant. Contractor 

shall provide all water supply piping, sprinkler heads if required, valves, backflow 

protection, supervisory switches and related wiring. 

D. Submittal and Approvals 

1. Prepare drawings of fire protection systems indicating pipe sizes, pipe locations, head 

layouts and type, fittings, shutoff values, equipment, fire department connections, etc. 

The design, hydraulic calculations and subsequent drawings shall reflect all modifications 

and extensions to existing piping equipment and head layout. Indicate elevations, slopes, 

floor and wall penetrations, drains, etc. 

2. Submit to all Agencies having jurisdiction for approval. Submit to Owner insurance carrier 

for approval if required. AFTER THE DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY ALL 

REVIEWING AGENCIES, SUBMIT THE APPROVED COPIES BEARING STAMPS 

AND/OR SIGNATURES OF FIRE MARSHAL OR AGENCY HAVING JURISDICTION 

TO THE ARCHITECT FOR THEIR USE, BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH 

INSTALLATION. 

3. Submit pipe and sprinkler head layout, (shop drawings), to the Architect for their approval 

prior to installing any material. Allow ten (10) working days for review by the Architect. 


2.1 A. The following is a general guideline on types of sprinkler heads and their recommended 

usage. Final design will need to be approved by local inspector and coordinated with 

Architect and Owner. 

1. Decorative lobbies: Fully concealed sprinkler heads with only ceiling plate visible. 

Cover plate shall be factory finished in white. 

2. In all spaces with finished ceilings: Recessed chrome plated sprinkler. 

3. All areas where piping will be exposed without finished ceilings: Exposed 

sprinklers, brass finish. 

4. High areas with/finished ceilings: Exposed sprinklers, chrome finish with 

matching escutcheon. 

5. Areas exposed to high humidity or weather: Corrosion-proof (polyester coated) 

sprinklers with matching escutcheon. 

6. Extended coverage where possible, on concealed piping in areas with finished 

ceilings. Concealed type in decorative lobbies. Recessed in all other areas with 

finished ceilings, on concealed piping: Extended coverage sprinklers to be 

concealed with white cover plates in finished areas. Sidewall, recessed, white 

with white escutcheon for concealed piping and upright or pendent sprinklers with 

brass finish in areas with exposed piping. 

7. Decks, canopies, small unheated interior spaces and attics: Dry type sprinklers 

pendent, recessed concealed or horizontal sidewall, or fast response. 


15300-2


3.1 A. The design of the sprinkler system shall be dictated by the building construction and 

usage and as specified herein. Piping shall be concealed above suspended ceilings. 

1. The design and method of installation of the fire protection work shall be in 

accordance with Uniform Fire Code, UBC, International Building Code 

Standards, National Fire Protection Association Standards and National Fire 

Protection Association Standards that contain reference to or supplementary 

material on sprinkler systems along with the requirements of the Owner’s 

insurance authority, the State, and the Fire Department. 

2. The sprinkler systems shall be hydraulically calculated. Calculations shall 

conform to NFPA and UBCS 9-1. 

B. Coordination: 

1. The Contractor shall coordinate with the existing conditions, all other, building 

components, all new construction, and make all necessary modifications to the 

pipe routing before submitting for approval. Provide hydraulic calculations for all 

areas of the building including supplemental hydraulic calculations for all 

modification. 

a. Additional compensation will not be allowed for modifications to the bid 

documents for additional sprinklers, coordination, or for additional 

hydraulic calculations. 

b. Sprinkler head locations and all pipe routing shall be coordinated with all 

mechanical and electrical equipment and all structural and architectural 

components to avoid obstructions. All head locations shall be 

coordinated with architectural reflective ceiling plan. 

c. The Contractor shall carefully review all of the bid documents from all 

disciplines (architectural, structural, kitchen equipment, electrical and 

mechanical) and design the sprinkler systems to properly protect all 

areas of the facility. 

d. The sprinkler system shall be installed in a manner that is aesthetically 

unobtrusive, with all sprinkler heads symmetrically aligned and centered 

in lay-in ceiling tile. System shall not interfere with existing equipment 

and building components (clocks, speakers, lights, etc.), and is not to be 

subject to damage by the building occupants. 



15300-3

SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Contractor shall provide all labor and materials to provide a complete plumbing and fuel 

system for all fixtures and equipment shown on drawings. Contractor shall rough-in and 

make final connections to all fixtures and appliances supplied by others. 

B. Contractor shall thoroughly review the manufacturer’s installation instructions prior to 

installing any piece of equipment or its associated service, (domestic drains, water piping, 

etc.). Any conflicts between the manufacturer’s installation instructions and the plans or 

specification shall be brought to the engineer at once for clarification. Contractor will not 

receive additional money for installations requiring modifications due to these conflicts. 

C. All plumbing systems shall meet State and Local codes as well as ADA requirements 

regardless of information shown within the documents. 

D. Gas Service: Make arrangements with the local gas company and pay all costs and fees 

for firm gas service including gas meter with shut off valve on each side of the meter. 

Verify exact location of gas meter and provide a gas shut off valve at the first accessible 

point within the building. Provide a gas pressure regulator and shut off valve in an easily 

accessible location at each appliance or unit of equipment as required and identify valve. 

Vent gas pressure regulators per code. Coordinate with all gas firing equipment including 

equipment supplied by others for gas pressure compatibility with the gas company. 

Contractor to provide gas company with a list of gas fired equipment and requirements. 

Coordinate gas pipe locations with all other trades. 

E. Water Service: 

1. Connect to Landlord provided 2” domestic water connection as shown on the 

plans. Provide backflow prevention at the Landlord connection. Provide shutoff 

valves at the connection point if not provided, (existing), by the Landlord. Verify 

the exact location of the Landlord connection in the field. 

F. Sanitary Service: 

1. Sanitary: Provide sanitary piping to Landlord provided sanitary main as shown 

on plans. Verify the exact location of the Landlord main prior to installing any 

piping. 

G. Grease Waste Connection: 

1. Provide grease waste connection to the grease interceptor located outside of the 

building. Provide piping back from the grease interceptor to the Landlord 

provided waste connection. Provide all vent piping for grease interceptor. Refer 

to plans for the location of the grease interceptor. 

06/25/09 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 

15400-1


2.1 A. Miscellaneous Plumbing Equipment: 

1. Cleanouts: 

a. Floor cleanouts in finished areas shall be equal to Josam (Sioux Chief, 

Wade, Smith, Watts, Ancon, Zurn) Series 56000, with Nikaloy top. 

Provide carpet marker for carpeted floors. In unfinished areas, use 

Series 56000 floor cleanout with cast iron top. Install cleanouts at the 

bottom of all stacks, as indicated on drawings and as required by code. 

b. Bottom of stacks in unfinished areas shall be provided with a cleanout 

that has a plug with a seating flange, lead gasket and four square lugs 

for plug removal. 

c. Access cover for wall cleanouts in finished rooms shall be equal to 

Josam Series 58600 stainless steel round cover with screw. 

d. Clean-out plug or cover plates in walls shall not face public corridors or 

public areas. 

2. Roof Jacks: 

a. Terminate all vents stacks 12” above roof in a frost-proof galvanized roof 

jack. Use lead top on cast iron and vinyl top on PVC vent pipe. 

b. All vents thru roof shall be 3” unless otherwise noted. 

3. Floor Drains: 

a. Approved Manufacturers: Josam, Wade, J.R. Smith, Zum. 

b. Floor drains located at ground level, utility rooms, etc. shall be Wade 

1310 cast iron, adjustable, clamping collar, seepage openings with satin 

bronze strainer with extended rim for safe waste application. 

c. Floor drains: Safe waste use at non-traffic areas shall be Wade W1100 

cast iron, adjustable, clamping collar, seepage openings with satin 

bronze strainer with extended rim for safe waste application. 

d. Floor drains used with trap primer shall be same as FD only drain casting 

tapped for trap primer. 

e. Floor drains finished concrete shall be Wade WI 100 cast iron, adjustable 

with flange, clamping collar, seepage openings and 5 inch diameter 

nickel bronze strainer. 

4. Trench drain: 

a. Approved Manufacturers: AcoPolymer Products, Josam, Zurn, Jay R. 

Smith. 

b. Smith/Aco Polymer Products 9930 Series Enviro-Flo Drain system with a 

9870-430-ssm, class C, locking, heavy duty stainless steel grate. Provide 

pre-cast, pre-sloped and interlocking trench drain channels made from 


15400-2

polyester resins and formulated aggregate with recesses for grating lockdowns 

molded into the channel walls to keep the grates from moving. 

c. Provide heavy cast iron, rectangular bar pattern grates in a steel frame 

with flat bar anchors and nailing clips. Provide the number of grating 

sections shown on the Drawings. Provide the steel frames to the General 

Contractor for setting in the poured concrete trench. Provide a non traffic 

area drain in the bottom of the poured concrete trench as shown and 

schedules on the Drawings. 

d. Trench drain and grates are provided by the General Contractor. Provide 

a no traffic area drain in the bottom of the poured concrete trench as 

shown on the drawings. 

5. Floor Sinks: 

a. Approved Manufacturers: Wade 2370 cast iron deep sump floor drain 

with 1/2” primer tap, square top and square loose set ductile iron gate 

with anti-tilt lugs. 

6. Shock Arrestors: 

a. Approved Manufacturers: Josam, Zurn, Sioux Chief. 

b. Josam Absorbatron II 75000-S with wrought copper shell. Provide where 

required by Code, on flush valve systems and on the piping to any 

laundry unit or dishwasher. Size as required. 

7. Trap Primers: (Provide as called out on plans) 

a. Approved Manufacturers: J.R. Smith, PPP, MIFAB, Sioux Chief or 

approved equal, Zurn, Wade, J.R. Smith, Josam. 

b. Zurn automatic trap primer Z-1022 all bronze body with integral vacuum 

breaker, non-liming internal operating assembly, strainer and gasketed 

bronze cover. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Provide shut off valve on all branch piping take offs. Locate as close as possible to main 

in an accessible location. 

B. Rough-in and make final connections for kitchen food service equipment furnished under 

another division of the specifications. Refer to schedule on drawings for specific 

requirements. Furnish cast brass “P’ traps with cleanouts and water supplies with loose 

key stops for all equipment. All exposed water piping shall be chrome plated brass. 

Where vent piping must be run exposed, install it within stainless steel sleeves. 

C. Rough-in and make final connections for all equipment in addition to equipment specified 

in this section. Coordinate with supplier to obtain correct location and sizes prior to roughin. 


15400-3

D. Avoid installing sanitary waste piping over any food preparation equipment and food 

storage area or provide protection from drips with a functional water-tight safe pan. 

E. Contractor shall coordinate all floor joist headers required for piping installation. Headers 

shall be done at contractor’s expense. 



15400-4

SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Contractor shall provide all labor and materials to provide a complete plumbing and fuel 

system for all fixtures and equipment shown on drawings. Contractor shall rough-in and 

make final connections to all fixtures and appliances supplied by others. 

B. Contractor shall thoroughly review the manufacturer’s installation instructions prior to 

installing any piece of equipment or its associated services, (domestic drains, water 

piping, etc.). Any conflicts between the manufacturer’s installation instructions and the 

plans or specification shall be brought to the engineer at once for clarification. Contractor 

will not receive additional money for installations requiring modifications due to these 

conflicts. 

C. All plumbing systems shall meet State and Local codes as well as ADA requirements 

regardless of information shown within the documents. 


2.1 A. Miscellaneous Plumbing Equipment: 

1. Carriers for wall hung water closets, urinals and lavatories: 

a. Provide commercial grade carrier of approved style. Verify with General 

Contractor for type of wall construction and space prior to ordering 

carriers. 

2. Fittings, Trim and Accessories: 

a. Install stop and escutcheon for each supply pipe, trap and escutcheon 

for each waste pipe and vacuum breaker supplied with hose attachments 

or integral with flush valve, or where water connection is below spill line 

of fixture. 

b. Install laminar flow, non splash on discharge of each faucet except 

where hose connection is specified. 

3. Water Closet Seats: 

a. Public: Church seat, #295C elongated seat, solid plastic, open front, 

external stainless steel check hinges, molded-in bumpers and without 

cover. 

B. Plumbing Fixture General Requirements: In addition to the drawing fixture specification 

the following is to be used as a guide and to list equal manufacturers. 

1. Plumbing fixtures American Standard or Kohler white fixtures. All fixtures shall be 

of same manufacturer. 

2. Water closet seats all white Beneke, Olsonite or Church combination self 

sustaining and check hinge of stainless steel. 

06/25/09 PLUMBING FIXTURES 

15440-1

3. Janitors Receptors, Sterns-Williams or Fiat. Supply fitting: Speakman, T & S 

Brass or Chicago. 

4. Faucets (Non-metering) Speakman, American Standard, Chicago, or T & S 

Brass or Kohler. 

5. Lavatory Drains to be Speakman S-3440, open type 1-1/4” tailpiece, P.O. with 

flat strainers, or approved equal T & S Brass or Chicago. 

6. Stops to be Frost, Chicago or T & S Brass flexible riser, 3/8” IPS angle type, 

loose key, chrome plated cast brass with escutcheons with set screws. 

7. Chrome plated, cast brass “P’ traps with cleanout, 17 gauge outlet tube, and 

escutcheon tube with set screw to be Frost, Chicago or T & S Brass. 

8. Trim of proper configuration to allow wheelchair accessibility shall be provided on 

all lavatories designated for handicapped use. Provide ADA drain and supply 

protection. 

9. Flush valves shall be Zurn Exposed Z6000 Model for 1” water closets and 

Exposed 26003 Model for ¾” urinals with flow options WS-1 low consumption. 

ADA compliant with non-hold open and no leak handle fixture, high back 

pressure vacuum breaker, one piece hex couple nut, adjustable tailpiece, spud 

coupling and flange for top spud connection, or approved equal Sloan Royal. 

10. WaIl mounted fixtures to be supported by suitable adjustable carriers having 

vandal proof trim, short foot bolted to concrete floor slab with 5/16” machine bolts 

and Phillips concrete fasteners in a rigid manner. 

a. Lavatories: Wade W-520 or equal. 

b. Urinals: Wade W-400 or equal. 

c. Sinks - Laundry Tubs: Wade W-520 or equal. 

d. Verify carrier type with fixture manufacturer. 

11. Zurn, Wade, Smith or Josam carriers as above described shall be acceptable for 

wall hung lavatories and sinks. 

12. Zurn carriers with neo-seal gaskets made from expanded, close-celled neoprene, 

shall be provided for water closets and urinals, or approved equal Wade, Smith 

or Josam. 

13. All exposed metal for fixtures in finished areas, exposed to view, shall be heavy 

chromium plated red brass, pipe, fittings and valves. 

14. All fixture valves shall have bronze stems, renewable bronze seats and 

renewable discs. Supplies to all fixtures provided with stop valves. All traps 

equipped with cleanout plugs. Install vacuum breakers or approved back 

siphonage, back flow prevention to prevent back flow as required. 


15440-2


3.1 A. All exposed piping and valves shall be chrome plated brass. Traps shall include chrome 

plated cast brass with clean-outs. Standard PVC traps for non-food service plumbing 

fixtures may be installed in non-rated walls. All water supplies to each fixture shall have 

chrome stop valves. Floor mounted water closets shall be connected using a cast iron 

floor flange and ring putty or gaskets. Wax gaskets are not acceptable for wall hung 

fixtures. Provide adequate supports and reinforcing for all wall hung fixtures, valves and 

shower heads. Install all fixtures rigid, plumb and true. 

B. Grout and caulk all fixtures with water and mildew resistant white epoxy silicone equal to 

Hydroment or Dow Corning No. 786. Grout shall not exceed 1/4” width and shall be 

installed flush with finished wall or floor. 

C. All fixture installation dimensions shall be determined from the Architectural documents. 

Plumbing fixture colors to be selected by Architect. 

D. P-Traps and water supplies insulate per ADA, and ANSI. 

E. Controls for flushing water closets shall be mounted on the wide or most accessible side 

of the water closet. 

F. Provide locking style valves in any lines serving an emergency eyewash or shower. 



15440-3

SECTION 15700 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 

PART 1. – GENERAL 

1.1 A. Contractor shall thoroughly review the manufacturer’s installation instructions prior to 

installing any piece of equipment or its associated service, (gas, hot or chilled water 

piping, flues, etc.). Any conflicts between the manufacturer’s installation instructions and 

the plans or specification shall be brought to the engineer at once for clarification. 

Contractor will not receive additional money for installations requiring modifications due 

to these conflicts. 


2.1 A. Approved Manufacturers: 

1. Roof Top Equipment: Trane (furnished by Owner’s Vendor). 

2. Make-up Air Equipment: Accurex (furnished by Owner’s Vendor). 

3. Exhaust Fans: Accurex (furnished by Owner’s Vendor). 

B. Roof Top Unit (RTU) Trane 

1. General. 

a. Install a single package combination, DX mechanical cooling system and 

gas fired heating system, complete with magnetic starters and automatic 

controls as scheduled. 

b. The equipment shall be shipped completely factory assembled, precharged, 

piped and wired internally ready for field connections. 

2. Roof Mounting Curb. 

a. Furnish and install a steel roof mounting curb. It shall mate to the bottom 

perimeter of the equipment. 

b. Assemble the mounting curb, provide rigid insulation and counter 

flashing as recommended by the manufacturer. 

c. Provide sheet metal supply and return duct drops at roof penetration. 

3. Cooling System: 

a. The unit shall have cooling capacities as scheduled at ARI conditions. 

b. The units shall have direct drive hermetic compressors. The compressor 

shall have overload protection, internal pressure relief, low ambient 

lockout control and crankcase heater. Each refrigerant circuit shall have 

independent thermostatic expansion devices, service pressure ports and 

refrigerant line filter dryers. 

15700-1

4. Heating System: 

a. Two stage gas heating section shall have inputs and outputs as 

scheduled. 

b. Cylindrical tube and drum heat exchanger shall be constructed of 

aluminized steel. Power burner shall have electric direct spark ignition, 

100% safety shut off electronic flame sensing controls, flame inspection 

glass window, pre-purging and combustion air adjustment. All controls 

shall be listed for operation at low outdoor air temperatures. System shall 

be equipped with dual limit safety controls and rated and tested 

according to D.O.E., F.T.C and A.G.A. 

5. Cabinet: 

6. Fans: 

a. Shall be of zinc coated, galvanized steel with a baked-on outdoor enamel 

paint finish. Base section and cabinet panels where conditioned air is 

handled shall be fully insulated to prevent sweating and minimize sound. 

a. FC centrifugal conditioned air blower shall be belt driven and be capable 

of delivering capacities as scheduled on the drawings,. Blower shall be 

statically and dynamically balanced. 

b. Propeller type condenser fans shall discharge vertically and be direct 

driven. Fan motors shall be totally enclosed with ball bearings, 

permanently lubricated, inherently protected and equipped with rain 

shield. Fans shall have a safety guard. 

7. Air Filters 

a. Throwaway 2” pleated high efficiency filters. 

8. Temperature Controls: 

a. Provide a programmable thermostat with 7-day program clock. During 

unoccupied periods, the RTU fan and heating section shall be energized 

as necessary to maintain temperature, outside dampers will be closed. 

b. The mechanical contractor is responsible for all control wiring. 

9. Provide the following options: 

a. Economizer 

b. Single point power with non fused disconnect and factory wired GFI 

outlet. 

c. Condenser coil guards 

d. Through the bottom electrical connections 

e. Five year compressor warranty 

15700-2

C. Direct Fired Make-Up Air Unit (MUA or SF-1) Accurex 

1. Install direct fired make-up air heaters as scheduled. Units shall be ETL or UL 

listed. 

2. Units shall be factory assembled and shipped as a complete packaged assembly 

and shall include the following: 

a. Gas Burner designed to operate with an air velocity of 2,850 FPM across 

non-clogging stainless steel air baffles. Burner to be designed to operate 

at 100% thermal efficiency throughout the life of the equipment. 

Turndown of the burner shall be a minimum of 25:1. Entire width of 

burner burns at all times. Burner section shall have adjustable profile 

plates for field adjustment of air velocity over the burner. Provide 

intermittent ignition assembly. 

b. Forward curved, double width, double inlet blower mounted on a solid 

steel shaft with self aligning 100,000 hour bearings. 

c. Equipment casing to be 16 gauge, G90 galvanized steel around an 

integral support frame of structural angle. All panels shall be removable 

for easy access. Provide an observation port for the main and pilot 

flames. All controls, gas valves and modulating controls shall be 

mounted in a vestibule with access doors outside of the air stream. 

d. Gas train shall be constructed to meet State Codes, ANSI and IRI 

requirements. Gas train shall be selected to operate at 14” W.C. psig 

pressure. Regulators to be approved for non-vented service. 

e. Temperature controller shall be a ductstat mounted integral to the unit. 

f. Provide the following controls: 

(1) Airflow switch 

(2) Electronic Flame Safety Relay 

(3) High Temperature Limit Switch 

(4) Starter Interlock 

(5) High Gas Pressure Switch 

(6) Low Gas Pressure Switch 

(7) Adjustable Low Limit 

(8) Auxiliary Circuit to shut the unit down on a flame failure 

(9) Adjustable burner on/off economizer intake air ductstat 

(10) Remote panel complete with operating lights to indicate blower 

on and burner on, and discharge air temperature adjustment, 

summer-off-winter selector switch. 

(11) Audible alarm to signal safety shut-down 

(12) Shunt trip circuit breaker in source electrical panel 

g. Provide motorized outside air damper that complies with the damper 

specification in Section 15800. 

h. Unit shall have single point power connection with a fused disconnect. 

Provide filter section with cleanable aluminum filter. 


15700-3

SECTION 15800 - DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND METHODS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. All above ground ductwork material and construction shall be galvanized steel, installed 

in accordance with the Standards described in the latest edition of the ASHRAE 

(American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers) Guide and 

Data Book, SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National 

Association) and Local governing mechanical codes. 

B. Changes in direction, elevation or shape shall be made by gradual methods such as 

radiused elbows of diverging or converging reducing fittings. Changes in dimension shall 

not exceed 20° diverging angle. Elbow radii shall be at least equal to the width of the duct 

in the plane of the bend. 

PART 2. – PRODUCTS 

2.1 A. Approved Manufacturers: 

1. Registers, Grilles and Diffusers and Terminal Air Devices: Anemostat, Titus, 

Price, J & J, Krueger, Tuttle and Bailey, Cames, Lima, Nailor, Metalaire, Agitair, 

Reliable Metal, Connor, Air Devices, Inc. 

2. Louvers: Cesco, Air Balance, Arrow United, Louvers & Dampers, Inc., Safe-Air. 

3. Fire and Smoke Dampers: Prefco, Ruskin, Greenheck, Cesco, United Air, 

American Warming, Safe-Air, Nailor, Acme. 

B. Registers, Grilles and Diffusers: Unless indicated, otherwise wall and ceiling R, C, D’s 

shall be white; floor registers shall have plain aluminum finish. Color finishes shall be 

approved by the Architect. 

1. See drawings for grilles and diffusers schedule. 

C. Dampers. 

1. Where dampers separate outdoors from indoors, they shall meet the following 

standards: Use no damper blade that is wider than 6 inches. Construct damper 

frames from at least 16 gauge, hot dipped galvanized steel. Fit each blade with 

double sided, inflatable, field replaceable, extruded vinyl edge seals that lock into 

slots in the blade. Size each blade to fit tightly between flexible, compressible, 

metal jamb seals. Set nylon bearings in stainless steel sleeves. Use hexagonal 

shafts for positive blade control. Conceal damper linkage inside the frames and 

out of the air stream. The entire assembly shall not rattle or vibrate. A closed 

damper shall not leak more than 6 SCFM per square foot of face area when 

tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 for a damper selected at 2000 

FPM and tested at 4 inches of water column pressure across the face. 

06/25/09 DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND METHODS 

15800-1


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Kitchen exhaust ductwork to be 16 gauge steel with liquid tight weld. Duct to slope 2% 

towards hood or an approved grease collector. Provide cleanouts as required, per Code. 

Installation of kitchen exhaust ductwork shall comply with NFPA, State and Local Codes. 

B. Ductwork behind registers arid grilles shall be painted out flat black. 

C. Provide a minimum of 2” wide flexible connectors to all ducted equipment less than 2000 

CFM and 4” wide on 2000 CFM and greater. 

D. Flexible Ductwork. 

1. The flexible duct shall be of semi-rigid construction capable of maintaining the 

shaping required by job conditions without subsequent sagging or droop. Duct 

connections to equipment outlet collars shall be made in accordance with the 

duct manufacturer’s recommendations. Maximum flexible air duct length not to 

exceed 5’-0”. 

2. Flexible air duct shall be externally insulated with 1/2” thick 3/4 lb. density 

fiberglass wrapped around twice to 1” thick complete with non-combustible vapor 

barrier and UL listed. 

3. Ductwork and insulation shall be UL listed as Flexible Air Ducts Connection 

Class I, and meet all NFPA 90A and 90B requirements. 

4. Insulated flexible duct shall be equal to Thermaflex M-KE. 

5. No flexible ductwork connections shall be allowed in exposed ceiling areas. 

E. Access Doors. 

1. Where motorized dampers, fire dampers, control equipment are installed in 

ductwork, provide suitable sized, gasketed doors in ducts. Doors shall be 

provided with Ventlok #220 door pull and #90 sash type latches. Use sponge 

rubber to felt gasketing material on door openings. Access doors in insulated 

ductwork shall be double wall construction with 1” insulation between wall. 

F. Air Control Devices. 

1. Provide splitter dampers on all main ducts and where shown on the drawings. 

Provide Ventlok #690 or approved equal, self-locking splitter assembly on each 

damper. 

2. Provide Clevepak (or approved equal) Type DESC damper extractor with spincollar 

at all branch take offs. 

3. Provide a balancing damper to each diffuser. 

4. In all inaccessible areas, provide balancing damper within reach at each diffuser 

or register. 


06/25/09 DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND METHODS 

15800-2

SECTION 15976 – AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCES 


1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 

and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 

A. Control sequences are hereby defined as the manner and method by which automatic 

temperature controls function. Requirements for each type of operation are specified in this 

section. 

B. Operating equipment, devices, and system components required for automatic temperature 

control systems are specified in other Division-15 Temperature Control Systems sections of these 

specifications. 


Not applicable. 


3.1 AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS 

A. General. Provide automatic control for the air handling systems as described herein and shown 

on the drawings. 

1. Each supply air system which introduces outdoor air shall have a freeze protection 

thermostat installed in the unit discharge. The thermostat shall have a 20 foot long 

averaging element, auxiliary contacts and manual reset feature. If a system undergoes a 

freeze-stat trip (temperature falls to 34°F), its valves, dampers, and humidifiers shall 

revert to their unoccupied positions. 

2. Packaged Roof Top Units will be fitted with smoke detectors, provided by the vendor, in 

the return and supply ductwork to shut down the systems upon detection of smoke. 

B. Control Sequences. 

1. RTU-1 and RTU-2 

a. Occupied Hours: Packaged Roof Top Units shall cycle or stage compressors and 

gas heat to maintain the space temperature set point. The units shall be 

controlled by Vendor furnished programmable thermostat(s) and remote 

temperature sensors, (shown on plans). Outside air damper: Refer to ‘c’ below. 

b. Unoccupied Hours: Packaged Roof Top Units shall cycle or stage compressors 

and natural gas heating to maintain the off hours temperature set points. Outside 

air damper to be closed. 

c. Ventilation: The vendor furnished CO2 sensor will sample the air in the dining 

areas and thus determine the number of people present. Upon a signal from the 

15976-1 

AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCES

2. RTU-3 

CO2 sensor, the outside air damper will modulate between the scheduled 

minimum and maximum outside air position to satisfy the CO2 sensor as 

scheduled on the plans. 

d. Economizer Mode: The unit shall be equipped with a differential enthalpy 

controlled economizer. The sensor will measure both temperature and enthalpy. 

When the conditions are such that the outside air is suitable to provide “free 

cooling” the outside air damper shall modulate to maintain a supply air 

temperature between 55 and 59 degrees F. 

a. a. Occupied Hours: Packaged Roof Top Unit shall cycle or stage compressors 

and gas heat to maintain the space temperature set point. The units shall be 

controlled by Vendor furnished programmable thermostat(s) and remote 

temperature sensors, (shown on plans). Outside air damper shall be open to the 

minimum position as scheduled. 

b. Unoccupied Hours: Packaged Roof Top Units shall cycle or stage compressors 

and natural gas heating to maintain the off hours temperature set points. Outside 

air damper shall be closed. 

c. Economizer Mode: The unit shall be equipped with a differential enthalpy 

controlled economizer. The sensor will measure both temperature and enthalpy. 

When the conditions are such that the outside air is suitable to provide “free 

cooling” the outside air damper shall modulate to maintain a supply air 

temperature between 55 and 59 degrees F. 

3. EF-1 and MUA-1(SF-1) 

4. EF-2 

5. EF-3 

a. MUA-1 (SF-1) and EF-1 shall be energized by a manual switch on the Fan and Light 

Control Panel. 

b. MUA-1 (SF-1) shall be shunt trip controlled via circuit breaker in source 

electrical panel. Provide control wiring from auxiliary contact at hood fire 

suppression control block to shunt trip mechanism at circuit breaker in 

electrical panel. 

a. The exhaust fan will be controlled by a time switch. The exhaust fan shall run 

continuously when the morning staff arrives and will be de-activated at the end of 

the business day. Verify the exact hours of operation with the Buffalo Wild Wings 

Project Manager. 

a. Refer to Electrical Plans for control. 


15976-2 

AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCES

SECTION 15990 - TESTING AND BALANCING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Test all piping systems as required by code and governing agencies. Certificates of 

Approval shall be furnished to Owner that all tests have been completed. 

B. All domestic water piping systems shall be disinfected in accordance to State and Local 

Codes. A 50 ppm water-chlorine solution must be allowed to stand in the potable water 

distribution system for at least 24 hours before flushing and returning to service. 


Not Used 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. When the work has been completed, balance the air flow from each diffuser and register 

in accordance with the recommendations of the diffuser manufacturer, selling dampers, 

controls and/or other volume control devices in such a manner as to produce the air flow 

rate indicated on the drawings. Test to the satisfaction of the Engineer to insure for 

satisfactory operation of all equipment. 

B. Submit five (5) copies of certified Test and Balance Report to the Engineer for approval. 

Submittal shall include certified Test and Balance Reports and shop drawing(s) 

identifying all air terminal devices as listed in the Test and Balance Report and the 

equipment as it is identified on the Mechanical Plans. 

C. Test and start-up all equipment supplied under this contract. Provide all reports 

necessary to assure the Engineer and Owner that all functions of each piece of 

equipment have been thoroughly evaluated and deemed operable as designed. 

D. Plumbing: 

1. Defects: Contractor shall be responsible for defects which develop in the systems 

caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment and shall replace any such 

faulty workmanship, material or equipment during a period of 1 year from date of 

final acceptance. Acceptance of the work shall not waive the guarantee. 

2. Approval: Inspect and test plumbing work for approval by Architect/ Engineer or a 

designated representative. 

3. Tests: Tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect/Engineer or a 

designated representative. Tests shall be made, at Contractor’s expense, and a 

certification furnished to the Architect/Engineer stating that satisfactory tests 

have been made. 

4. Piping: Tests of piping systems, except final test of complete systems, shall be 

made before piping is covered or connected to fixtures and equipment. Tests 

06/25/09 TESTING AND BALANCING 

15990-1

E. Cooling: 

required shall not be less than as specified in the following paragraphs, unless 

designated otherwise in specific sections. 

a. Storm and sanitary, waste and vent piping, inside the building shall be 

tested with air at 5 psi gauge pressure and shall hold this pressure for 15 

minutes without addition of more air. Provide final test with fixtures in 

place with 1” W.G. air pressure. 

b. Test Domestic water piping, tanks, valves and fittings with hydraulic 

pressure of 100 psig for a period of 24 hours. 

c. Test natural gas piping per NFPA Chapter 54, National Fuel Gas Code. 

1) For meter outlet pressure 14” W.C. or less, the piping shall be 

tested at a pressure of 10 psig maximum. 

2) For meter outlet pressure above 14” W.C. the piping shall be 

tested at a pressure of 50 percent greater than the maximum, 

but not less than 25 psi. 

d. Heating/cooling water piping and shall hold 150 psi gauge for 1 hour 

without leaks or additional water. 

1. System Guarantee: Contractor shall guarantee that the installation shall operate 

with complete noiseless circulation of cooling media through piping system and 

equipment. 

2. Defects: Contractor shall be responsible for defects which develop in the systems 

caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment and shall replace any such 

faulty workmanship, material or equipment during a period of one year from date 

of final acceptance. Acceptance of the work shall not waive the guarantee. 

3. Tests: In the presence of the Architect/Engineer, or his duly representative, the 

cooling system shall be tested at 80 psi hydrostatic pressure and proved drop 

tight. Tests shall be complete before piping is connected to equipment or 

covered. 

F. Ventilation: Contractor shall guarantee complete uniform circulation of air through 

ventilated spaces without objectionable noise. Contractor shall assume responsibility for 

and shall replace any faulty workmanship, material or equipment during a period of 1 

year from date of final acceptance. 


06/25/09 TESTING AND BALANCING 

15990-2

SECTION 16010 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. General and Supplementary conditions within Division 0 and 1 are hereby incorporated 

and become part of these Specifications, covering all work in Division 16000, Electrical. 

B. Before submitting a proposal on the project, the Contractor shall visit the site and 

familiarize themselves with the conditions and limitations affecting Division 16000 work. 

No additional costs to the Owner shall be allowed for items verifiable during site visits. 

C. Contractor shall provide sufficient workers and materials to keep pace with the 

construction schedule. Contractor shall place orders for equipment such that job progress 

is not slowed due to late delivery and shall confirm delivery dates with suppliers. 

D. The Contractor shall provide office space and storage for materials and equipment 

supplied as required. Location shall be as directed by the General Contractor or the 

Architect/Engineer. 

E. Upon completion of the work shown and specified under Division 16000 and prior to final 

close out of the Project, the Contractor shall verify in writing that all systems are 100% 

complete and operating properly. This notification shall include copies of all 

Subcontractor notifications. Any system not operating properly at final inspection shall be 

immediately repaired and demonstrated to the Engineer. 

F. Rebates or credits provided by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall be 

directly credited to the Owner. 

1.2 ELECTRICAL PLANS 

A. The Electrical Drawings and Specifications shall form a set of Plans for the electrical 

work. Neither the Drawings nor the Specifications shall be complete without the other. 

Any item shown on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications shall be considered as 

shown and specified on both. 

B. Any questions regarding the intent of the Drawings or Specifications shall be brought to 

the Engineer’s attention as soon as possible. If direction from the Engineer cannot be 

obtained due to time or communication limitations, the greater quantity, higher quality or 

condition most favorable to the Owner shall be assumed. Contractor shall provide all 

labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for a complete and 

operational electrical installation, as shown on the Drawings and called for in these 


C. Drawings: 

1. Contractor shall familiarize themselves with Architectural, Structural and 

Mechanical Drawings and Specifications. Coordinate all shafts, chases, furred 

spaces, suspended ceilings, locations of equipment, etc. 

2. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate routing of all conduit and wire within soffits 

provided by the General Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all 

soffiting required to cover installations not coordinated or specifically approved by 

the Architect and Engineer. 

GENERAL CONDITIONS 

16010-1

3. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate 

location only. Placement of electrical equipment and devices shall not interfere 

with locations or clearances of other trades’ materials or equipment. 

4. Dimensions given on the Drawings shall take precedence over scaled 

dimensions. Dimensions, whether given in figures or scaled, shall be verified in 

the field. 

5. Contractor shall verify that the equipment to be furnished under Contract will fit 

within the available space. 

6. Notify the Architect and Engineer of any discrepancies between Electrical, 

Architectural and Mechanical Drawings. 

7. Verify items such as door swings, window locations, casework, etc., before 

installing any electrical equipment or devices. All devices conflicting with and 

other trades work due to lack of coordination shall be relocated at no additional 

cost to the Owner. 

D. The following terms used in the Drawings and Specifications shall be defined as follows: 

1. Contractor: Shall mean Electrical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors. 

2. Work: Shall mean labor and/or materials of the Electrical Contractor or any of 

their Subcontractors. 

3. Furnish: Shall mean purchase, submit for Engineer approval, coordinate with 

Contract Documents and deliver to site in new, undamaged condition. 

4. Install: Shall mean to schedule for delivery, deliver or have delivered to the site, 

store as directed, protect from damage, set in place, make all necessary final 

connections, test as required and turn over to the Owner in full operating 

condition. 

5. Provide: Shall mean furnish and install. 

6. Connect: Shall mean to bring electrical service and/or line voltage control wiring 

to equipment, make all final connections, provide all necessary miscellaneous 

materials required and do final check out to ensure proper equipment 

connections. 

E. CAD and Drawing Files: 

1. Electrical CAD drawings prepared by of Barr Engineering and Buffalo Wild 

Wings, Inc. for this Project are instruments of for use solely with respect to this 

Project. During the course of the implementation of the Project, and with 

approval by either party, copies may be obtained of CAD drawings for the 

preparation of Shop Drawings. These CAD drawings shall not be used on other 

projects, for additions to this Project, or for completion of this Project by others, 

unless both Buffalo Wild Wings, Inc and Barr Engineering Company provide 

written permission to do so. Any revisions, additions and/or deletions to these 

CAD drawings, either intentional or unintentional, shall be made at the full risk of 

the person(s) making such revisions, additions and/or deletions. Such person(s) 

shall hold harmless and indemnify Barr Engineering Company of any and all 

responsibilities and liabilities. 

2. CAD drawings files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc, shall be 

requested directly from the Architect. 

1.3 COORDINATION OF DRAWINGS 

A. Coordinate scheduling and sequencing required for movement and positioning of large 

equipment into the building with all other Contractors to minimize impact on their work. 

B. This Contractor shall provide any and all input required to complete these drawings. 


16010-2

1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Materials: 

1. All materials shall be new and of the type and quality specified herein. 

2. Specific materials and equipment specified is intended to establish a minimum 

standard of required quality. Where specified materials and equipment fail to 

meet minimum standards of existing federal, state and local codes and 

ordinances, the governing codes and ordinances shall prevail. 

3. The Contractor shall provide all minor miscellaneous materials necessary for the 

complete mechanical installation. 

4. For materials and equipment specified by description only, the Contractor shall 

provide materials or equipment suitable for the purpose intended. These shall be 

in conformance with all governing codes, these Specifications and normal trade 

practice. 

5. For materials or equipment specified by manufacturer’s name and catalog 

number, the Contractor shall provide the item specified. The Contractor may 

submit materials and equipment for prior approval to the Engineer. 

6. Supply materials and equipment to the site in original packages, containers or 

crates insofar as is practical. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to schedule 

deliveries in accordance with the overall Project schedule. The Contractor shall 

closely coordinate all deliveries with other Contractors and the Engineer. 

7. Provide for proper receipt, handling, storage, and protection from the elements 

for all materials and equipment to be used on this Project so as to effectively 

prevent damage or deterioration. Materials or equipment sustaining damage or 

undue deterioration from any cause whatsoever shall be replaced or repaired by 

Contractor as required by the Engineer. 

8. The Contractor shall properly protect all equipment from damage during 

construction. Thoroughly clean all fixtures, equipment and other supplied 

materials. Make all necessary repairs and apply touch up paint as required prior 

to final inspection and contract close out. 

9. All materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. 

(UL). Materials and Equipment shall meet the UL requirements of each standard 

in every case where such a standard has been established for that particular type 

of material. Equipment shall be UL listed as an entire assembly or system. 

B. Prior Approvals 

1. All requests for prior approvals must be received by the Engineer at least seven 

working days prior to bid date. Applications for prior approval shall be considered 

only from Contractors submitting bids on the Project. Contractors shall determine 

whether materials receiving prior approval are actually in accordance with details 

of the Specifications. 

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all deficiencies that may exist from the 

use of substituted products or equipment, including all additional labor and 

materials required to complete the work. All dimensions and characteristics of 

substituted products shall be verified and coordinated with all affected trades and 

Subcontractors. Any required changes or modifications to the work of any other 

trade or Subcontractor incurred due to using accepted substituted products shall 

be coordinated and performed by this Contractor at no additional cost to the 

Owner. 


16010-3


A. Within fifteen days after the award of the Contract, the Electrical Contractor shall submit 

shop drawings on all major electrical equipment to the Architect for approval. Shop 

Drawings shall be submitted by the Electrical Contractor, not their Subcontractors. These 

shop drawings shall cover such items as lighting fixtures, lamps, disconnects, fuses, 

starters, switchgear, devices, plates, panels, contactors, etc. The Contractor shall 

thoroughly review each item for compliance with these Specifications making any 

necessary corrections prior to submittal. Each shop drawing set shall be stamped, signed 

and dated indicating Contractor review. If the Contractor fails to properly review shop 

drawings, the Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer for all additional reviews on a time 

and material basis. No equipment shall be released for shipment or installed prior to final 

approval by the Engineer. 

B. The Engineer will review all Shop Drawings submitted and will retain one copy for record 

file. 

C. Approval Stamp: This review is to verify general conformance with the design concept of 

the Project and substantial compliance with the information provided in the Contract 

Documents. This review does not in any way relieve the Contractor or their suppliers of 

their responsibility to provide all materials and equipment as specified, in quantities, 

quality and dimensions required. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: 

1. “No Exception Taken” indicates that the Submittal appears to conform to the 

design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may with 

fabrication and/or procurement and installation. 

2. “Reviewed as Noted” indicates that the Submittal, after noted corrections are 

made, appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the 

Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement 

and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without and 

increase in Contract Sum or Time. 

3. “Revised and Resubmit” indicates that the noted revisions are such that a 

corrected copy of the Submittal is required for review to confirm that the noted 

revisions have been understood and made. The Contractor, at his discretion, 

may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation after submitting 

a corrected copy and verifying with the reviewer that the corrected copy is 

acceptable, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase 

in the Contract Sum or Time. 

4. “Rejected” indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the 

specifications, a resubmission is required and fabrication or procurement is not 

authorized. 

D. If the Engineer rejects (Revised and Resubmit or Rejected) the same section two times 

the engineer shall be compensated for additional reviews. Compensation will be 

incorporated by Change Order and will be deducted from the Contractor’s application for 

payment. Contractor is responsible for all delays caused by the resubmittal process. 

E. Provide samples of materials or equipment proposed to be furnished, if requested. 

Samples shall become the property of the Architect/Engineer and will be returned only 

when accompanied by a written request to do so. 


16010-4

F. Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide and maintain an “As Built” set of bluelines 

on site, neatly notating routing, location or other field changes to the Contract 

Documents. Upon Project completion and prior to final close out, turn the “As Built” 

drawings over to the Owner. Provide a detailed transmittal indicating each sheet and 

other information turned over to the Owner and acquire their representative’s signature. 

This information shall be included at the project close out. 

1.6 WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 

A. Installation of all materials specified herein shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike 

manner by workers experienced and skilled in the trade. Only the best quality 

workmanship will be accepted. 

B. The Electrical Contractor shall regularly clean their work area of debris. Removal of all 

Electrical Contractor generated debris and rubbish caused by their work shall be at the 

Contractor’s expense. 

C. Coordination: 

1. Electrical Contractor shall give careful consideration to work of other Contractors 

on the Project and shall organize work as detailed in the Contractor’s ¼” 

coordination drawings so as to not interfere with or delay the work of other 

trades. 

2. Electrical Contractor shall consult all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical 

Drawings and Specifications that apply for correlating information. 

3. Conflicts or interference with work of other trades shall be brought to the 

attention of the Engineer, in writing, before installation. 

4. Should the Electrical Contractor not follow above procedures and install work that 

interferes with work of other Contractors, the Electrical Contractor shall make all 

necessary changes as directed by Engineer to eliminate the interference or 

conflict at the Electrical Contractor’s expense. 

D. Protection of Equipment: 

1. Until final acceptance of the work by the Owner, the Contractor shall be 

responsible for the safety, good condition, and protection from damage of all 

materials and equipment installed. 

2. Switchboards, panelboards, motor starters and other electrical components 

stored or installed on-site shall be covered with plywood and polyethylene or an 

equivalent to protect them from any damage due to site conditions or from work 

by other trades. 

3. If, during shipment or installation, the finish of equipment becomes chipped or 

scratched, the Contractor shall touch up or refinish surfaces to match original 

finish. 

E. Live Work: All electrical equipment shall be de-energized prior to any work being 

performed. If it is necessary to work on any equipment live due to job conditions, 

precautions shall be taken to protect authorized personnel from accidentally coming in 

contact with live parts. Contractor shall have adequate personnel on site along with a 

back up plan to recover from an unscheduled outage. 

1.7 LICENSES, CODES AND FEES 

A. The Contractor shall be a licensed Contractor in the State of which project is being 

constructed. The Contractor shall employ all Licensed Professional Tradesmen required 

for each type of work covered under these Drawings and Specifications. 


16010-5

B. The Contractor shall procure all necessary certificates and permits and pay all required 

fees. The Contractor shall pay all fees and installation charges by the utility company for 

the permanent services. 

C. Codes and Ordinances: All work and materials shall meet the requirements of national, 

state and local codes and ordinances, in every respect. This requirement shall not relieve 

the Contractor from meeting the requirements of Drawings and Specifications that may 

be in excess of all codes and ordinances and not contrary to them. Following is a partial 

list of governing codes and/or standards. 

1. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA) 

2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 

3. State and Local Building Codes 

4. State Board of Health 

5. State Industrial Commission 

6. State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations 

7. National Electric Code 

8. State and Local Electrical Installation Codes 

9. Local Power Company Regulations and Requirements 

D. Inspections: Regular inspections shall be requested by the Electrical Contractor to meet 

all state and local requirements. Contractor shall furnish a certificate of final inspection 

and approval from all enforcement agencies to the Owner. 

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. The Electrical Contractor shall deliver two sets of Operation and Maintenance (O&M) 

manuals to the Engineer prior to final close out. O&M manuals shall consist of approved 

shop drawings, manufacturer’s bulletins, equipment manuals, a list of manufacturers with 

telephone numbers for all equipment that contains replaceable parts and all other data 

covering the care, maintenance and operation of each piece of furnished equipment. 

O&M manuals shall be neatly bound in 3-ring binders, contain an index and section tabs 

and be labeled with the Project name. 

B. Name, address, and telephone number of Electrical Contractor and each associated 

SubContractor installing equipment and systems, local representative for each item of 

equipment and each system. Table of contents shall correspond to the Specifications 

with the Section tab sheets placed before the respective Shop Drawings and operation 

and maintenance instructions. Warranties for more than 1 year shall be included in 

appropriate section. 

1.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TESTING 

A. The Contractor shall fully instruct the Owner in the operation of electrical equipment prior 

to final close out. Contractor shall provide, without additional expense to Owner, services 

of competent instructors who will give full instruction in the care, adjustment, operation 

and maintenance of all electrical systems provided by this Contractor to Owner’s 

permanent employees. Instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the 

installation that they are to give instructions and shall be trained in operating theory, as 

well as in practical operation and maintenance work. Factory trained instructors shall be 

employed wherever they are available. Instruction shall be given during regular work 

week and at a time just prior to the time the equipment is accepted and turned over to 

Owner for regular operation. 


16010-6

B. The Electrical Contractor or his representative shall provide a minimum of up to eight 

hours instruction period for Owner’s personnel, which shall be recorded on DVR with two 

disks being provided to the Owner.. 

C. Electrical Contractor shall test all equipment installed under this Specification and shall 

demonstrate its proper operation to the Engineer. No equipment shall be tested or 

operated for any purpose until it has been fully prepared, connected and made ready for 

normal operation. Damage to equipment due to improper or ill-timed operation or testing 

shall be repaired, at Electrical Contractor’s expense, before final inspection and 

acceptance. 

1.10 WARRANTY 

A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment to be free of 

defects that may develop in any part of their work, caused by faulty workmanship, 

material or equipment failures, for a minimum of one year from the date of final 

acceptance of the work or for as long as normal equipment manufacturer warranties are 

in effect from the date of final acceptance of the work. 

B. During the guarantee period, notification by letter, personal contact or telephone 

conversation of a problem with any electrical system, shall cause the Contractor to 

respond within one week, making repairs or corrections as necessary. After all repairs 

and corrections are complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. 

C. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to provide 24 hour service on call for emergency. 

1.11 TEMPORARY POWER 

A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary power and lighting to 

allow other Contractors and Subcontractors to perform their work. Prior to submitting a 

bid for this Project, contact the General Contractor to determine the type of equipment to 

be used in the performance of the work. The Electrical Bid shall include all labor and 

materials required to provide and maintain a complete temporary power and lighting 

system throughout the course of the project. A minimum of 20 footcandles shall be 

provided for work being performed within the structure. The Electrical Contractor shall 

coordinate all electrical requirements with other Contractors. Temporary power shall 

consist of a minimum of 200A with all required ground fault protection. 


Not Used 


Not Used 



16010-7

SECTION 16030 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 



A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, drilling, removal, patching and 

refinishing of walls, ceilings and floors as required to provide a complete electrical system 

as shown on the Drawings and as called for in these Specifications. 

B. All cutting and patching shall be done with the prior approval of the Architect/Engineer. 

Patching to match existing finishes shall be performed by the proper trades such as 

concrete finishers, sheetrockers, tapers, painters, etc. 

C. No welding or use of a cutting torch shall be permitted without the specific prior approval 

of the Engineer. 


Not Used 


3.1 CUTTING, DRILLING AND PATCHING 

A. All holes in masonry or concrete shall be drilled by use of a core drill. 

B. Cutting: Chases and trenches required for the installation of electrical raceways and/or 

other electrical apparatus shall be saw cut prior to removal of existing materials. All 

cutting shall be straight and level. 

C. Drilling: Impact rotary hammers shall not be used. Approval shall be obtained from the 

Architect and Structural Engineer prior to performing any core drilling. Upon completion of 

installation, seal excess openings with non-shrinking grout or compound. 

D. Sleeves: Wall sleeves required for electrical work shall be provided by this Contractor. 

Adequate fastening arrangements shall be employed in setting sleeves 

E. Patching: All surfaces disturbed during installation of the electrical system shall be fully 

restored to their original condition. Patching shall be performed by workers experienced, 

skilled, and licensed for that particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be 

accepted. 

F. Grouting/Caulking: Contractor shall be responsible for grouting airtight, openings 

adjacent to raceways and other electrical openings to seal against passage of air, smoke, 

or vapors. Maintain ratings of fire rated partitions with 3M or equal fire rated caulking. 


CUTTING AND PATCHING 

16030-1

SECTION 16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 



A. Unless noted otherwise in this Specification or on the Drawings, all materials shall be 

new and in their original packages. All materials shall comply with this Specification and 

at a minimum all applicable codes and standards as listed in Section 16010. 

B. Nameplates shall identify equipment by name and source of power. They shall be a 

minimum of 1 1/4” x 3”, or larger if necessary for wording. Lettering shall be a minimum of 

3/16” in height. Black lettering on white nameplate shall be used. 

C. All distribution equipment, such as disconnects, starters and panels, shall be obtained 

from one manufacturer. 

D. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for verifying locations of such things as 

piping, ductwork, equipment, door swings, heights of cabinets and counters, etc., prior to 

the installation of all electrical equipment. Installed electrical work that interferes with the 

work of other trades shall be relocated by the Electrical Contractor at no additional cost to 

the Owner. 

E. Electrical Contractor shall paint all exposed electrical equipment, such as 

conduit/raceway, meter sockets and panels, to match adjacent finishes. Refer to 

Architectural Specifications for method to be used. 

F. Switched receptacles, where shown, shall be modified by removing split wiring tab and 

connected so that only the lower portion is switched. 

G. All receptacles and outlets located in block walls shall be mounted so that only one block 

is cut. 

H. Receptacles and outlets located on opposite sides of a common wall shall not be 

mounted in the same stud space. At least one stud shall separate devices. Where this 

requirement is not practical, such as in back to back floor plans where devices must be 

back to back, the use of 3M MPP-45 moldable Puddy Pad shall be used in sufficient 

thickness to match the hour rating of the wall. Back to back boxes are not acceptable. 

I. All switches, receptacles and outlets installed within rated assemblies shall be 

firestopped to maintain rating of assemblies. 

J. Circuit numbers shown are for reference only within noted panel. Contractor shall neatly 

identify correct circuit numbers on the as-built drawings. 

K. Where required, the Contractor shall provide GFI devices or GFI breakers per the NEC. 


Not Used 

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 

16050-1



A. Provide nameplates on all equipment such as disconnects, starters and panels. 

B. Identify all pull and junction boxes with circuit or feeder numbers and source of power 

using black permanent marker. 

C. Each panelboard shall be provided with a typed circuit directory. Clearly describe loads 

and areas served. Handwritten directories will not be accepted. Provide Owner with 

Microsoft Word compatible electronic file containing all circuit directories. 

D. The Electrical Contractor shall perform saw cutting, trenching, backfilling, compaction and 

patching required for underground raceway systems shown or specified. 

E. Electrical Contractor shall verify the location of all fixtures and devices with the Architect 

prior to installation. 

F. Provide access panels where junction boxes or pull boxes are installed in inaccessible 

locations. All access panels shall be approved by the Engineer and Architect prior to 

installation. 

G. All receptacles and outlets located in block walls shall be mounted so that only one block 

is cut. 

H. Electrical Contractor shall submit all fire stopping methods to the local authorities for 

approval. Provide copies of all approved fire stopping methods to the Engineer. All fire 

stopping shall be reviewed and approved by Local Authorities prior to installation. 


BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 

16050-2

SECTION 16111 - CONDUITS AND FITTINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Provide raceways wherever required by the Drawings and 




A. Steel Conduit and Fittings: Galvanized steel by recognized manufacturers of raceway 

systems of type and sizes required. 

B. Non-Metallic Conduit: High impact PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Schedule 40 rated for 90- 

degree C wire, Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) listed in accordance with Article 347 of 

the National Electric Code (NEC) for underground and exposed use. PVC conduit shall 

be Schedule 80 for under roadway or vehicle crossing area. 

C. The following manufacturers are approved for conduit: 

1. Alfex 

2. Allied 

3. Canon 

4. Republic 

5. Sealtight 

6. Triangle 

7. VAW of America 

8. Youngstown 

D. The following manufactures are approved for conduit fittings: 

2.2 CONDUITS 

1. Appleton 

2. CH 

3. Kellems 

4. OZ Red Dot 

5. T&B 

A. Minimum Size: Conduit shall be sized according to the Drawings, with no conduit smaller 

than ½-inch trade size. If not sized on the Drawings, the NEC shall be used to determine 

the size based on the number and size of conductors required with THHN/THWN 

insulation. The Engineer shall approve all calculated conduit sizes and method of 

installation prior to installation. 

CONDUITS AND FITTINGS 

16111-1

B. Type: Conduit shall be rigid galvanized steel. In lieu of rigid galvanized steel the following 

conduits may be used only as specified herein: 

2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS 

1. Intermediate Steel Conduit may be used in all locations. 

2. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): May be used in dry locations for wiring below 600 

volts in all interior spaces not in direct contact with earth or where exposed to 

weather using steel watertight compression fittings and backstraps. EMT shall 

not be installed in concrete slabs or in soil. 

3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Flexible metal conduit (FMC) or liquid tight flexible metal 

conduit (LFMC) shall be permitted only in the following locations: 

a. Flexible metal conduit may be used in masonry wall construction for 

‘fishing’ of circuitry. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) shall be 

used for final connections to equipment such as motors, fixed equipment, 

electric heating equipment, food service equipment, etc. LFMC shall be 

used in lengths no longer than thirty-six.. FMC ‘fished’ in masonry 

construction shall not be run horizontally and shall transition to EMT as 

soon as practical when leaving the wall construction from its vertical run. 

b. Fittings shall be steel set screw type for smaller sizes and steel, clamp 

type for larger sizes. 

c. LFMC shall have fully sized and insulated grounding conductor within the 

conduit. 

d. Concealed within equipment cabinets if approved by Architect/Engineer. 

4. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: May be used only where run in soil or in concrete 

slabs on grade unless otherwise noted on Drawings or specified herein. 

a. Conduit entries into pole bases or concrete pads shall be rigid 

galvanized steel. Conduits emerging out of floor slab-on-grade shall be 

rigid galvanized steel. 

b. All non-metallic conduits shall have a grounding conductor sized in 

accordance with Table 250-95 of the NEC, but not less than #12AWG. 

Contractor shall increase conduit size to accommodate the grounding 

conductor. 

5. Metalclad Cable (MC): MC cable may be used for light fixture connections in 

accessible ceiling and within casework where permitted by code. All MC cable 

shall have fully rated and insulated grounding conductor. MC cable shall not be 

used in walls or non accessible ceilings. 

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit: 

1. Couplings, locknuts and bushings shall be threaded type. Threadless couplings 

shall not be used without prior approval of Engineer. 

2. Locknuts shall be of the conduit type. 

3. Bushings shall consist of an insulating insert molded or locked into metallic body 

fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or non-metallic material are not permitted. 

4. Where conduit is installed in concrete, Erickson-type and set-screw couplings 

may be used to complete a conduit run. Set-screw fittings shall be approved for 

concrete installation and shall be case-hardened steel with hex head and cup 

point to firmly set in conduit wall for positive ground. 

5. Threaded cast iron type sealing fittings shall be used. Fittings used to prevent 

passage of water vapor shall be continuous drain type. Fittings in concealed work 

shall be installed in a flush steel box with blank coverplate having the same finish 

as that of other electrical plates in room. 


16111-2

B. EMT: 

1. For conduit 2-inch and smaller, fillings shall be concrete tight compression gland 

type only, with threaded outer nut or set-screw type. Fittings shall be malleable 

steel type, cast fittings of any kind are not acceptable. 

2. For conduit over 2-inch, connectors shall be set-screw type with two screws each 

and couplings shall be set-screw type with four screws each. Set-screws shall be 

case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly set in wall of conduit 

for positive ground. 

3. Indent type connectors shall not be permitted. 

4. Fittings made of pot metal Die cast or pressure-cast zinc alloy shall not be 

permitted. 

C. Flexible Metal: Multiple point type threading into internal wall of conduit convolutions or 

set screw type. Material shall be only steel or malleable iron. 

D. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal: Type incorporating a threaded grounding cone, a steel or 

plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated 

throats. Material shall be only steel or malleable iron. 

E. Direct Burial Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Fittings as recommended by conduit 

manufacturer for bonding with solvent cement. 

2.4 FIRE STOPS 

A. General Requirements: Conduits and conduit sleeves that penetrate fire rated walls or 

partitions shall be sealed with Hevi-Duty/Nelson, Type CLK, non-sagging adhesive 

sealant or equal manufactured by 3M. All firestopping products shall be installed by 

experienced workers, familiar with the proper application and installation of appropriate 

U.L fire stopping design rating systems. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall submit 

fire stopping manufacturer’s appropriate conduit and conduit sleeve penetration system 

design criteria and UL approved number for each type of UL fire stopping design rating 

system used on the project. 


3.1 CONDUIT ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT 


1. Conduits shall be concealed within floor, ceiling or wall building construction, 

unless specifically noted or otherwise specified. Conduits shall only be installed 

exposed only in mechanical rooms and electric rooms and for connections at 

motors, utilization equipment, and exposed ceilings.. Conduits in exposed 

ceilings shall be laid out parallel or pendicular to basic building lines and shall be 

painted to match exposed ceiling. 

2. Conduit systems shall be complete with fittings and accessories to make system 

complete and electrically continuous from outlet to outlet and to cabinets and 

junction boxes. Conduits shall form a neat appearing, mechanically firm 

assembly, adhering to NECA standards of installation and good electrical 

practice. Conduit ends shall be reamed before installation and shall be capped 

during construction period. Route exposed conduits and conduit above 

accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping with 

elbows, offsets, and bends uniform and symmetrical. 


16111-3

3. Conduits shall not obstruct head room, walkways or doorways. 

4. Conduits shall be secured to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet 

boxes by bonding type locknuts. Rigid and IMC conduit installations shall have a 

locknut on outside of enclosure and locknut and bushing on inside of enclosure. 

EMT installations may have a single locknut on inside of enclosure, wrench tight. 

Conduit connections shall not be made to junction box covers. 

5. Provide a pull wire in empty conduits, consisting of one No. 12 steel or copper 

wire or heavy duty nylon cord for small conduits and nylon rope for large 

conduits. 

6. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling 

operations. Conduit shall be fastened using straps or clamps, lay-in adjustable 

hangers, clevis hangers or bolted split galvanized hangers secured to structure 

with machine screws, expansion sleeves or lead anchors. Spring steel type 

supports or fasteners shall be permitted for concealed 1/2-inch EMT only. Chain, 

wire or perforated straps shall not be used to support or fasten conduit. 

7. Conduit support spacing shall be provided as required by the NEC, but in no 

case shall the maximum spacing of supports exceed six feet for conduits smaller 

than 1-inch trade size and 10 feet for conduits 1-inch trade size and larger. 

8. Group conduits in parallel runs where practical using conduit racks constructed of 

steel channel with conduit straps/damps or trapeze hangers with U-bolts or other 

approved fasteners. 

9. Fasteners shall be sized and designed for intended use. Fasteners, in solid 

masonry or concrete, shall be steel or malleable iron concrete inserts, 1/4-inch 

minimum diameter steel expansion anchors embedded not less than 1 1/8-inches 

or 1/4-inch minimum diameter power set fasteners with depth of penetration at 

least three inches. Hollow masonry anchors shall be toggle bolts, hollow wall 

fasteners, or concrete block anchors. Sheetmetal screws shall be used on metal 

studs and wood screws used on wood construction. Attachment by wood plugs 

or wood blocking is not permitted. 

3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION 

A. General Requirements: All raceways shall be installed in accordance with the NECA 

Standard of Installation: 

1. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends. 

2. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. 

3. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts for fastening conduit to cast boxes and for 

fastening conduit to sheetmetal boxes in damp or wet locations. 

4. Install no more than equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes for 

power circuits and two 90-degree bends for low voltage and communications 

circuits. 

5. Avoid moisture traps where possible. Where unavoidable, provide junction box 

with drain fitting at conduit low point. Outdoor conduits shall be graded a 

minimum of six inches per one-hundred feet with no traps. 

6. Coordinate all conduits with other trades. Consult with Mechanical Contractor 

before installing conduits for electrical feeders so that conflicts between locations 

of conduit runs, piping, and ductwork will be adjusted prior to installation. In 

general, large pipe mains and air ducts shall be given priority in available space. 

Conduit runs shall be installed so as to maintain, wherever practical, a minimum 

separation of three inches from water and waste piping and six inches from 

steam piping. 

7. Provide sealing fittings, to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass 

from warm to cold locations. 

8. Drilling, cutting, and patching required for conduit installation shall be as 

described in Section 16012. 


16111-4

B. Conduits in New Masonry Walls: Conduits shall be installed during wall construction or 

“fished in”. No conduit shall be channeled in without special permission of Architect 

C. Horizontal Runs in Walls: No conduit shall run horizontally in concrete block or brick walls 

without approval of Architect/Engineer. Horizontal runs shall be made in floor or ceiling 

construction. 

D. Conduits on Equipment: Conduits shall not be mounted on ductwork, ventilation units or 

other such mechanical equipment, except where necessary to make connections to 

electrical devices that are part of or mounted on such equipment. Where raceways must 

be run on equipment, care shall be taken not to cover access doors, controls, removable 

panels, etc., or otherwise hinder the normal maintenance and repair of the equipment. 

E. Conduit Through Roofs: Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork 

where possible; otherwise, route through roof jack with pitch pocket. 

F. Conduits Through Exterior Walls: Where conduit systems pass through exterior walls or 

footings below grade, entrance shall be made watertight by providing pipe sleeves in wall 

with 1/2-inch minimum clearance around conduit and caulking with oakum or an 

approved non-hardening type caulking compound. Alternate acceptable method is by 

means of a conduit entrance seal, O.Z./Gedney Company, Type “FSK’ or as approved by 

Engineer. Seal conduit stubs as above and, in addition, inside of conduit shall be sealed 

watertight with an approved non-hardening type caulking compound packed around 

wires. 

G. Conduits Above Furred or Suspended Ceilings: Branch circuit conduits and conduits 

feeding ceiling lighting shall not be supported by suspended ceiling lighting fixtures, 

mechanical piping or air conditioning ducts. Branch circuit conduits may be fastened to 

ceiling support members with fasteners designed for that purpose. 

H. Conduit Sleeves: Same material as conduits required in the area. Both ends of sleeves 

shall have bushings. 

3.3 GROUTING AND FIRE STOPS 


3.4 CONDUIT STUB-UPS 

1. Contractor shall be responsible for grouting airtight any openings adjacent to 

raceways and other openings to seal against passage of air, smoke or vapors. 

2. Contractor shall seal around each conduit or conduit sleeve penetrating fire rated 

walls or partitions with sealant specified. Interior conduit sleeves in walls or 

partitions shall be sealed to provide a complete fire rated installation in 

accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions. 

3. All firestopping products shall be installed by experienced workers, familiar with 

the proper application and installation of appropriate UL fire stopping design 

rating systems. Contractor shall submit fire stopping manufacturer’s appropriate 

conduit and conduit sleeve penetration system design criteria and UL approved 

number for each type of UL fire stopping design rating system used on the 

project prior to installation. 

A. Stubbed Up Through Floor Slabs: Where conduit is called to be stubbed up at an 

exposed location, a rigid conduit threaded coupling shall be installed flush with finish 

floor. Provide a recessed pipe plug, flush with floor, in each stub-up. 


16111-5

3.5 EMPTY CONDUITS 

A. Identification: Empty conduits installed for future use or for use by others shall have 

markers and identification at terminations. Empty raceway boxes shall be marked with 

the system named in a visible place on the exposed coverplate. 



16111-6

SECTION 16112 - OUTLET BOXES 

PART 1. -GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Provide outlet boxes of heavy gauge galvanized steel, of knockout 

type, wherever required by the Drawings and Specifications. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Recognized Manufacturers of electric outlet boxes, 

manufactured in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code (NEC) 

and industry standards. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Ceiling Boxes: 4-inch octagonal ceiling boxes shall be used, except as otherwise 

specified. For additional wire space 4 1 1/16 square boxes may be used. Outlet boxes for 

fixtures shall be complete with fixture studs. 

B. Wall Boxes: 4-inch square wall boxes shall be used with one or two device raised cover. 

Raised covers or tile rings shall be flush with finished walls. Locations with a single 

device may use 2-inch by 4-inch by 2 ½” (deep) device box. 

1. Boxes in plastered walls shall be standard 4 inch square boxes with appropriate 

plaster rings. 

2. Boxes in brick, exposed concrete block, glazed tile and wood paneled walls shall 

be 4-inch square having a raised cover with straight sides not less than 1-inch. 4 

11/16- inch square box may be used for additional wire space. Where thickness 

of masonry or more than two gangs are required 3 ¾-inch high masonry boxes 

may be used. 

3. Straight through and sectional switch boxes shall be used. 




1. Boxes shall not be recessed back-to-back on opposite sides of wall, offset a 

minimum of six inches. Through wall boxes shall not be used. 

2. Boxes shall be roughed-in to provide a neat appearance. Centerlines of boxes 

shall be aligned vertically and horizontally. Boxes shall be symmetrically located 

with the major architectural features when they occur between doors and 

windows and in wood panels. 

3. Adjust horizontal position of boxes such that bottom of box is located on top of 

masonry coarse and vertical centerline is either on a masonry course or centered 

on a masonry unit. Contractor shall coordinate with other trades so boxes are 

installed with no unsightly joints around them. 

4. Boxes shall be installed such that the front of box is flush with finished wall, 

boxes more than 1/4 inch back from finished wall shall not be acceptable. 

OUTLET BOXES 

16112-1

5. Boxes in finished ceiling construction shall be supported by structural building 

members or when necessary to bar hangers or steel channels supported by 

either structural building members or ceiling framing channels. Exposed boxes 

shall be secured to structure by toggle bolts, wood screws or lead anchors. 

6. Contractor shall coordinate height and location of boxes with other trades so as 

not to conflict with other work or equipment It shall be the Electrical Contractor’s 

responsibility to move boxes that conflict with others at no additional cost to 

Owner. 


OUTLET BOXES 

16112-2

SECTION 16113 - PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Provide pull boxes as required to facilitate the pulling of wires or when 

more than four quarter bends occur in any conduit run. No attempt has been made to 

show all necessary boxes on Drawings. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Type: 

1. Pull and junction boxes shall be sized and installed to meet requirements of 

Article 370 of the latest edition National Electric Code (NEC). 

2. Provide galvanized code-gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes. 



A. General Requirements: Locate pull and junction boxes shall be located so as to be 

accessible after building is finished. Pull and junction boxes shall not be placed in any 

finished spaces without prior approval of Architect/Engineer. No boxes shall be installed 

above plaster ceilings without prior approval of Architect/Engineer. 

1. Pull boxes installed above lay-in ceiling tiles shall be within twenty-four inches of 

ceiling for accessibility and shall not conflict with removal of ceiling tiles. 

2. Pull boxes shall be within twenty-four inches where installed above access 

panels. 

3.2 CONDUCTORS IN PULL BOXES 

A. General Requirements: Conductors shall be of sufficient length within pull boxes to neatly 

install and organize conductors without excess. 

3.3 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Pull Boxes: Pull boxes shall be identified as to type of system in box as follows: 

1. Stencil coverplate with 1/2-inch black letters in non-finished areas. 

2. Identify with a tag inside of box in finished areas. 

3. Paint boxes red and stencil “FIRE ALARM” for all boxes used for fire alarm and 

detection systems. 

B. Conductors: Identify in a permanent neat and legible manner all conductors or cables 

within box by means of tags, pressure sensitive tape or cable ties. 


PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 

16113-1

SECTION 16117- SAFETY SWITCHES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Provide safety switches wherever required by the Drawings and 



1. Every effort has been expended to provide an accurate list of mechanical 

equipment motors as shown on the drawings and the Equipment Schedule. 

However, the Contractor shall verify motor horsepower sizes on site before 

installing switches or selecting fuses. 

A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 16010. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All safety switches shall be of one manufacturer as follows or 

approved equal. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Type: 

1. Cutler-Hammer 

2. General Electric 

3. Siemens 

4. Square D 

1. Safety switches shall be fused. Non-fusible switches may be used in lieu of 

fusible where allowed by the National Electrical Code (NEC). 

2. Safety switches shall be NEMA HD (heavy duty) type, horsepower rated, and of 

ampere sizes shown on Drawings or as required by the NEC. Safety switches 

shall have NEMA I enclosures, except in wet locations or where indicated as 

weatherproof, in which case a NEMA 3R enclosure shall be used. Locations on 

roof or outside shall be considered wet locations. 

3. Fusible safety switches shall contain Class R fuse provisions to reject fuses, 

except Class R type. 

4. Safety switches shall contain padlocking provisions and defeater screw 

mechanisms. Provide interlock contacts where so specified. 

5. Safety switches shall be rated 250 volts where used on 120/208 volt or 120/240 

volt systems. 

6. Switches rated 30 amperes through 100 amperes shall have lugs listed for 60- 

degree C or 75-degree C conductors. Switches rated over 100 amperes shall 

have Iugs listed for 75 degrees C. 


SAFETY SWITCHES 

16117-1

SECTION 16118 - FUSES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Provide all labor, materials, and accessories as required to protect feeders and branch 

circuits for panels, motors, and electrical appliances wherever required by the Drawings 

and Specifications or by applicable provisions of the National Electric Code (NEC). 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All fuses shall be of one manufacturer as follows: 

2.2 FUSE TYPES 

1. Bussman 

2. Littlefuse 

3. Shawmut 

A. 600 Ampere and Below (Bussman model numbers used to set the minimum standard for 

material and equipment): 

1. All fuses shall have 300,000 amperes RMS interrupting rating. 

2. Fuses shall be Underwriters’ Laboratories Class R current limiting, dual element 

time delay, rejection type. 

3. Fuses shall be Bussman LPN-RK_SP. 

B. 601 Ampere and Above (Bussman model numbers used to set the minimum standard for 

material and equipment): 

1. All fuses shall have 200,000 amperes RMS interrupting rating. 

2. Fuses shall be Underwriter’ Laboratories Class L current limiting, time delay, 

pure silver link type. 

3. Fuses shall be Bussman KRP-C_SP. 


3.1 FUSE INSTALLATION 


1. Provide fuses in all fusible switches 

2. Provide all fuses of ampere ratings required by the NEC to protect feeders and 

equipment. 


FUSES 

16118-1

SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Provide and connect 600 volt and below wire and cable. 

B. Wiring Sizing: Wire sizes indicated on Drawings are for copper conductors. Conductor 

sizes are specified by American Wire Gage (AWG) numbers, except where conductor 

cross sections in MCM is indicated. Unless noted otherwise conductors smaller than 12 

AWG shall not be used for branch circuits. 

C. In Conduit: Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, electric system conductors shall be 

installed in conduit. Conduit fill requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC) shall not 

be exceeded. 

D. Metalclad Cable: MC Cable may be used in accessible ceilings and in casework, where 

permitted by Code. Ensure that any use of MC cable is properly used and supported in 

accordance with NEC 330. All MC cable shall have a fully rated, insulated, internal 

grounding conductor. 

1.2 CONDUCTORS FOR COMMUNICATION AND OTHER SYSTEMS 

A. General Requirements: Refer to specific communication system Sections for conductor 

requirements. 

B. Conductors not installed in raceway shall be plenum rated. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide and connect wire and cable to NEMA, ICBA and 

Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) standards. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All wire and cable and accessories shall be as follows: 

2.2 CONDUCTORS 

1. Building Wire/Cable: Recognized manufactures of electrical building wire. 

2. Plastic Tape: AMP, Eagle or 3M. 

3. Spring Wire Connectors: Heyco, Ideal, 3M or T&B. 

4. Split-Bolt Connectors: Bumdy, O-Z/Gedney, Square D, or T&B. 

5. Solderless Crimp Pressure Connectors: Bumdy, Ideal T&B or 3M. 

6. Twist-on Wire Connectors: Buchanan, Ideal or 3M 

7. Vingl Electric Insulation Tape: Permacel, Tomic or 3M. 

A. Copper Conductors: Conductors shall be soft, annealed 98% copper, electrically 

continuous and free from short circuits or grounds. 

B. Aluminum Conductors: Aluminum conductors shall not be used on this Project. 

WIRE AND CABLE 

16120-1

2.3 SOLID AND STRANDED 


2.4 INSULATION 

1. Wires shall be solid or stranded for sizes 10 AWG and smaller. 

2. Wires shall be stranded for sizes 8 AWG and larger. 

A. Voltage Class: Insulation, unless otherwise noted, shall be 600 volt. 

B. Insulation Type: Conductor insulation shall be as follows: 

1. Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuit Conductors: Type THHN/THWN with a 

temperature rating of 75 degrees C. 

C. Color Code: Wire and cable color shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the 

NEC. On larger cables, where factory color coding is not available, marking tape shall be 

used to identify each phase and neutral conductors. A minimum length of six inches shall 

be color coded at each end and in all pull boxes. For modifications and additions to 

existing wiring systems, color coding shall match existing wiring systems. 

2.5 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS 

A. Conductors 8 AWG and Smaller: Use solderless crimp or indent type pressure 

connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps for 8 AWG. For 10 

AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps. Strictly comply 

with the number, size and combination of conductors as listed on manufacturer’s 

packaging. 

B. Conductors 6 AWG and Larger: Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and 

taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical 

tape. 

2.6 CONTROL WIRING 


1. Control conductors shall be 14 AWG or larger, if provided under this division 

Wiring provided under Division 15, shall be #18 AWG or larger. 

2. Conductors shall be sized large enough so that voltage drop under in-rush 

conditions will not adversely affect operation of the controls. 


16120-2


3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS 


1. Provide 12 AWG or larger conductors for power and lighting circuits. 

2. Provide 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs 

longer than 100 feet and for 20 ampere. All 120v circuits shall have dedicated 

neutral conductors. 

3. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same 

raceway or cable. 

4. Conductors shall be tested to be continuous and free from shorts and grounds. 

5. Neatly install, organize, and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and 

panelboards. 

6. Conductor lengths for parallel circuits shall be equal. 

7. Provide a minimum of twelve inches of slack conductor at each outlet. 

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS 


1. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use Underwriters’ 

Laboratories (UL) listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger 

wires. 

2. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 

3. Control and communication conductors shall be installed in separate, dedicated 

raceway systems. 

3.3 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS 


1. Splices shall only occur in accessible junction boxes. Splices in conductors 

installed below grade are not permitted 

2. Wires shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to installing Iugs and connectors. 

3. Splices, taps and terminations shall be made to carry full ampacity of conductors 

without perceptible temperature rise. 

4. Spare conductors shall be terminated with electrical tape and tagged “spare” 



16120-3

SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Provide all labor, materials and accessories as required to install and 

connect wiring devices wherever required by Drawings and Specifications. 






2.2 DEVICE COLOR 

1. All wiring devices shall be of one manufacturer as follows (Leviton and Hubbell 

catalog numbers are used to specify required type and quality): 

a. Arrow-Hart 

b. Eagle 

c. General Electric 

d. Hubbell 

e. Leviton 

f. Pass & Seymour 

g. Slater 

h. Sierra 

2. All wall plates shall be of one manufacturer as follows: 

a. Arrow Hart 

b. Leviton 

c. Sierr2 

d. Slater 

A. General Requirements: Unless noted otherwise, all wiring devices and wall plates shall 

be coordinated with the Architect. 

2.3 SWITCHES 

A. General Requirements: Switches for lighting loads shall be 20 amp, 120 volt, quiet toggle 

type and side wired. 

B. Switches shall be equal to the following: 

1. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, single pole Leviton #1221-2X 

2. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, 3-way Leviton #1223-2X 

3. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, 4-way Leviton #1224-2X 

C. Switches controlling over nine amps shall be 20 amp rated. 

WIRING DEVICES 

16140-1

2.4 CONVENIENCE OUTLETS 

A. General Requirements: Duplex receptacles shall be 20 amp, 125 volt, 3-wire, grounding 

type, quickwire push-in and side or back and side wired. All receptacles shall be installed 

with the ground slot down. Provide GFI receptacles where shown or required by the 

National Electrical Code (NEC) and install with ground slot down. 

B. Receptacles shall be equal to the following: 

1. 20 amp, 125 volt, GFI Leviton #M1636-X (NEMA 5-20R) 

2. 20 amp, 125 volt Leviton #BR20-X (NEMA 5-20R) 

C. Special receptacles shall be equal to the following: 

2.5 DEVICE PLATES 

1. 20 amp, 250 volt Leviton #5821-X (NEMA 6-20R) 

2. 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3-pole, 4-wire, grounding Leviton #278 (NEMA 14-30R) 

3. 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3-pole, 4-wire, grounding Leviton #279 (NEMA 14-50R) 

A. General Requirements: Device plates shall be provided for all devices shown on the 

Drawings or called for in the specifications. Device plates in finished and unfinished areas 

shall be nylon, unless noted otherwise. Multiple device plates shall be constructed of a 

single plate. No sectional plates will be accepted. 

B. Special Screws: Where so indicated, device plates shall be complete with special 

tamperproof spanner oval head screw. Furnish Owner with three special screw drivers for 

the spanner head screws. 

C. Engraved Plates: Engraved plates shall have letters as required, 1/8-inch minimum letter 

height and black filling. Printed tape or glued on plates are not acceptable. The following 

plates shall be engraved: 

1. Wall plates so indicated on Drawings. 

2. Switch wall plates controlling any lights which are out of sight of switches. 

3. Switch wall plates controlling motors and other utilization equipment. 


3.1 INSTALLATION OF DEVICES 

A. General Requirements: Device height shall be as follows, except where noted otherwise 

on the Drawings: 

B. Switches, receptacles and outlets shall be mounted at the following heights, measured 

from device center to floor, unless noted otherwise. 

1. Receptacle 18” 

2. Telephone outlet 18” 

3. Telephone outlet, wall 54” 

4. Switch 48” 

C. The Contractor shall coordinate the mounting height of all special receptacles with the 

Architect, Owner, Mechanical Contractor and equipment suppliers. 


16140-2

D. Where locations shown or mounting heights specified for devices conflict with other 

trades or building finishes, the Contractor shall coordinate exact requirements prior to 

installation and install only after the approval of all involved. 

E. Provide spacers as required between outlet boxes and devices so that each device is 

flush with the finished wall. Plate screws shall not be used to stabilize device. 

F. Location: 

3.2 MOVING DEVICES 

1. Switches near doors shall be located on side opposite the hinges (verify door 

swings with Architectural Drawings before installation) and close to door trim. 

Edge of switch plate shall be within six inches of door frame. 

A. The Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, reserves the right to move any device a 

distance of ten feet in any direction from the location shown on the Drawings without an 

increase in Contract amount. This requirement shall only apply to devices before 

installation. 

B. In the event that an outlet shown on the Drawings will not be able to serve the specified 

piece of equipment, the outlet shall be relocated as required, with no increase in contract 

amount. 



16140-3

SECTION 16150 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Provide circuits, including final connections unless noted otherwise, to 

each item of electrically powered equipment wherever required by the Drawings and 


1.2 CONNECTIONS 

A. Motors: Connect as indicated on drawings. 

B. Kitchen Equipment: Connect as called for in the Electrical Equipment Schedule. 

Equipment locations, conduit rough-ins and dimensions shall be obtained from the 

kitchen equipment suppliers’ Shop Drawings prior to conduit installation. 

C. Do not scale Electrical Drawings for rough-in dimensions. 


Not Used 


3.1 CONDUIT STUB-UPS 

A. General Requirements: Provide a rigid conduit coupling installed flush with finished floor 

for conduit stub-ups through floor to equipment or machinery. Rigid conduit shall be run 

up to equipment as required. Provide a recessed pipe plug in flush coupling for future 

connections where noted to be capped flush with finished floor. 


ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 

16150-1

SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING SYSTEM 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Provide labor, materials, equipment and accessories for the following 

Work: 


1. Electric Service Ground: Provide grounding of secondary service neutrals at the 

supply side of the service disconnecting means in accordance with the National 

Electric Code (NEC). 

a. Provide grounding of the metallic conduit system, cabinets, non-current 

carrying parts of equipment and neutral service conductor at the service 

entrance. 

2. Equipment Ground: Provide solid interconnections to form a continuous 

permanent and effective equipment grounding medium between the entire 

conduit system, switch boxes, cabinets, motor frames and other permanently 

installed electrical equipment: 

a. Feeder and Branch Circuits: Provide an insulated grounding conductor, 

sized per the NEC, but not less than #12 AWG. 

1) All EMT conduits 

2) All PVC conduits 

3) All flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight flexible metal conduits 

3. Metal Piping: Bond interior metal piping systems to the services equipment 

enclosure, the grounded conductor at the service or to the grounding electrode 

conductor. 

4. Communication System Grounding: Provide grounding for each communication 

system. 

A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide grounding systems to comply with the requirements of 

the NEC. Coordinate with the local electrical inspector. 

B. Tests: Measure ground grid resistance with earth test megger. Provide additional ground 

rods and conductors as required until resistance to ground meets NEC and local code 

requirements. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Grounding System: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems 

with assembly of materials including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, 

terminals, grounding rods/electrodes, bonding jumpers, and additional accessories 

needed for complete installation. Where materials or components are not indicated, 

provide products meeting the requirements of NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry 

standards for applications indicated. 

GROUNDING SYSTEM 

16450-1

1. Conductors: Copper cable, stranded of size per the NEC unless otherwise noted 

on Drawings. 

2. Bonding Jumper Braid: Copper braided tape, constructed of 30 gauge bare 

copper wires and properly sized for indicated applications. 

3. Connectors, Terminals, and Clamps: Burdy, Keamey, T & B, Penn-Union, or 

approved equal. 

4. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel, ½” diameter, a minimum of three 10 feet in 

length and 10’ apart. 



A. General Requirements: Grounding and bonding shall comply with the requirements of the 

NEC and shall be coordinated with the local electrical inspector. This, however, shall not 

be construed as relieving the Contractor from meeting any requirements of the Drawings 

and Specifications that may exceed code requirements. 

3.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE 

A. General Requirements: Grounding electrode shall be the metal water piping system of 

the building. Water piping system electrode shall be supplemented by the following 

additional electrodes: 

1. Metal Frame of Building: Metal frame of building in those buildings with a metal 

frame system. 

3.3 MAIN BONDING JUMPER 

A. General Requirements: Connect secondary service neutral and grounding electrode 

conductor to equipment grounding bus in service equipment. 

3.4 FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUITS 

A. General Requirements: Provide an insulated grounding conductor, sized in accordance 

with the NEC, within all PVC conduits, within all flexible metallic conduits and within all 

EMT conduits . 

3.5 CONDUITS, BOXES, CABINETS AND PANELBOARDS 


1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. Establish ground continuity by providing 

standard couplings, connectors, fittings and jumpers at all grounding type wiring 

devices, motor and ground terminals. 

2. Ground wires shall be grounded to each pull box, junction box, outlet box, 

cabinets and other enclosures through which the ground wires pass, except for 

special isolated grounding systems. 


16450-2

3. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for ground wire termination where 

required. 

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 

A. Motors and Starters: Provide lugs in motor terminal boxes and starter housings for 

ground wire termination and provide interconnecting ground wire. 

B. Receptacles: Provide a ground wire from receptacle and light switch green ground 

terminals to outlet box ground screws. 

C. Lighting Fixtures: Provide a green ground wire with power wires from fixture through 

flexible conduit to first outlet box for all fixtures connected with flexible conduit. 

D. Electrical Equipment: Provide a ground lug for termination of green ground conductor for 

all Fixed electrical equipment. 

3.7 COMMUNICATION GROUNDING 


1. Provide grounding at telephone and CATV backboards. 



16450-3

SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Provide panelboards wherever required by the Drawings and 



A. Circuit Numbers: Circuit numbers shown on Drawings shall be used for reference only. 

Actual connections shall be in accordance with phasing of cabinet, load balance and 

common neutral requirements. 

B. Contractor shall contact local power utility anc coordinate all service requirements and 

pay all associated fees and charges. 




A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct panelboards to NEMA and Underwriters’ 

Laboratories (UL) standards. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All panelboards shall be as follows: 

2.2 COMPONENTS 

1. AMP (Cutler-Hammer Components) 

2. Cutler-Hammer 

3. EMI (Cutler-Hammer Components) 

4. General Electric 

5. Siemens-ITE 

6. Square D 

7. States Electric 

A. General Requirements: Panelboards shall be dead front safety type and shall be UL 

listed. 

B. Enclosures: Enclosures shall be constructed of code grade steel with concealed trim 

clamps and hinges. Panel front shall be lockable with all panels throughout the Project 

keyed alike. Provide two keys for each panel. 

C. Lugs: Solderless lugs only shall be provided in mains, unless otherwise noted on the 

Drawings and/or the Panelboard Schedule. Main lugs shall be suitable for both 60- 

degree- C and 75-degree-conductors. Main and neutral lugs shall be compression type. 

Provide sufficient number of lugs to individually terminate each conductor. 

PANELBOARDS 

16470-1

D. Bussing: Provide bussing made from 98% electrolytic copper or 55% conductivity 

aluminum and independently supported without dependence upon circuit breakers. 

E. Gutters: Provide oversized gutters for feed through, where indicated or required. Where 

double tugs are not permitted by local code authorities, provide suitable pull box or gutter 

adjacent to panels for connections. Feeder wiring shall be capable of accepting a dampon 

ammeter. 

F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Provide circuit breakers as follows: 

1. Bolt-in type. 

2. Multi-pole breakers shall be common trip and reset, with one handle. 

3. Rated for 10,000 amperes for 120/208 volt systems minimum, in lighting and 

appliance panelboards. Rated for 22,000 amperes, minimum, for all distribution 

panelboards. Refer to drawings if higher ratings are required. 

4. Contain HACR label when feeding heating, air conditioning or refrigeration loads. 

G. Fusible Switches: Provide quick-made, quick break fusible switches (QMB or equal). 

H. Special Panelboard Requirements: 

1. The following shall be provided as specified: 

a. Panelboards with wireways above or below the panelboard shall have 

conduit enclosures of the same size and finish as the panelboards with 

removable, screw attached, front covers. 

b. Panelboards with double tubs shall have separate individualized fronts 

for each tub. 

c. Provide lock-offs over required breaker handles as noted. 

d. Provide GFI breakers as noted. 

e. Breakers serving equipment under the kitchen exhaust hood shall be 

shunt-trip for emergency shut-down. 




3.2 SPARE CONDUITS 

1. Feeder and branch circuit conduits shall meet the cabinet squarely and shall be 

arranged to facilitate training of conductors to their respective terminals. 

2. Top of panelboard tubs shall be 6’-6” above finished floor. 

A. General Requirements: Provide three 3/4-inch empty conduits from each flush mounted 

panelboard to ceiling space or area above panelboard for future panel connections. 

Empty conduits shall be capped or turned horizontally (Parallel to floor). 

3.3 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Panel Identification: Panelboards shall be labeled per Section 16000.Provide 

identification plates on front exterior of panleboards. 

PANELBOARDS 

16470-2

B. Circuit Identification: 

1. Circuit Breaker Panelboards: Provide typed directories identifying all circuits with 

clear plastic cover mounted in a card holder. Room numbers or names used for 

circuit identification shall correspond to nameplates installed on room doors by 

General Contractor or as selected by Owner and shall be verified as these may 

not be the same as room titles on Drawings. Provide Owner with electronic file of 

circuit directories in Microsoft Word compatible format. 


PANELBOARDS 

16470-3

Buffalo Wild Wings

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?